Documentos de Académico
Documentos de Profesional
Documentos de Cultura
iR5075/5065/5055 Series
Feb 29 2008
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol
Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Introduction
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction ..................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories (230V)EUR ..................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.2 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories (230V)EUR ........................................................... 1- 1
1.1.3 Functions and Printing/Transmission Accessories (230V) ...................................................................................... 1- 2
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ....................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.1 Selecting the installation space ............................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2 Combination Table of Accessories .......................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.1.3 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................ 2- 3
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
8.9 Delivery.....................................................................................................................................................8- 29
8.9.1 Reversal Delivery Operation.................................................................................................................................. 8- 29
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents
Chapter 11 MEAP
11.1 MEAP ..................................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment. .................................................................................................................11- 1
11.1.2 Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................11- 4
11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS......................................................................................................................11- 5
11.1.4 Login to SMS........................................................................................................................................................11- 9
11.1.5 Checking Application List ...................................................................................................................................11- 11
11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application........................................................................................................11- 12
11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information.....................................................................................................................11- 13
11.1.8 MEAP Specifications..........................................................................................................................................11- 14
11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS .................................................................11- 15
11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application ..................................................................................11- 16
11.1.11 Reference (Application System Information)....................................................................................................11- 17
11.1.12 Installing an Application....................................................................................................................................11- 18
11.1.13 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................11- 20
11.1.14 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................11- 21
11.1.15 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) ..............................................................................................11- 23
11.1.16 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File........................................................................................11- 25
11.1.17 Reusable license ..............................................................................................................................................11- 27
11.1.18 License for forwarding ......................................................................................................................................11- 27
11.1.19 Uninstalling an Application ...............................................................................................................................11- 30
11.1.20 Changing Login Services .................................................................................................................................11- 31
11.1.21 Initializing the Password...................................................................................................................................11- 35
11.1.22 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area
with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)..........................................................................................11- 36
11.1.23 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................................................................11- 38
11.1.24 MEAP Safe Mode.............................................................................................................................................11- 38
11.1.25 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) ............................................................................................11- 39
11.1.26 Reference material ...........................................................................................................................................11- 42
11.1.27 Option for exclusive individual measure...........................................................................................................11- 43
Contents
13.4 Cleaning..................................................................................................................................................13- 6
13.4.1 Cleaning Primary Toner Blocking Sheet ............................................................................................................. 13- 6
13.4.2 Cleaning Developing Toner Blocking Sheet ....................................................................................................... 13- 6
13.4.3 Cleaning Cleaner Scraper .................................................................................................................................. 13- 6
13.4.4 Cleaning Photosensitive Drum ........................................................................................................................... 13- 7
13.4.5 Cleaning the fixing oil dish and the fixing cleaning belt guide.............................................................................. 13- 8
Contents
15.2.4 Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................15- 8
15.2.4.1 Sensors ................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 8
15.2.5 Switch.................................................................................................................................................................15- 13
15.2.5.1 Switches............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 13
15.2.8 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................................15- 18
15.2.8.1 Connectors......................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 18
15.2.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB...............................................15- 25
15.2.9.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB ......................................................................... 15- 25
15.2.9.2 DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................................................. 15- 25
15.2.9.3 DC Power Supply PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 15- 26
15.2.9.4 HVT PCB............................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 26
Contents
Contents
Chapter 18 Upgrading
18.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 18- 1
18.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine........................................................................................................................18- 1
18.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................................18- 1
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction ......................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories (230V)EUR ...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories (230V)EUR ............................................................................. 1-1
1.1.3 Functions and Printing/Transmission Accessories (230V).......................................................................................................... 1-2
Chapter 1
[7]
[14]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[8]
[9]
[5]
[2]
[11]
[10]
[1]
[13]
[12]
F-1-1
T-1-1
[1]
Finisher-AD1
[2]
Saddle Finisher-AD2
[3]
Shift Tray-D1
[4]
Copy Tray-L1
[5]
Puncher Unit-AS1/AU1/AV1
[6]
DADF-S1 (standard)
[7]
Document Tray-M1
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Staple Cartridge-J1
[13]
Staple Cartridge-D2/D3
[14]
1-1
Chapter 1
[7]
[10]
[14]
[8]
[12]
[11]
[15]
[9]
[16]
[17]
[13]
[18]
[19]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
F-1-2
T-1-2
[1]
Expansion Bus-D2
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Card Reader-C1
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
1-2
Function
Accessory needed
LIPS printing
transmission
Chapter 1
Function
Accessory needed
faxing
MEAP function
(w/ copy boot ROM)
MEAP function
(w/ LIPS LX boot ROM)
security function
(HDD formatting + encryption)
voice guidance
remote operation
Web browsing
1-3
Chapter 1
[1]
[17]
[16]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[12]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[10]
[9]
[8]
F-1-3
[1] Feeder
[2] Control panel
[3] Toner access cover
[4] Front cover
[5] Right front deck
[6] Cassette 3
[7] Cassette 4
[8] Left front deck
[9] Left cover (paper)
[10] Environment switch
[11] Cassette heater switch
[12] Leakage breaker
[13] Left cover (middle)
[14] Delivery cover
[15] Left cover (upper)
[16] Reader left cover
[17] Reader front cover
1-4
Chapter 1
[18]
[19]
[29]
[20]
[28]
[21]
[27]
[22]
[26]
[23]
[25]
[24]
F-1-4
1.2.1.2 Cross-Section
0015-4306
1-5
Chapter 1
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17]
[18]
[3]
[19]
[2]
[20]
[1]
[21]
[59]
[22]
[58]
[57]
[23]
[56]
[55]
[24]
[25]
[54]
[26]
[53]
[27]
[52]
[28]
[51]
[50]
[29]
[49]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[48]
[33]
[47]
[34]
[35]
[46]
[36]
[45]
[37]
[38]
[39]
[40]
[44]
[41]
[42]
[43]
F-1-5
T-1-4
1-6
Chapter 1
[41] Cassette 4 feed roller
[43] Cassette 4
[44] Cassette 3
ON
F
OF
[1]
ON/OFF
Enargy Saver
Reset
Help
ABC
GHI
JKL
DEF
MNO
Counter Check
Additional Functions PQRS TUV
WXYZ
Stop
Start
Display Contrast
Clear
Processing/Data
Error
Power
[3]
F-1-6
Never turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is shown, indicating that the machine HDD is being accessed. Otherwise, the HDD can develop a fault
(E602).
F-1-7
1-7
Chapter 1
Be sure to go through the shut-down sequence whenever turning off the main power switch.
ON
/OF
ON
F
OF
[2]
[3]
F-1-8
1-8
Chapter 1
ON
F
OF
O
/O
N
F
F
F-1-9
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
[9]
[10]
ON/OFF
Enargy Saver
Reset
Help
GHI
ABC
DEF
JKL
MNO
Counter Check
Additional Functions PQRS TUV
WXYZ
Stop
Start
Display Contrast
Clear
Processing/Data
Error
Power
[12]
[11]
F-1-10
[1] Touch Panel Display
[5] Keypad
Description
initial function
1-9
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
use 'system status screen' as initial screen: ON/*OFF
give priority to 'device' of 'system status screen': *ON/OFF
*ON/OFF
inch input
right cassette deck/left cassette deck: plain paper/colored paper/recycled paper/heavy paper/bond paper
(outside Japan)/letterhead (plain paper; outside Japan)/letterhead (heavy paper; outside Japan)/punched paper
(outside Japan)
cassettes 3/cassette 4: *plain paper/colored paper/recycled paper/bond paper (outside Japan)/letterhead (plain
paper; outside Japan)/letterhead (heavy paper; outside Japan)/punched paper (outside Japan)/index sheet
cassette 5 (paper deck): *plain paper/colored paper/recycled paper/heavy paper/bond paper (outside Japan)/
letterhead (heavy paper; outside Japan)/punched paper (outside Japan)
*low/high
copier: *1/2/3
printer: 1/*2/3
box: 1/2/*3
reception/fax: 1/2/*3
other: 1/2/*3
register: original size/full merge, see-through merge (20, *50, 99%) form name (24 characters max.) form read
delete
check coy: cassette select, print sort
detail info: display detail info, change form name
1-10
switch language
ON/*OFF
ON/*OFF
between-job shift**
*ON/OFF
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
between-job interleaf
between-set interleaf
ON (setting range between *10 and 9999; paper source select) *OFF
A3/A4/A4R/B4/B5/1117/LGL/LTR/LTRR
*ON/OFF
*ON/OFF
ON/*OFF
shut-down mode
execute key
Description
time fine-adjust
10 sec; *1, 2, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; 1 hr; 90 min; 2, 3,4 hr
1.2.3.3 Adjustment/Cleaning
0015-4317
Description
zoom fine-adjust
start key
correct density
Feeder cleaning
Start key
Drum cleaning
Start key
Wire cleaning
Start key
Description
1-11
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
transmission control report
print every 100 communications: *ON/OFF
print at specific time: *ON/OFF
time settings: *00:00 to 23:59
separate transmission/reception: (toggle) ON/*OFF
fax
(specifications setup)**
print list
(transmission)**
print list
(fax)**
user data list: Do you want to print the user data list?: yes/no
Description
group ID controller
e-mail/**i-fax setup
transmission data size upper limit: 0=none, 1 to 99 MB; *3 MB
abbreviation: 40 characters or 20 2-byte characters; *attached images
transmission time-out in full state: 1 to 99 hr, *24 hr
Timeout in divided reception: 1 to 99 hours, *24 hours
print for MDN/DSN reception: ON/*OFF
always notify if reception error: *ON/OFF
relay through server: ON/*OFF
Permit MDN not via server: *ON/OFF
fax setup**
transmission start speed: *33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps
reception start speed: 33600bps*, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps
reception password: 20 characters max.
FIS switch: ON/*OFF
system box setup
system box ID No.**: 7 characters
use fax memory reception**: ON/*OFF
use i-fax memory reception**: ON/*OFF
memory reception start time**: by day, by day of week, *no specification
1-12
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
enable/disable remote UI
*ON/OFF
use SSL: ON/*OFF
limit target**
*ON/OFF
ON/*OFF
Restrictions of the domain for transmission of email/ Restrictions of the domain for transmission: ON/*OFF
IFAX
Permitted domain for transmission: Registration, details/edit, deletion
Permit PDF transmission when using an expired
certificate
ON/*OFF
ON/*OFF
transfer setup**
reception method, enable/disable condition, registration, unconditional transfer registration, e-mail priority,
detail/edit, delete, list print
delete bulletin
delete
adjust date/time
register license
24 characters
ON/*OFF
group ID: ON/*OFF
date: ON/*OFF
text: ON/*OFF
MEAP setup
1-13
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
- register recipient:
auto search/register, register, detail info, delete,list printing
- auto distribution:
every day, by day of week, *no specification
user mode setting: ON/*OFF
network setup: include, do not include
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book: ON/*OFF
Setting of the print specifications: ON/*OFF
- manual distribution setup:
user mode settings; ON/*OFF
network setup: include, do not include
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book: ON/*OFF
Setting of the print specifications: ON/*OFF
- limit reception according to original
ON/*OFF
- recover data:
user mode settings, group ID, address book,setting of the print specifications
- time reception according to machine:
user mode settings; *ON/OFF
group ID: *ON/OFF
address book: *ON/OFF
Setting of the print specifications: ON/*OFF
Setting of the print specifications: ON/*OFF
Initialization of all data/settings
Initialization
*ON/OFF
USB setting
*ON/OFF
Time until the document is automatically deleted: (0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12) hours, (1, 2, *3, 7, 30) days
Print when saving the data from the printer driver: *ON/OFF
1-14
Mode
Description
large* (manual feed/manual feed paper change reservation/(paper source) 1*/(paper source) 2*/(paper source)
3*/(paper source) 4*/(paper source) 5/small
auto sort**
*ON/OFF
ON/OFF*
*ON/OFF
ON/*OFF
register/reset (factory shipment: 1 set, auto paper select, auto density, auto image quality; printer: local)
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
Description
Display a confirmation message when calling the routine task button: *ON/OFF
PDF (OCR setup)**
original orientation auto detection: (*ON/OFF)
limit number of characters in file name (OCR): (1 to *24)
Check the certificate of the device signature
Detailed information of the certificate: Verification of the certificate
Check the certificate of the user signature
Detailed information of the certificate: Verification of the certificate
Display a confirmation message when sending the IC card signature: *ON/OFF
transmission screen initial display**: routine task button/one-touch button/*new address
transmission source record**: *keep/do not keep
indication location: inside image/*outside image
target abbreviation indication: (*ON/OFF)
telephone number marking: *FAX/TEL
Use the chunk divided transmission function when sending WebDAV: *ON/OFF
Display a confirmation message to check the "Completed" stamp for double-sided transmission: *ON/OFF
reset transmission settings: Do you want to reset? yes/no
1-15
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
reception info record: keep/*do not keep
Description
(ON/*OFF)
register/reset
1-16
Chapter 1
*Factory settings.
**Indicated in the presence of a specific accessory.
T-1-13
Mode
settings
Description
number of copies: 1 to 9999 (*1)
duplex: duplex/*simplex
pickup
default paper size: *A4 (additional 10 possible)
default paper type: plain (additional 8 possible)
paper size replacement: replace/*do not replace
adjust print
**super smooth: *use/do not use
**toner density: 1 to 9 (*5)
toner save: enable/*disable
thin line correction: *enable/Disable
Correction of horizontal lines: *Disable/Level 1/Level 2/Level 3/Level 4
Correction of horizontal lines: *Disable/Level 1/Level 2/Level 3/Level 4
Resolution: Super Fine/*Fine
layout
bind position: *Staple the long side/Staple the short side
bind margin: -50to+50mm (*0.0)
Distance to move the stapling position in a direction of the short/long side (front/back): -50to+50mm
(*0.0)
RIP: yes/*no
sorter**: *do not use/sort/rotation sort/rotation group/shift sort/shift group/staple sort/Staple group
punch**: *disable/top/bottom/left/right
booklet print**: *disable/open to left/open to right
middle bind**: enable/*disable
**Correction of creep (displacement): *Disable/Automatic/Correction volume (0 to 10mm)
**Insert of the front cover: *Disable/Inserter 1/Inserter 2
**Fold: *Disable/Z-fold/C-fold
**transparency interleaf: *disable/white sheet/printed sheet
**print in sets
print in sets: enable/*disable
print position: *5 locations/upper left/lower left/upper right/lower right/Whole image
print start character: 1 to 9999 (*1)
print size: small at 12-point/medium at 24-point/*large at 36-point
density: 1 to 5 (*3)
Adjustment of the printing position (vertical/horizontal): -8 to +8mm (*0)
1-17
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
LIPS: *enable/disable
N201: *enable/disable
ESC-P: *enable/disable
15577: *enable/disable
HP-GL: *enable/disable
HP-GL/2: *enable/disable
Imaging: *enable/disable
PDF1.5: *enable/disable
**connection recognition: *enable/disable
printer settings rest: yes/no
Description
fax
(register address)
e-mail
(register address)
i-fax
(register address)
file
(register addresses)
group
(register address)
1-18
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
simple search
Description
volume: 1 to 5* to 9
speed: (slow) -5 to 0* to +5 (fast)
voice type
male/female*
speaker/headphone switch
speaker*/headphone
ON/OFF*
Is it OK to initialize? yes/no
[1]
F-1-11
2. Platen Roller
Clean the platen roller [1] with a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well-wrung); then, dry wipe it with a dry, soft cloth.
1-19
Chapter 1
[1]
F-1-12
[2]
[1]
F-1-13
[1]
[2]
F-1-14
[1]
F-1-15
1.2.4.2 Checks
0015-5260
1-20
Chapter 1
F-1-16
3) Check to see that the breaker switch [1] has shifted to the OFF position, thus cutting off the power.
ON
(I side)
OFF
(Oside)
[1]
F-1-17
ON
(I side)
OFF
(O side)
F-1-18
Advise the user that the breaker switch is fully to the ON position. If it is found between ON and OFF positions, it must first be shifted to the OFF position and then
to ON.
6) Turn off the main power switch.
1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Machine's Laser Unit
0015-4333
1-21
Chapter 1
F-1-19
F-1-20
1-22
Chapter 1
Copyboard
Body
console
Lens type
fixed focus
Photosensitive medium
Reproduction method
indirect electrostatic
Exposure method
laser light
auto or manual
Charging method
corona
Development method
Transfer method
Static transfer
Separation method
static separation
Pickup method
separation retard
separation retard
separation retard
Cleaning blade
Fixing method
Delivery method
face-down, face-up
yes
Toner type
Original type
304.8mm x 432mm
Reproduction ratio
Warm-up time
30sec or less
2mm or less
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
2.01.5mm
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
2.01.5mm
2.51.5mm
Number of gradations
256 gradations
Reading resolution
600dpi x 600dpi
Copying resolution
Printing resolution
iR5075N:
3.1sec
iR5065 / iR5065N / iR5055 / iR5055N :
3.3sec
Cassette capacity
Duplex method
Through-pass method/Stackless
Continuous reproduction
1 - 999
Memory
1GB
Operating environment
(temperature range)
15 to 27.5 deg C
Operating environment
(humidity range)
25 to 75%
Operating environment
(atmospheric pressure)
Noise
Hard disk
40GB
Sleep mode
yes
1-23
Chapter 1
Power consumption (maximum) 1500W (100V), 1920W (120V), 2300W (230V)
Power consumption
Ozone
Initial: 0.01ppm or less (avr), Later (after 500,000 pages): 0.035 ppm or
less (avr)
Dimensions
Weight
Paper size
Cassette
Deck (left/
right)
Manual feed
3.5 large
paper deck
A4,B5,LTR
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
A3,B4,LDR,LGL
yes
no
yes
no
yes
A4R,LTRR
yes
no
yes
no
yes
B5R
yes
no
yes
no
no
A5R,STMTR
yes
no
yes
no
no
A5,STMT
no
no
no
no
no
A4,B5,LTR
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
A3,B4,LDR,LGL
yes
no
yes
no
yes
A4R,LTRR
yes
no
yes
no
yes
B5R
yes
no
yes
no
no
EXEC
no
no
yes
no
no
A5R,STMTR
yes
no
yes
no
no
A5,STMT
no
no
no
no
no
A4,A4R,LTR,LTRR
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
Label
A4,A4R,B4,LTR,LTRR
no
no
yes
no
no
A4,LTR
yes
no
no
no
no
Tracing paper
A3,B4,A4R,A4,B5R,B5
no
no
yes
no
no
Plain paper
Colored paper
Recycled paper
Environment
paper
3-hole paper
4-hole paper
1-24
Paper size
E232A
Double-sided
Single-sided
E232B
Double-sided
Single-sided
Double-sided
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
A4
75
53
37
26
65
46
32
23
55
46
27
23
B5
75
53
37
26
65
46
32
23
55
46
27
23
A5R
35
35
17
17
35
35
17
17
35
35
17
17
B5R
63
47
31
23
55
41
27
20
46
41
23
20
A4R
54
44
27
21
47
38
23
19
40
38
20
19
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
B4
45
38
22
19
39
33
19
16
39
33
19
16
A3
37
33
18
16
32
29
16
14
32
29
16
14
LTR
75
53
37
26
65
46
32
23
55
46
27
23
STMTR
35
35
17
17
35
35
17
17
35
35
17
17
LTRR
58
45
28
22
50
39
25
19
43
39
21
19
LGL
45
38
22
19
39
33
19
16
39
33
19
16
LDR
37
33
18
16
32
29
16
14
32
29
16
14
Chapter 1
E232
Single-sided
Classification
Thick paper
Bond paper
Tracing paper
OHP
Postcard
Label
Tab paper
Paper size
E232A
Double-sided
Single-sided
E232B
Double-sided
Single-sided
Double-sided
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
A4
63
53
31
26
55
46
27
23
55
46
27
23
B5
63
53
31
26
55
46
27
23
55
46
27
23
A5R
28
28
14
14
28
28
14
14
28
28
14
14
B5R
53
47
26
23
46
41
23
20
46
41
23
20
A4R
46
44
23
21
40
38
20
19
40
38
20
19
Deck
cassette
feed *1
Multi
manual
feed
B4
38
38
19
19
33
33
16
16
33
33
16
16
A3
31
31
15
15
27
27
13
13
27
27
13
13
LTR
63
53
31
26
55
46
27
23
55
46
27
23
STMTR
28
28
14
14
28
28
14
14
28
28
14
14
LTRR
50
45
24
22
43
39
21
19
43
39
21
19
LGL
38
38
19
19
33
33
16
16
33
33
16
16
LDR
31
31
15
15
27
27
13
13
27
27
13
13
LTR
35
35
17
17
30
30
15
15
30
30
15
15
LTRR
24
24
12
12
21
21
10
10
21
21
10
10
EXEC
35
30
30
A4
53
46
46
B5
53
46
46
B5R
47
41
41
A4R
44
38
38
B4
38
33
33
A3
31
27
27
A4
53
46
46
A4R
44
38
38
LTR
53
46
46
LTRR
45
39
39
Postcard
15
15
15
Double postal
card
28
28
28
Four-face
postcard
53
46
46
A4
53
46
46
A4R
44
38
38
B4
38
33
33
A4
59
51
51
LTR
59
51
51
Paper size
Cassette
Deck (left/
right)
Manual feed
3.5 large
paper deck
A4,B5,LTR
yes
A3,B4,LDR,LGL
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
yes
A4R,LTRR
yes
no
B5R
yes
no
yes
no
yes
yes
no
A5R,STMTR
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
A5,STMT
no
no
no
no
no
A4,B5,LTR
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
A3,B4,LDR,LGL
yes
no
yes
no
yes
A4R,LTRR
yes
no
yes
no
yes
B5R
yes
no
yes
no
no
EXEC
no
no
yes
no
no
A5R,STMTR
yes
no
yes
no
no
A5,STMT
no
no
no
no
no
1-25
Chapter 1
Paper feeding position
Type
Cassette
Deck (left/
right)
Manual feed
3.5 large
paper deck
A4,A4R,LTR,LTRR
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
Label
A4,A4R,B4,LTR,LTRR
no
no
yes
no
no
A4,LTR
yes
no
no
no
no
Tracing paper
A3,B4,A4R,A4,B5R,B5
no
no
yes
no
no
1-26
Paper size
Chapter 2 Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the installation space .................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Combination Table of Accessories .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
Contents
Chapter 2
(%RH)
100
90
[C]
85
[B]
75
70
[A]
50
25
20
15
10
5
0
10
7.5
15
20
25
23
30
27.5
40 (degC)
35
32.5
F-2-1
500mm
1,448 mm
13,74 mm
1,278 mm
100 mm or more
500mm
500mm
F-2-2
- When installing the Saddle Finisher-AD2 + Paper Folding Unit-E1 + Document Insertion Unit-E1 + Puncher Unit-AT1 + Paper Deck-AE1
2-1
Chapter 2
1,374 mm
1,278 mm
100 mm or more
2,482 mm
109 mm
500mm
500mm
2,591 mm
500mm
F-2-3
7. This equipment should be installed in a well-ventilated room, however not near the ventilating suction mouth in the room.
8. In the case that several machines are installed at the same area, this machine should be arranged so that this machine does not draw directly the exhaust air from
the other machines. The life of the charging wire may be shortened, especially in a low-humidity environment.
F-2-4
The following table shows the combination of accessories that are set at the right side of the host machine.
When setting the accessories indicated in the table, refer to the table below and check the combination before the setup.
T-2-1
Document Tray
Card Reader
no
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
Document Tray
Card Reader
yes: Available
2-2
no: Unavailable
Chapter 2
[1]
[6]
[7]
[14]
[8]
[3]
[10]
[9]
[15]
[11]
[16]
[5]
[4]
[12]
[17]
[18]
[13]
[19]
[20]
FU5-8564
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
A4
A3
B5
B4
A4 LTR
A3 11x17
[21]
[22]
[23]
A5
A4 R
STMT
LGL
LTR R
B5 R
A5 R
A5
A4 R
A5 R
STMT R
A4
A3
A5
A4 R
A5 R
A4 LTR/11x17 STMT
16K B5 LGL
A3
8K B4 LTR R
A5
A4 R
A5 R
STMT R
[24]
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A5
8K
16K
FOLIO
LTR
TR
305 457mm
OFICIO
STMT
B4
B4
B5
B5
B5
12 18
11 17
11 17
81 2 14
LEGAL
81 2 14
LEGAL
81 2 11
EXEC
LTR
TR
81 2 11
FLSC
[25]
LTR
TR
81 2 11
51 2 81 2
[26]
[27]
[28]
F-2-5
[1]
Developing assembly
1pc.
[2]
1pc.
[3]
1pc.
[4]
1pc.
[5]
1pc.
[6]
Grip
1pc.
[7]
3pc.
[8]
1pc.
[9]
1pc.
[10]
Inch-series block
4pc.
[11]
Base sheet
1pc.
[12]
One-touch supports
2pc.
[13]
1pc.
[14]
Cable Cover
1pc.
[15]
Power cable
1pc.
[16]
1pc.
[17]
1pc.
[18]
2pc.
[19]
Touch pen
1pc.
[20]
Wire saddle
1pc.
[21]
1pc.
[22]
1pc.
[23]*
1pc.
[24]
Shutdown label
1pc.
[25]
1pc.
[26]
1pc.
1pc.
[28]
1pc.
[27]
Check the contents (advice book, CD, and others) against the following tables:
2-3
Chapter 2
T-2-2
iR5075N
iR5065N
iR5055N
iR5075
iR5065
iR5055
User's Guide
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Release Notes
yes
no
yes
no
iR5075N
iR5065N
iR5055N
iR5075
iR5065
iR5055
Documentation
T-2-3
CD-ROM
2-4
Tutorial CD
yes
yes
ManualCD
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
iW MC CD-ROM
yes
no
yes
no
Chapter 2
[1]
Take into account the following points when installing this equipment.
2.2.2 Unpacking
F-2-6
0015-4654
Be sure that the leaf spring of the grip is on the right side when inserting.
Adverse insertion may cause the grip coming off while lifting the host
machine.
3) Hold the 2 grips (front/rear) on the pickup assembly side [1] of the host
machine, and then remove the 2 pads [2] while lifting the host machine a
little. (Mass of the host machine: Approx. 230 kg)
[1]
[2]
F-2-7
4) Hold the 2 grips (front/rear) on the delivery assembly side [1] of the host
machine, and then remove the 2 pads [2] and the the plastic bag while lifting the host machine a little.
2-5
Chapter 2
[1]
Be careful that the caster [2] does not fall out from the skid.
[2]
[2]
F-2-8
5) Remove the cardboard on the skid, and then take out the 2 slope plates [1]
installed at the center of the skid.
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-2-9
F-2-11
9) Remove the grip [1] while pressing the leaf spring with a flathead screwdriver.
[2]
[1]
F-2-10
8) Hold the grip [1] of the host machine. Slide the host machine on the slope
to get it down from the skid.
2-6
Chapter 2
Make sure to tell user to keep the protection sheet in a safe place because
it will be used when moving the host machine elsewhere.
[1]
[1]
F-2-15
F-2-12
[1]
[1]
F-2-13
[2]
F-2-16
3) Remove the separation claw release member [1] and tag [2] attached onto
the fixing/feeder assembly.
The scanner fixing screw will be used when relocating the machine; thus,
make sure a user stores away it.
Make sure to remove the foreign particles, such as tape glue on the feeder
belt.
3) Pull the release lever [1] and open the white sheet [2] in the direction of
the arrow [A].
[2]
[1]
[A]
F-2-14
2-7
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-2-20
2) Remove the screw [1] and the mount [2], and disconnect the connector [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-2-17
4) Peel off the tag tape to open the fixing/delivery assembly [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-2-21
3) While holding the front and rear sides of the transfer/separation charging
assembly [1], slide it in the [A] direction; then, remove it toward the [B]
direction.
F-2-18
5) Remove the 2 fixing nip pressure release screws [1]. (The removed screws
will not be used.)
[1]
[1]
[B]
[A]
[1]
F-2-19
F-2-22
2-8
4) Check the transfer/separation charging assembly. If any dirt or paper powder is attached onto the assembly, clean it with alcohol solutions.
5) Mount the transfer/separation assembly using the steps to remove it but in
reverse.
6) Attach the feeder assembly front cover (right) with the 2 screws (use the
screws removed in the step 1).
Put back the fixing/feeder assembly and the duplexing unit to the original
positions (leave the fixing/feeder assembly release lever as it is).
7) Open the toner replacement cover.
8) Detach the toner replacement cover [1].
- 2 screws [2]
Chapter 2
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-2-23
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-2-27
15) Check the pre-transfer charging assembly. If any dirt or paper powder is
attached onto the assembly, clean it with alcohol solutions.
16) Remove the dustproof glass [1].
[2]
[1]
F-2-24
10) Remove the 2 screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2]; then, remove
the primary fan duct [3].
F-2-28
[2]
17) Check and clean the dustproof glass with a blower brush.
18) Install the primary charging assembly, pre-transfer charging assembly
and the dustproof glass in reverse order of the disassembly and secure
them.
1.In case of using solutions for cleaning, be sure that the solutions are
completely dried out.
2. When inserting the pre-transfer charging assembly, slide it in
horizontally against the process unit for not to scratch the surface of the
drum.
3. Make sure that the one-way arm of the pre-transfer charging assembly is
placed onto the eccentric cam.
[3]
[1]
F-2-25
11) Loosen the screw [1] and shift the charging assembly mount [2] in the
direction of the arrow; then, tighten the screw once again.
12) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the primary charging assembly [4].
19) Attach the primary fan duct and the toner replacement cover using the
steps to remove them but in reverse.
Be sure to connect the connector when attaching the primary fan duct.
20) Lock the fixing/feeder assembly release lever, and close the front cover.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F-2-26
13) Check the primary charging assembly. If any dirt or paper powder is attached onto the assembly, clean it with alcohol solutions.
14) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the screw [2]; then, slide the
pre-transfer charging assembly [3] pull out.
2-9
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-2-29
2) Remove the tape [1], and detach the hopper supply mouth cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-2-32
6) Fit the developing assembly pressure unit [1] to [2], and slide it in horizontally in the [A] direction; then, shift toward the [B] direction.
- 1 screw (binding; M4X6) [3]
[2]
[B]
[2]
[A]
[3]
[1]
F-2-33
F-2-30
Remove the pickup roller pressure release spacer [1] while moving the front
side of it upward after sliding the spacer toward the right.
[2]
[1]
F-2-31
5) Hold the center (grip of the assembly) of the developing assembly [1] and
install it.
Then, connect the connector [2].
Then, connect the connector [2].
[1]
When mounting the developing assembly, be sure not to contact the
developing cylinder with the developing assembly mounting plate.
2-10
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-34
2) Pull out the right deck and cassette 3/4 halfway. Open the lower right cover and remove the pickup roller pressure release spacers [1].
MEMO:
When the deck and cassette are stored, the spacer is pressured and hard to
remove. Thus, pull put the deck and cassette halfway to release the
pressure.
[1]
[2]
F-2-37
3) Hold the toner container [1] as shown in the figure below, and remove the
cap [2] from the container by rotating the cap in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[2]
F-2-35
3) After removing each spacer, close the deck, cassette and lower right cover.
4) Attach the door tape of the upper right cover with the screw, and close the
upper right cover.
[1]
1) Press the release button of the left deck and slide the left deck out.
2) Attach the deck pressure plate [1] with the screw (RS tightening; M4X8)
[2].
[1]
F-2-38
4) Hold the toner container with its mouth [1] at the right side, and set it into
the supply case [2] of the host machine horizontally.
[2]
[2]
F-2-36
F-2-39
5) Slide the lock lever [1] upward to lock the toner container [2] in place.
2-11
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-40
F-2-43
[1]
[2]
F-2-44
5) Connect the connector [1] of the reader communication cable and secure
it with the wire saddle [2].
F-2-41
2) Connect the connector [1] of the ADF communication cable and the connector [2] of the reader communication cable.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-45
F-2-42
3) Put the ADF communication cable and the reader communication cable
through the cable cover [1], and then remove the release paper on the cable cover and attach it on the position shown in the figure.
2-12
1) Make settings for environment switch [1] and the cassette heater switch
[2] according to the environment of the installation site. In case the drum/
cassette heaters are required to be turned on while the main power switch
is turned off, make settings with the following 2 switches:
T-2-4
Drum heater
ON
OFF
Environment switch ON
Main power switch ON
Chapter 2
T-2-5
[2]
Cassette heater
ON
OFF
[1]
[A]
F-2-48
2) Attach the cleaning procedure labels [1] [2] for the relevant language.
[1]
[2]
[2]
ON
[1]
F-2-49
[1]
[1]
F-2-50
4) Attach the cleaning procedure label [1] for the relevant language.
[1]
[2]
F-2-47
F-2-51
2-13
Chapter 2
Use the correct power code to mach the location/area of installation. Make
sure not to leave unused power code at the site.
Be sure to remove the packaging materials inside the cassette before turning
on the main power switch.
[1]
[2]
1) Slide the duplexing unit out, and check to see that there is no foreign substances or damage in the unit.
2) Make sure that the main power switch is turned off, and then connect the
power plug into the power outlet.
3) Turn on the main power switch.
- The message 'Wait..' appears.
F-2-53
[1]
F-2-54
7) Hold down the release button, and then slide Cassette3 and 4 out.
8) Tear off the relevant media size label [1] from the mount sheet, and attach
it onto the media size plate [2] of the cassette. Set the media size plate in
the cassette.
[1]
[2]
0015-4671
[2]
F-2-55
3) Attach the inch-series block from inside the cassette onto the hole of the
mark A [1] (STMT-R) and the hole of the mark H [2] (LTR-R) so that
they are hidden.
2-14
Chapter 2
[1]
[3]
Due to the drop of toner from the drum separation claw, there may be a
dirty image in the initial 10 sheets. This dirt disappears as copy volume
goes on.
[1]
[4]
2) Check with the user to find out the size of paper to use, and set the paper
size of each cassette, and attach the size label to the cassette size plate.
3) Close each cassette.
<Cassette 3/4>
1) Hold down the cassette release button, and then slide Cassette 3 and 4 out.
2) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] at the left/right of the cassette.
F-2-56
[1]
0015-4674
[1]
[3]
F-2-58
[2]
3) Adjust the position of the cassette body [1] by shifting it to the front or the
rear.
Shift to the rear = Decreases the left end margin
Shift to the front = Increases the left end margin
[4]
[1]
[4]
F-2-57
4) Attach the new media size label onto the media size plate of the deck.
5) In case the size is changed, register the front deck media size in service
mode.
Right deck: COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1
Left deck: COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2
A4=6, B5=15, and LTR=18
[1]
F-2-59
2-15
Chapter 2
image
L1
[1]
[2]
F-2-60
[3]
[1]
F-2-64
image
L1
[1]
F-2-65
[1]
F-2-61
3) Move the cassette guide assembly [1] toward either the front or the back
and perform adjustment.
Move the guide plate toward the back = the left margin is reduced
Move the guide plate toward the front = the left margin is increased
[1]
F-2-62
image
[1]
[1]
image
L1
F-2-66
L1
2-16
Chapter 2
- 2 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
F-2-67
3) Attach the lower rear right cover removed in the step 1).
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-69
F-2-68
If pulling out the pullout grip fully, it makes the drum rotational tool and
the cap fail to be inserted.
It is easy to insert them if pulling the pullout grip at moderate position
shown in the figure below.
2) Attach the 3 grip covers (large) [1] and the cover [2] that was attached in
the step 1).
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-70
2-17
Chapter 2
Be sure that the front side of the service book case is exposed for 6mm
from the front side of the bottom plate [2] of the host machine when
attaching the service book case.
In case of attaching the service book case without any margin exposed
from the bottom plate, it will cause the service book case to run into the
rail of the paper deck when mounting the paper deck later.
Be sure to attach the paper deck first and then attach the service book case
in case of mounting the paper deck and attaching the service book case at
the same time.
[1]
F-2-71
A4
A3
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-2-72
[1]
F-2-73
2-18
MEMO:
The adjusters may be too hard to turn by hand. In such case, use a
screwdriver to turn.
Chapter 2
In case of reentering the IP address, turning off and then on the main power
is required in order to be enabled.
4) Perform the shutdown sequence so that the main power can be turned off.
5) Turn on the main power switch.
[1]
3) Fill in necessary information on the service book and store it to the service
book case.
You can execute the PING command using the appropriate remote host address to see if a connection to the network is available.
Remote host address: the IP address of a PC terminal connected to the TCP/
IP network to which the machine is also connected.
1) Inform the system administrator that you are going to check the network
connection using the PING command.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Add the appropriate remote host address to the PING command.
- If the message is 'Response from host', the connection to the network is
normal.
- If the message is 'No response from host', the machine is not correctly
connected to the network. Start the troubleshooting work in the next
section.
1) Check to be sure that the network cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet port.
- If the connection is correct, make the next check.
- If the connection is wrong, correct it and run the check once again using
the remote host address.
A loopback address comes back before reaching the network PCB. By executing the PING command using the address, you can find out whether the
machine's TCP/IP settings are correct.
1) Add the appropriate loopback address (127.0.0.1) to the PING command.
- If the message is "No response from host," check the machine's TCP/IP
settings, and execute the PING command once again.
- If the message is "Response from host," make the next check.
2-19
Chapter 2
address settings, and check with the system administrator to see if the
assigned IP address is a valid one.
- The connection of the network PCB may be wrong: Check the
connection of the network PCB once again.
- The network PCB may be faulty. Try replacing it.
If the message is "Response from host", suspect a problem in the user's
network environment. Report to the system administrator for appropriate
action.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[A]
[4]
[5]
F-2-76
F-2-74
[1]
Delivery Bar
1 pc.
[2]
Delivery Tray
1 pc.
[3]
Magnet plate
1 pc.
[4]
Delivery roll
2 pc.
[5]
E ring
1 pc.
F-2-75
2-20
Chapter 2
- When mounting the delivery Tray to the host machine, be sure to attach the
rollers in the center of delivery roller.
- When mounting the delivery tray to the host machine, shift tray or finisher
should not be mounted.
See the figure below to make sure the mounting direction of the delivery
roller's protrusion [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-77
[2]
[1]
F-2-80
8) Attach the magnet plate [1] to the left cover (upper) and bend the claws
[2] at the both ends in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-2-78
[2]
[1]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-2-81
[6]
F-2-79
2-21
Chapter 2
<Card Reader Attachment-C2>
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F-2-82
[1]
F-2-85
F-2-83
[1]
1pc.
[2]
Joint plate
1pc.
[3]
Screw
(small panhead screw; M4X6)
1pc.
[4]
2pc.
0015-4774
0015-4772
Installation of this equipment needs the card reader attachment kit C2.
[2]
[3]
F-2-84
2-22
[1]
Card reader
1pc.
[2]
1pc.
[3]
Toothed washer
1pc.
Chapter 2
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-2-86
7) Get the cable [1] out from the side of the host machine.
If the cable is difficult to remove, drivers etc. will help make the
operation easier.
[2]
[1]
F-2-87
4) Attach the card reader to the joint plate [1] with 1 each of the toothed
washer of the card reader and the screw (RS tightening; M4X10) [2].
[1]
F-2-91
[1]
[2]
F-2-88
5) Put the harness [1] of the card reader through the hole [2] of the card reader attachment plate.
F-2-92
9) Put the cable [1] of the card reader through the 2 clamps [2].
[2]
[1]
F-2-89
[1]
[2]
F-2-93
2-23
Chapter 2
10) Cut the area [1] of the right cover (upper) with a wire cutter etc.
[1]
F-2-94
11) Attach the right cover (upper) detached in the step 2).
12) Close the toner replacement cover.
13) Insert the power cable (for the plug).
14) Turn on the main power switch, and then check the display demanding
setting of the control card.
15) Input the card number (1 to 2001) to be used in the service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD).
- Input the smallest card number for the user to use.
- Up to 1,000 cards having been input are available.
16) Operate the touch panel following the instruction on the screen of shutdown sequence in order to turn off the main power switch.
17) Turn on the main power switch.
18) Insert the control card and check the status where copy is possible.
[1]
[2]
0015-7624
[3]
F-2-95
[1]
[2]*
[3]
3) Select
> [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings]
> [IP Address Settings], and then make the setting of [IP Address], [Gateway Address], [Subnet Mask] according to the user environment
4) Press the reset key to escape the user mode screen.
5) Operate the touch panel following the instruction on the screen of shutdown sequence in order to turn off the main power switch.
6) Turn on the main power switch.
7)
Document Tray
1 pc.
2 pc.
2 pc.
[1]
> [System Settings] > [System Maneger Settings], and then input
any number into [System Maneger ID] and [System Password].
8) Press the reset key to escape the user mode screen.
9) Turn off the power according to the shutdown sequence.
F-2-96
2) Hook the document tray [1] to the stepped screws tightened in the step 1.
F-2-97
2-24
Chapter 2
If it is hard to hook the document tray, loosen the 2 stepped screws and
hook it once again.
[1]
F-2-100
[1]
[2]
If it is hard to hook the document tray, loosen the 2 stepped screws and
hook it once again.
[3]
F-2-98
[1]
[2]*
[3]
Document Tray
1 pc.
2 pc.
2 pc.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
MEMO:
For the 120V model, use it as standard.
F-2-101
T-2-6
0015-8034
[1]
Mirror Heater
FK2-0229
1pc
[2]
Lens Heater
FK2-0228
1pc
[3]
Cable Clamp
WT2-0507
2pc
[4]
FC5-2945
1pc
[5]
XB3-6400
4pc
0015-7815
F-2-99
2) Hook the document tray [1] to the stepped screws tightened in the step 1.
2-25
Chapter 2
F-2-103
4) Hold the tab (the bend) [A] of the mirror stay to move the No. 1 mirror
base [1] to the right until it stops.
[1]
[A]
[2]
[3]
F-2-104
[1]
F-2-102
5) Insert the front side of the mirror heater [1] under the cable guide [2] and
connect the connecter [3], and then tighten with the 2 screws (RS tightening; M4X8) [4].
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to get your fingers touched
with the glass surface or the backside of the white plate.
In case the glass is soiled, clean it with lint-free paper.
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[4]
F-2-105
2-26
[1]
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
F-2-106
7) Hold the tab (the bend) [A] of the mirror stay to move the No. 1 mirror
base [1] to the left until it stops.
F-2-110
10) In case that the cable [1] is loose, insert the cable clamp [2] to the frame's
hole to fix the cable in place.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[A]
F-2-107
8) Insert the cable clamp [1] to the hole [2] of the frame.
[1]
F-2-111
11) By reversing the steps used to remove, attach the copyboard glass and
the glass retainer.
12) Close the DADF.
13) Shift the cassette heater switch [1] and the environment switch [2] to the
on position.
[2]
F-2-108
[1]
ON
[2]
[4]
F-2-112
[1]
F-2-109
Tighten the screw [3] while pushing on the lens heater [1] in the direction
of the emboss [2]. Be sure that the heater's claw [4] must not be disengaged
when performing this operation. Also check that the bottom of the heater
must not be off from the board.
0015-7889
2-27
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-2-113
[1]
heater unit
FM2-4182-000
1pc.
[2]
cassette stay
FL2-3994-000
1pc.
[3]
screw (M4X6)
XB1-2400-609
6pc.
[2]
[1]
How to turn off the main power
When turn off the main power, implement the following steps to protect
the hard disk of this product.
1) Push the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2) Operate the touch panel following the instruction on the screen of
shutdown sequence in order to be ready to turn off the main power switch.
3) Turn off the main power switch.
4) Pull out the power cable (for the outlet).
F-2-115
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-2-116
0015-4781
[1]
1) Open the wire saddle [1] to disengage the reader communication cable [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-2-117
5) Hold down the release button [1] to slide Cassette 4 [2] out.
F-2-114
2-28
Chapter 2
[A]
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-2-118
9) Secure the cassette stay [1] in place from the rear side of the host machine.
- 2 screws (M4X6) [2].
[1]
F-2-119
[1]
[2]
[A]
F-2-121
[1]
10) Secure the cassette stay [1] in place from the front side of the host machine.
- 2 screws [2] (M4X6)
F-2-120
Make sure from the rear side of the host machine that the claw [A] of the
cassette stay is engaged appropriately.
[1]
[2]
F-2-122
11) Put the cassette heater connector [1] through the long hole [A], while at
the same time hook the metal plate [B] on the rear side of the cassette
heater [2] onto the hole [C] of the cassette heater.
Make sure that the heater cord guide [3] is fitted in place appropriately on to
the long hole [A].
2-29
Chapter 2
[C]
[B]
[2]
[B]
[A]
[1]
F-2-124
14) Attach the covers etc., by the reverse procedure to detach them.
- heat exhaust fan (filter)
- lower rear cover
- upper rear cover
- Secure the reader communication cable in the wire saddle.
15) Fit the inner units in each cassette in place, and then attach the cassettes
onto the host machine.
16) Connect the power supply cable (for power outlet) of the host machine.
17) Turn on the main power switch.
[2]
[1]
[3]
Every components of the cassette heater unit are supplied as service parts, so
have the following parts on hand.
[3]
[4]
[3]
12) Lift the cassette heater [1] until it touches the host machine, and then secure it in place at the specified position with the 2 screws (M4X6) [2].
[6]
[1]
[8]
[8]
[10]
[5]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[7]
[2]
F-2-123
13) Connect the connector [1] on the host machine and the cassette heater
connector [2].
No.
[12]
F-2-125
T-2-7
Part name
Part number
QTY
No.
Part name
Part number
QTY
[1]
Heater unit
FG6-9651
1pc.
[7]
FS6-8725
1pc.
[2]
AC input connector
FG6-1117
1pc.
[8]
XB1-2400-409
4pcs.
FG6-2957
1pc.
[9]
WT2-5730
3pcs.
1pc.
[3]
2-30
[9]
[4]
AC cable
FK2-4379
[5]
XB2-7400-607 3pcs.
[6]
1pc.
[10]
FC7-5473
1pc.
[11]
XB2-8401-007
1pc.
[12]
Wire saddle
WT2-5738
1pc.
Chapter 2
Turning Off the Main Power of the Host Machine When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's
hard disk:
[1] Hold on the power switch on the control panel 3 sec or more.
[2] Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off.
[3] Turn off the main power switch.
[4] Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).
[3]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[11]
[8]
[8]
[10]
[5]
[2]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[12]
F-2-126
T-2-8
No.
Part name
Part number
QTY
No.
Part name
Part number
QTY
[1]
Heater unit
FG6-9651
1pc.
[7]
FS6-8725
1pc.
1pc.
[8]
XB1-2400-409
4pcs.
[9]
Wire saddle
WT2-5730
3pcs.
[2]
AC input connector
FG6-1117
[3]
FG6-2957
1pc.
[4]
AC cable
FK2-4379
1pc.
[5]
XB2-7400-607 3pcs.
[6]
1pc.
[10]
FC7-5473
1pc.
[11]
XB2-8401-007
1pc.
[12]
Wire saddle
WT2-5738
1pc.
2-31
Chapter 2
Turning Off the Main Power of the Host Machine When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's
hard disk:
[1] Hold on the power switch on the control panel 3 sec or more.
[2] Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off.
[3] Turn off the main power switch.
[4] Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).
- When installing the machine, see the Combination Table for Accessory Installation.
- In order to install this equipment, "Expansion Bus-D2" is required.
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
[9]
[11]
[10]
[5]
[4]
[12]
[13]
[6]
[14]
[15]
F-2-127
[1]
1pc.
[2]
1pc.
[3]
1pc.
[4]*
1pc.
[5]
Cord Guide
7pc.
[6]
Voice Board
1pc.
[7]
1pc.
[8]*
1pc.
[9]
2pc.
[10]
1pc.
[11]
2pc.
[12]*
1pc.
[13]*
1pc.
[14]
Ferrite Core
1pc.
[15]*
Wire Saddle
1pc.
2-32
Chapter 2
[2]
F-2-128
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-2-129
2-33
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-130
4) Remove the face cover plate [1]. (The removed plate is not used after this step.)
- 2 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
F-2-131
5) Attach the Voice Board instruction plate [2] to the voice board [1].
- 2 screws (binding; M3X6) [3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-2-132
Checking the Position of the Slide Switch (SW1) on the Voice Guidance Board
The slide switch (SW1) on the Voice Guidance Board is provided as a means of switching frequencies (33 MHz/66 MHz) to suit the transfer speed of the PCI bus.
It is important for the switch setting to suit the transfer speed so that the voice will be free of interruption. If you inadvertently moved the slide, be sure to put it back
to its correct position. For the Boad, the frequency must be set to 66 MHz.
2-34
Chapter 2
33MHz
66MHz
6) Mount the voice board [1] to the PCI Expansion Kit-D2 using the 2 screws [2] removed in step 4).
Cautions in mounting
- A voice board [1] must be mounted to a specified position.
Be sure to mount it to the slot [A] on the Expansion Bus B-1 board.
Do not mount it to the slot [B] or [C].
- If other board is mounted to the slot [A] , pull the board out of the slot and mount it to other slot. Then, mount a voice board to the slot [A] .
- Be sure that the PCB is perpendicular to the connector.
[C]
[A] [B]
[C]
[A] [B]
[2]
[1]
2-35
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-133
11) Mount the speaker unit (upper) [1] on the speaker unit (lower), fix them with a screw (binding; M4X6) [2] from beneath.
[1]
[2]
F-2-134
12) Take off the cover [1] from the code guide.
[1]
F-2-135
13) Peel off the released paper of the code guide [1] and affix it to the host machine as shown in the figure.
The right side --- 2 places
[1]
F-2-136
2-36
Chapter 2
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-2-137
14) Connect the cable [2] into the speaker unit [1].
[1]
[2]
F-2-138
15) Run the cable [1] through the cable guide [2] and mount the cable guide cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-139
16) Attach the ferrite core [1] to the cable. Be sure that the length [2] is 50 mm or shorter.
[1]
[2]
F-2-140
17) Connect the cable [1] to the terminal [2] of the voice board.
2-37
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
F-2-141
18) Run the cable [1] through the code guide [2] and mount the code guide cover [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-142
2-38
Chapter 2
[2]
0018-6190
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
F-2-144
[7]
F-2-143
[1]
1 pc
[2]
MFP antenna
1 pc
[3]*1
Cord guide
6 pc
[4]*2
1 pc
[5]
Gasket
3 pc
[6]*3
1 sheet
[7]
1 pc
[2]
[1]
F-2-145
2-39
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-2-146
[1]
F-2-149
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-2-147
5) Put the 3 gaskets [1] on the indicated position inside the main controller
box.
[1]
F-2-150
9) Put the MFP antenna [1] on the indicated position at the rear left side of
the host machine.
F-2-148
Make sure that the board is in the upright position against the connector
when attaching.
2-40
Chapter 2
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-154
13) Connect the MFP antenna cable [1] with the wireless LAN board terminal [2].
[1]
[2]
F-2-151
F-2-152
11) Remove the sheet of the 5 cord guides [1] and put them on the indicated
position at the rear side of the host machine.
F-2-155
14) Insert the reader communication cable and secure it with the wire saddle.
15) Put the power plug into the outlet.
16) Turn ON the main power switch.
17) Check if the wireless LAN board is recognized.
Enter service mode.
Select COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > PCI.
If "Wireless LAN Board" is displayed, that means that the wireless LAN
board is correctly recognized.
2. Output the user data list
Output the user data list in order to check that the wireless LAN has been recognised.
1) Select: [Additional Functions] > [Report Settings] > [Extension Card] in
the Print List > [User Data List].
2) After a message is displayed, select 'Yes' to output the user data list.
[1]
F-2-153
12) Put the MFP antenna cable [1] through the 5 cord guides [2] and attach
the cord guide cover.
2-41
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
F-2-156
2-42
Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs ............................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 Controlling the Main Motor (M2)................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction
0015-4341
Optical path
CCD/AP
PCB
Original
illumination
DC controller PCB
DC power supply PCB
Video PCB
Option
boards
Control
panel
HDD
Laser scanner
Laser Exposure System
Charging
Development
Transfer
Feeding
Photosensitive
drum
Separation
Derivery
tray
Fixing
Cleaning
Manual
feedtray
Deck right
Paper Deck
(option)
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Pickup/Feeding System
F-3-1
3-1
Chapter 3
J3
J1031
J1041
J130
J131
IH driver
PCB
LCD panel
(LCD)
Inverter
PCB
J1
Keypad
PCB
J2
J6802
J6801
J1110
J1111
J3031
Potential
control PCB
J1113
J1114
J1112
J426
Control panel CPU PCB
J107
Duplexing
driver PCB
J6801
J2302
J1018
Laser scanner
motor
J1406
M22 J2511
J5501
J4500
J5503
Laser
driver
PCB
J122
Video
PCB
J426
J122
J1015
DC
controller
PCB
J1406
J1408
J1411
J126
J2
Reader
relay PCB
J2302
J1406
J1024
J1064
J1014
J2M
J6502
J1355
Control
card IV
(accessory)
Hard
disk
J301
BD PCB
J2701
J2511
DC power
supply PCB J4003
M501
J505M
J102
Reader
Interface PCB
HVT PCB
J4502
J113
Environment
sensor PCB
Scanner motor
J306
J101
ADF
J305
J312
J502
J8492
Cassette 3
paper level
detection PCB J806
J113
Cassette 4
paper level
detection PCB J810
J113
J503
J505T
Memory PCB
J315T
J309
J308
J501
J201
J202
J203
AC driver
PCB
J2055
J104
Motor driver
PCB
J2101
J206
J205
J204
J601
J102
J101
Inverter
PCB
J105
CCD/AP
PCB
J2113
F-3-2
Description
Power supply
drive signal
Operating/driving
Control
Error detection
code E010
1) When the main motor drive signal (MAIN_M_ON) goes '1', the main motor starts to rotate.
2) When the main motor rotates, clock pulse signals (MAIN_M_FG) are generated. If the DC controller PCB detects an error in clock pulse signals, it will indicate
"E010" in the control panel.
3-2
Chapter 3
J4005
1
DC power supply
2
PCB
DC controller
PCB
J631
1
24V
GND
J108
J632
MAIN_M_CLK
A8
1
MAIN_M_GND
A7
2
MAIN_M_5V
A6
3
MAIN_M_ON
A5
4
A4
MAIN_M_FG
Drive circuit
Main motor
(M2)
Clock pulse
generation
circuit
Control circuit
Reference
signal
generation
circuit
5
F-3-3
CNTR
PSTBY
30 sec (approx.)
Main motor
(M2)
Drum motor
(M1)
Pre-exposure
LED (LED1)
Primary charging
Laser
Developing clutch
(CL1)
Developing bias
(DC)
Developing bias
(AC)
Bias roller
Pre-transfer
charging (DC)
Pre-transfer
charging (AC)
Transfer charging
Separation
charging (DC)
Separation
charging (AC)
Fixing motor
(M3)
Fixing heater
(IH)
*1
205 deg C
F-3-4
*1: After a shift to standby, the fixing target temperature is decreased in 5-deg C increments at specific time intervals. When a specific temperature is reached, the
fixing heater and the fixing motor are turned on and off to maintain the temperature.
T-3-2
Interval
Description
WMUPR (warm-up)
The machine executes potential control for the photosensitive drum. In the case of 30-sec start-up mode, the machine measure
the potential for a single rotation of the drum, and adjusts only the target output. (VL control)
3-3
Chapter 3
Main power
switch ON
WMUPR
PSTBY
CNTR
60 sec (approx.)
Main motor
(M2)
Drum motor
(M1)
Pre-exposure
LED (LED1)
Primary charging
Laser
Developing clutch
(CL1)
Developing bias
(DC)
Developing bias
(AC)
Bias roller
Pre-transfer
charging (DC)
Pre-transfer
charging (AC)
Transfer charging
Separation
charging (DC)
Separation
charging (AC)
Fixing motor
(M3)
Fixing heater
(IH)
*1
215 deg C
F-3-5
*1: After a shift to standby, the fixing target temperature is decreased in 5-deg C increments at specific time intervals. When a specific temperature is reached, the
fixing heater and the fixing motor are turned on and off to maintain the temperature.
T-3-3
Interval
Description
WMUPR (warm-up)
From when the main power is turned on until the fixing roller temperature reaches a
specific level and, in addition, the potential control of the photosensitive drum ends, and as much as 60 sec passes from
power-on.
The machine executes potential control of the photosensitive drum. For each mode (i.e., copier, printer), the machine
executes VD control (to adjust the primary discharge current) and Vl control (to adjust the laser output), and determines Vdc
(developing bias).
3-4
Chapter 3
Main power
switch ON
WMUPR
PSTBY
CNTR
60 sec (approx.)
Main motor
(M2)
Drum motor
(M1)
Pre-exposure
LED (LED1)
Primary charging
Laser
Developing clutch
(CL1)
Developing bias
(DC)
Developing bias
(AC)
Bias roller
Pre-transfer
charging (DC)
Pre-transfer
charging (AC)
Transfer charging
Separation
charging (DC)
Separation
charging (AC)
Fixing motor
(M3)
Fixing heater
(IH)
*1
205 deg C
F-3-6
*1: After a shift to standby, the fixing target temperature is decreased in 5-deg C increments at specific time intervals. When a specific temperature is reached, the
fixing heater and the fixing motor are turned on and off to maintain the temperature.
T-3-4
Interval
Description
WMUPR (warm-up)
From when the main power is turned on until the fixing roller temperature reaches a specific level, the potential control of
the photosensitive drum ends, and as much as 60 sec passes from power-on.
The machine executes potential control of the photosensitive drum. For each mode (i.e., copier, printer), it executes VD
control (to adjust the primary discharge current) and VL control (to adjust the laser output) and determines Vdc (developing
bias).
PSTBY
PINTR
LSTR
PSTBY
Main motor
(M2)
Drum motor
(M1)
Pre-exposure
LED (LED1)
Primary charging
1st PRINT
Laser
2nd PRINT
Developing clutch
(CL1)
Developing bias
(DC)
Developing bias
(AC)
Bias roller
Pre-transfer
charging (DC)
Pre-transfer
charging (AC)
Transfer charging
Separation
charging (DC)
Separation
charging (AC)
Fixing motor
(M3)
Fixing heater
(IH)
*2
*1
*1
F-3-7
3-5
Chapter 3
*1: temperature control under way for fixing standby mode.
*2: as in the case of standby, while copying/printing is under way, the fixing target temperature is decreased to suit the passage of time after the end of start-up.
T-3-5
3-6
Interval
Description
PSTBY (standby)
From when a print request signal is received until the image signal is generated.
PRINT (print)
The machine is in a state in which a toner image is transferred to paper and the paper is discharged.
The machine is in a state in which paper has been discharged and all drive has ended.
Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms
0015-4355
Description
Controls system operation, memory, printer unit output, image processing, scanner
unit image input processing, rendering, color LCD
controller, card reader unit interface, fax image
processing, etc.
SRAM
BOOTROM
HDD
USB port x 2
USB2.0 interface
Ethernet interface
Video PCB
Reader Unit
Video PCB
HDD
Ethernet
10/100BASE-T
DC controller PCB
SRAM
Image memory
(SDRAM)
Boot ROM
F-4-1
4-1
Chapter 4
J1062
J1040
J1018
J1014
J1060
J1022
J1024
J1023
J1015
J1064
J1002
J1061
BAT1001
J1013
J1059
J1030
J1034
J1063
J1021
J1010
J3000
J1016
J3002
J1017
J1032
J1003
J3001
J1004
J1006
F-4-2
T-4-2
Connector
Description
Connector
Description
J1003
J1004
J1024
J1010
J1060
CC-V connector
J1013
J1061
LAN connector
J1014
J1062
J1015
J1064
J1016
J3000
J1017
J3001
J1018
J3002
J1021
4.2.2 HDD
0015-4357
4-2
Partition
Description
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
Chapter 4
Partition
Description
TMP_PSS
PDL spool
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDL_DEV
BOOTDEV
FSTCDEV
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
HDD
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
FSTCDEV
F-4-3
Description
Location
Remarks
System
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Language
HDD (BOOTDEV)
RUI
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Boot
Boot ROM
DIMM
G3FAX
G3 Fax board
DIMM
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Dcon
DC controller PCB
Flash ROM
(soldered)
Rcon
Flash ROM
(soldered)
Meapcont
HDD (BOOTDEV)
SDICT
OCR dictionary
HDD (BOOTDEV)
KEY
HDD (BOOTDEV)
4-3
Chapter 4
SYSTEM
Language
RUI
MEAP
G3FAX *1
SDICT
KEY
RCON
Reader Unit
DC Controller PCB
HDD
BOOT
G3FAX *2
DCON
G3 FAX Unit
Main Controller PCB
F-4-4
Progress bar
F-4-5
Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated, as access is being made to the HDD. Turning off the power can cause a fault on the HDD (identified by E602).
4-4
Chapter 4
- Self Diagnosis Program (interval 1)
The self-diagnosis program is run by the CPU on the main controller PCB when the main power switch is turned on.
The program is used to check the condition of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD.
The machine will indicate an error code if it finds a fault while running the program.
- Boot Program (interval 2)
When the self-diagnosis program ends normally, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the boot program.
The program is used to read the system software from the HDD to write it into the image memory (SDRAM).
- Image Memory (SDRAM) Area (interval 3)
The system software written by the boot program initializes the various functional blocks (e.g., I/F settings of the main controller).
When all the foregoing ends normally, the machine becomes ready to accept a job (i.e., the control panel shows the Operation screen, and the LED on the Start key
changes from red to green).
Progress bar
F-4-6
Image data
area
CPU
HDD
Self diagnosis
program
Boot
program
BootROM
Main controller PCB
: access to the program during execution
: access for checking
F-4-7
4-5
Chapter 4
Image data
area
System
software
CPU
Boot
program
Self-diagnosis
program
HDD
BootROM
Main controller PCB
: access to the program during execution.
: flow of the system program.
F-4-8
HDD
protection check mode
HDD
protection execution mode
4-6
Chapter 4
Other iR machine
Original
A
Copy
Scan
Image data
SEND
FAX
PullScan
E-Mail
PDL Print
BOX
PC
F-4-10
Reader controller
PCB
Reader unit
DC controller PCB
HDD
SDRAM
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)
F-4-11
4-7
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Enlargement/reduction
Edge emphasis
-intensify-to-density conversion
-density adjustment (F adjustment)
-gamma correction
Text mode
Text/photo/film photo mode
To compression/expansion/editing block
F-4-12
PDPDL image
processing block
SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction
Compression
Rotation
Expansion
HDD
Integration
4-8
Chapter 4
Enlargement/reduction
Smoothing
Thickening
To DC controller PCB
F-4-14
Printer unit
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
HDD
Data expansion
DC controller PCB
F-4-15
4-9
Chapter 4
Printer unit
SDRAM
Data rotation
HDD
Data compression
F-4-16
Printer unit
SDRAM
Data expansion
Data rotation
HDD
Resolution conversion
Ethernet port
(compression data)
To network
F-4-17
4-10
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Main controller PCB
SDRAM
Compression
Compression
HDD
Expansion
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
HDD
Data expansion
DC controller PCB
F-4-19
4-11
Chapter 4
Ethernet
Main controller PCB
PDL
SDRAM
Compression/expansion
/editing block
DC controller PCB
F-4-20
4-12
HDD
Chapter 4
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
F-4-23
[2]
[1]
2) Detach the reader relay PCB [1] from the main controller PCB.
[1]
[4]
[4]
F-4-21
2) Disconnect all the connectors of the main controller PCB, and detach the
main controller box [3].
- 5 Edge saddle [1] (to free the harness)
- 4 Screw [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-24
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-22
4-13
Chapter 4
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-27
[1]
4.7.3 SDRAM
4.7.3.1 Before Removing the SDRAM
[2]
0015-6371
F-4-25
4) Disconnect all the connectors of the main controller PCB, and remove the
main controller PCB [2].
- Screw [1] 8pc.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-28
F-4-26
0015-6374
0016-0014
4-14
Chapter 4
IMG_MNG/APL_MEAP/APL_GEN/APL_SEND). (For details, see the descriptions given for upgrading.)
- Downloading the system software
Using the SST, download the following: System, Language, RUI, MEAPCONT (Meap content), SDICT (OCR dictionary), KEY (key/certificate for
encrypted communication), TTS (audio dictionary).
[1]
F-4-29
0015-8244
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-4-30
Be sure to remove the counter memory PCB. If you hit the hard disk against
the counter memory PCB, the impact can leave appreciable damage.
[4]
F-4-32
2) After detaching the hard disk [2] in the direction of the arrow, disconnect
the connector[3].
- 2 Screw [1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-31
4-15
Chapter 4
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-33
[3]
[2]
F-4-34
4-16
Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
Contents
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions
0015-4373
Description
Scanning lamp
YG xenon lamp
Original scanning
Halftone
256 gradations
by scanner HP sensor
lens
Magnification
sub scanning direction: scanning speed variation (No. 1 mirror base; 100% or higher)
in combination with image processing by reader block (50% or higher and lower than 100%)
in combination with image processing in reader block and controller block (lower than 50%)
[2] ADF mode: 25% to 200%
main scanning direction: image processing in controller block
sub scanning direction: original movement speed variation (50% or higher); in combination with image
processing in controller block (lower than 50%)
Scanner drive control
[1]book mode
sub scanning direction: by reflection type sensor
main scanning direction: by CCD
[2] ADF mode
main scanning direction: by slide guide in ADF
sub scanning direction: by photosensor in ADF
Notation
Description
Scanning lamp
LA1
Scanner motor
M501
FM501
PS501
Scanner HP sensor
PS502
PS503
detects the state (open/closed) of the ADF (detects timing of size detection at 25 deg)
---
---
Interface PCB
---
Memory PCB
---
Mirror
---
No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors
Inverter PCB
---
CCD unit
---
5-1
Chapter 5
Item
Notation
Description
Scanner motor
Original size
sensor (A/B)
Original size
sensor (inch)
Reader controller
PCB
Interface PCB
Memory PCB
CCD unit
ADF
open/closed sensor 1
Inverter PCB
Scanner
HP sensor
ADF
open/closed sensor 2
Scanning lamp
F-5-1
No. 2 mirror
No. 1 mirror base
No. 1 mirror
scanning lamp
Lens
CCD
Scanner motor
Light-blocking plate
Scanner HP
sensor
(forward)
scanning
lamp
(reverse)
F-5-3
5-2
Chapter 5
Scanner
motor control
Scanner motor
To ADF
To printer
Reader controller
PCB
To printer
(main controller)
J2
02
J3
03
J2
04
J3
08
J3
12
J2
05
J3
05
J3
09
J3
13
09
J2
01
J2
10
J3
ADF
open/closed
sensor 1
CCD unit
06
J3
01
J3
Interface PCB
Scanner
HP sensor
ADF
open/closed
sensor 2
Reader controller
PCB
Interface PCB
J2
06
J2
03
J5
01
J5
03
J5
02
05
J5
To DADF
Memory PCB
Scanning
lamp activation
control
15
J3
To printer
(main controller)
01
J6
02
J6
Inverter PCB
Scanning lamp
F-5-4
5-3
Chapter 5
J201
J203
DC24V
DC13V
DC5V
DC3.3V
J202
IC3
IC1
(CPU)
IC2
J210
IC4
J206
Backup of
service mode settings
J205
J207
J209
J208
J204
(not used)
Original size
sensor (AB)
Original size
sensor (inch)
Inverter
PCB
(dotted line):back
CCD unit
F-5-5
T-5-3
Jack
Description
J201
J202
used for communication with the ADF (sensor signal input, fan control, scanner motor control, controller)
J203
used for communication with the printer unit; connects to the scanner motor; used for communication with the ADF; used for input of image
signals
J204
J205
J206
J207
J208
J209
not used
J210
not used.
T-5-4
IC
Description
IC1
IC2
IC3
IC4
5-4
Chapter 5
SREADY
Forward Reverse
- shift shading
- fixed shading
- white plate dust
detection control
- shading correction
Reader motor
Scanning lamp
HP sensor
Scanner unit position
HP
(shading position)
HP (shading position)
Reader motor
Forward
SCFW
SCRW
STBY
Reverse
Scanning lamp
HP sensor
Image trailing edge
HP (shading position)
HP (shading position)
Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original)
White plate dust detection
Shading correction
Start key
ON
STBY
Stream reading
position shift
SCFW
SCRW
SREADY
Forward
Stream reading
dust detection
STBY
Reverse
Reader motor
Scanning lamp
HP sensor
HP (shading)
Stream reading
position
Image
trailing edge
Shading
position shift
HP (shading)
White plate dust detection
control
Shading correction
F-5-8
5-5
Chapter 5
[1]
Reader
controller
PCB
Interface
PCB [2]
Scanner motor
Light-blocking plate
(forward) Scanning
lamp
(reverse)
Scanner
HP sensor
No.2 mirror
base
F-5-9
Interface PCB
J202
J203
[1]
Motor
driver
CPU
Scanner
motor
+24V/15V
J308
J307
A*
B
B*
J306
3
1
4
5
2
6
M501
Stop
Deceleration
Shift
speed
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Shift distance
[1] Acceleration interval: accelerates up to scan speed
[2] Run-up interval: run-up margin used to ensure stable speed
[3] Image read interval: segment over which images are read
[4] Deceleration interval: at the image trailing edge, decelerates and stops as soon as possible
F-5-11
5-6
Chapter 5
ERROR CODE:
E202 (HP detection error)
-0001: when the No. 1 mirror base is moving forward, it fails to reach the HP sensor within a specific period of time
-0002: when the No. 1 mirror base is moving in reverse, it fails to reach the HP sensor within a specific period of time
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X (scanner image leading edge position adjustment)
Enter a value to adjust the image leading edge position.
settings range: 0 to 2970 (a change of '12' causes a shift of 1 mm)
COPIER>AJST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S (scanner home position)
Do not change the setting.
5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction
5.3.2.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction
0015-4391
50-99%
100%
325 mm/sec
101-200%
201-400%
The following shows the speeds at which the mirror base is moved:
speed ratio
1
1/2
1/4
Magnification
25% 50% 100%
200%
400%
F-5-12
[2] In ADF mode, the machine changes the speed at which the original is moved for a ratio between 25% and 200%.
T-5-6
Description
25-49%
increases the speed used to move the original (as compared to 100%).
collets image data at the same speed as for a ratio between 100% and 196%.
uses data skipping on the main controller PCB (50%).
5-7
Chapter 5
Description
50-99%
100%
325 mm/sec
101-200%
1
1/2
1/4
25%
100%
50%
200%
F-5-13
Inverter PCB
scanning lamp
LA1
Activation
control
circuit
J601
J206
GND
1
9
GND
2
8
GND
3
7
GND
4
6
XE-ON
5
5
24V
6
4
24V
7
3
XSYNC 2
8
24V
9
1
CPU
F-5-14
5-8
Chapter 5
Electrode
Electrode
Fluorescent
material
Opening
Glass tube
Electrode
Electrode
F-5-15
AB-Configuration
Original
sensor 1
Point of original
detection 1B6
Point of original
detection 1
Original
sensor 3
STMTR
B5R
Print of original
A5
detection 2
Point of original
detection 3
B5
Point of original
detection 4
Point of original
detection 2
A4R
LTRR
STMT
B4
A4
Point of original
detection 3
A3
LTR
LGL
279.4431.8mm
(11"17")
F-5-16
Original size
border line
1A = additional
detection point 1
1B = additional
detection point 2
Original size
border line
F-5-17
5-9
Chapter 5
T-5-7
Result of identification
Result of movement
A
no
no
original absent
yes
no
original present
no
yes
original present
yes
yes
original present
Note:
Change in the Signal in Response to ADF Open -> Closed
change present: no
other: yes
The OR argument is applied to the outputs at 2 points.
2. Priority on the Presence of an Original at the Front
If the machine detects the absence of an original at the rear in spite of detection of the presence at the front for main scanning direction, the machine will identify
the size of the original upholding the result of detection at the front.
(rear)
Document size
sensor 1
Point of detection 1
Point of detection 2
Point of detection 3
B5
Point of detection 4
(front)
EX (B5 original)
T-5-8
Point of detection
Result of
detection
present/absent
Result of identification
present
present
absent
present
present
present
absent
absent
B5
5-10
Chapter 5
Scanning lamp
Original sensor
Point of detection 1
Point of detection 2
Point of detection 3
Point of detection 4
ADF
Reader unit
Platen
glass
(external
light)
F-5-20
(external
light)
F-5-21
25
F-5-22
5
F-5-23
F-5-24
5-11
Chapter 5
AB-Configuration
CCD point
Original
of detection
1
2
3
size
A B A B A B
A3
Original
4
A B sensor 1
B4
Inch-configuration
CCD point
Original
of detection
Original
1
2
3
size
A B A B A B sensor 3
11"x17"
LGL
LTRR
A4R
A4
LTR
STMTR
B5
B5R
STMT
absent
A5
B6
none
change absent
:change present
F-5-25
1st
SCAN
Dust detection control*
2nd
SCAN
Dust detection
control
F-5-26
*Executed only if dust has been detected at all points (A, B, C, D, E) during the previous job. In such a case, the machine will use the point subjected to least dust,
and executes correction before starting a read operation.
2. Particulars of Control
- At the End of a Job (changing the stream reading dust read position)
The machine measures the light reflected by the surface of the platen roller, and detects the presence/absence of dust with reference to its intensity. If the presence
of dust is detected, the machine moves to the next point (5 points max.; A -> B -> C -> D -> E).
The machine uses the first point at which the absence of dust is detected as the read point for the next job.
5-12
Chapter 5
pattern 1
*1
*1
pattern 2
pattern 3
pattern 4
pattern 5
At the start of a job
*1
*2
F-5-27
If dust is detected at all 5 points (A, B, C, D, E), the machine will issue an alert in response to the placement of an original in the ADF, thus promoting the user to
clean the points.
Alert Message:
The machine may read the dust, which may show as lines in the output image. Clean the narrow segment of glass indicated in the drawing with a soft cloth moistened
with water (and well wrung).
Press the Close button to reset the alert.
At the start of a job, the machine executes dust detection once again, and will use a point with little or no dust as the read point.
*1: read point at the end of the previous job.
*2: point with little or no dust.
T-5-9
A
read reference point (1.0 mm to the left from the center of the platen roller)
point 1.0 mm to the right from the reference point (center of platen roller)
5-13
Chapter 5
Start key
ON
1st
SCAN
2nd
SCAN
Dust detection control
2. Particulars of Control
- White Plate Dust Detection
The machine compares the data on the light reflected by the white plate at time of fixed shading and shift shading to check for dust on the white plate while at the
same time identifying the coordinates and width of the area of dust.
- White Plate Dust Correction
If the machine detects the presence of dust, it corrects the shading correction coefficient of the area of dust by means of a correction coefficient used for both sides
of the area with dust, thus limiting the effects of the dust.
White plate
Dust
Correction Algorithm
Analog image
processing
CCD/AP PCB
F-5-30
5-14
Controller
block
Chapter 5
J101
J204
CCD control
signal
J204
A12V
A5V
Odd-numbered Even-numbered
pixel
pixel
Analog image
signal
CCD drive
control
Gain correction
data
Even-numbered
pixels
Analog image
process
- gain correction
- offset correction
A/D
Odd-numbered
conversion
pixels
Reader
controller
PCB
Digital image
signal
10
J102
CCD/AP circuit
J205
F-5-31
J101
J204
Gain correction
data
EEP-ROM
CPU
Target
value
SRAM
CCD/AP
PCB
J102
J205
J203
Digital image
signal
Shading correction
10
Digital image
signal
8
F-5-32
Shift register
Gate
Light-receiving block
(photo diode)
6 5
4 3
2 1
Gate
Shift register
Output buffer
F-5-33
5-15
Chapter 5
The output of the CCD may not necessarily be even because of the following factors even if the density of the original is perfectly even:
(1) variation in the sensitivity of the individual pixels of the CCD
(2) difference in the degree of light passing through the center of the lens and through its edge
(3) difference in the intensity of light between the center and ends of the scanning lamp
(4) deterioration of the scanning lamp
The machine executes shading correction to make up for the variation in the output of the CCD.
Shading correction may be shading adjustment executed to determine a service mode target value or shading correction executed for every job.
Characteristics after
correction
Target value
Characteristics before
correction
Measurement
White
Standard white plate
F-5-34
5-16
Original density
Chapter 5
[2]
5-18)Reference[Removing the
[1]
F-5-38
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-5-35
F-5-39
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-5-36
F-5-40
[1]
F-5-37
5-17
Chapter 5
3-2) ADF white level adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DFWLVL1/2)
10-17)Reference[Removing the
10-12)Reference[Removing the
10-17)Reference[Removing the
10-17)Reference[Detaching the
10-18)Reference[Detaching the
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-5-41
- When detaching the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the white
plate attached to its back. Soiling can cause lines in the image. If soiled,
clean it using lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
- Take care not to deform the sponge [2] attached to the right glass
retainer [1].
[2]
F-5-43
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-44
F-5-42
[2]
[1]
[5]
5-18
[4]
[3]
F-5-45
When replacing the scanning lamp, be sure to fit the removed ferrite core to
Chapter 5
the new lamp.
4) Slide the No. 1 mirror base [1] to the right so that it matched against the
cut-off [2] of the frame.
0015-4823
[1]
When detaching the No. 1 mirror base, be sure to hold it by the bend [A] on
the mirror stay.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[A]
F-5-46
[2]
F-5-48
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-49
[1]
F-5-47
[1]
F-5-50
5-19
Chapter 5
cover)
a-1. image read start position adjustment (X direction; in fixed reading
mode)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
a-2 image read start position adjustment (Y direction; in fixed reading
mode)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
a-3 shading position adjustment (in fixed reading mode)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
a-4 feeder mode main scanning position adjustment
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
a-5 ADF stream reading CCD reading position
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS
a-6 density manipulating value adjustment
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFCH-G2
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFCH-G10
(After inputs it, execute COPIER>FUNCTION>DF-LNR)
[2]
[1]
F-5-51
The machine retains ADF-related service data in the RAM of its reader controller.
ADF adjustment is necessary whenever you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the RAM.
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[3]
F-5-52
[2]
0015-4825
[1]
F-5-53
[1]
[2]
[1]
Be sure to generate the latest P-PRINT printout before replacing the reader
controller PCB.
- If you are initializing the RAM on the reader controller without replacing
the PCB
Using the SST, upload the backup data of R-CON; initialize the RAM, and
then download the data, thus eliminating the need for the following.
1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in the service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON. Then, press the OK key to execute RAM initialization. Thereafter, turn off and then back on the main power.
3) Enter the appropriate settings for the following items in the service mode:
a. setting indicated on the service label (found behind the reader unit front
5-20
[1]
F-5-54
Chapter 5
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
F-5-58
[3]
[3]
F-5-55
[4]
F-5-59
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-56
[1]
F-5-60
[2]
F-5-57
5-21
Chapter 5
0015-9958
[1]
[2]
F-5-61
[2]
[1]
F-5-62
[4]
[1]
[2] [4]
F-5-65
[1]
[3]
[5]
F-5-63
[1]
[2]
F-5-66
3) Move the scanner motor [3] in the direction of the arrow to pull out.
- 3 Screw [1]
- 2 Spring [2]
F-5-64
5-22
Chapter 5
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-67
[1]
F-5-71
[2]
F-5-68
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-5-72
F-5-69
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-5-73
0015-4841
5-23
Chapter 5
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-5-74
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-78
[2]
F-5-75
[1]
F-5-79
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-5-76
[1]
[1]
F-5-80
F-5-77
5-24
Chapter 5
2) Detach the right cover (upper). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing the
Right Cover (Upper)]
3) Detach the reader right cover. (page 10-17)Reference[Removing the
Reader Right Cover]
4) Detach the left cover (upper). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing the
Left Cover (Upper)]
5) Detach the reader left cover. (page 10-17)Reference[Removing the
Reader Left Cover]
6) Detach the reader front cover. (page 10-17)Reference[Detaching the
Reader Front Cover]
7) Detach the reader rear cover. (page 10-18)Reference[Detaching the
Reader Rear Cover]
8) Detach the ADF.
9) Detach the control panel. (page 10-23)Reference[Removing Control
Panel]
[2]
[1]
0015-4859
F-5-81
4) While freeing the claw at the edge, remove the original size sensor [1].
[1]
When detaching the stream reading glass retainer, be sure to take care so that
the leaf spring will not come off.
2) Remove the stream reading glass [3].
3) Detach the left glass retainer [5].
- 2 Screw [4]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
F-5-82
[1]
F-5-84
1) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
2) Detach the cooling fan [4].
- 2 Screw [3]
- When mounting the stream reading glass retainer, be sure to hold down
both edges of the leaf spring [A] while fixing it in place. (Take care not
to bend the leaf spring.)
- Be sure to mount it while butting the stream reading glass retainer [B]
against the stream reading glass [C].
- Check to be sure that the side of the stream reading glass in contact with
the leaf spring [D] of the stream reading glass retainer.
- If not, dust can collect on the stream reading glass, causing lines in
output images.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
F-5-83
5-18)Reference[Removing the
5-25
Chapter 5
- 1 Screw [1]
[2]
[1]
[A]
F-5-88
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-85
[C]
[D]
[B]
[1]
F-5-89
[3]
[4]
[3]
F-5-90
F-5-86
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-5-91
F-5-87
5-26
Chapter 5
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-5-92
[2]
[1]
F-5-96
[1]
[2]
F-5-93
10) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1], and detach the motor frame [3].
- 6 Screw [2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-5-97
14) Free the harness from the 3 wire saddles [1], and detach the ADF open/
close sensor base [3].
- 6 Screw [2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-5-94
11) Disconnect the connectors [1] of the reader unit communication cable.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-98
[1]
F-5-95
5-27
Chapter 5
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
F-5-99
[2]
In the next steps, draw mark-off lines before removing the screw.
16) Remove the 2 cable fixing screws [2] of the No. 1 mirror base [1].
17) Remove the cable fixing spring [3].
18) Free the 2 hooks [4] of the cable from the right side of the reader unit
frame.
19) Detach the cable for the pulleys.
[3]
[3]
F-5-101
[2]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-5-102
F-5-100
0015-9945
1) Put the ball of the cable into the hole of the drive pulley [1], and wind the
cable (4 times inside; 5 times outside); then, tape it in place. At this time,
make sure that the cable fixing [2] is on the inside.
2) Fit the cable on the pulleys; then, fit one end on the left side hook [3] and
the other end on the right side hook [4].
3) Temporarily fix the cable fixing plate [2] in place on the No. 1 mirror base
[5].
4) Mount the reader unit upper frame.
0015-4860
5-28
Chapter 5
[C]
[3]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[B]
F-5-103
2) Arrange the mirror positioning tool so that it is ready for use in the machine (by changing the pin position; FRONT).
[C]
[2]
[B]
F-5-106
[A]
4) Secure the end of the cable that has temporarily been fixed in place on the
hook of the reader unit frame.
5) Fully tighten the screws on the cable fixing plate both at the front and the
rear.
6) Detach the mirror positioning tool (FRONT, REAR).
7) Put the detached parts back on by reversing the foregoing steps.
[B]
0015-9424
F-5-104
3) Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2]; rear [3]) into the appropriate holes [1] of the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base.
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Detach the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-5-107
F-5-105
5-29
Chapter 5
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-108
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-109
5-30
Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Chapter 6
6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Overview
0015-4421
Description
synchronization control
Laser unit
Polygon mirror
BD mirror
Laser mirror 4
Laser mirror 2
Laser mirror 3
Laser mirror 1
Photosensitive drum
BD PCB
F-6-1
T-6-2
Item
Description
Laser semi-conductor
Polygon mirror
12 facets
BD mirror/BD PCB
Video PCB
6-1
Chapter 6
Laser scanner
motor(M15)*
Half speed
STBY
Start key ON
INTR
LSTR
Full speed
STBY
Half speed
Video signal
Laser
BD signal(BD)
F-6-2
Video PCB
BD PCB
Laser
driver
PCB
Jxxxx
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Jxxxx
J4500
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1411
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
24V
ACC
DEC
GND
FG
5V
BD
GND
ERMDI
ERMDO
ERMSK
ERMCS
GND
3.3V
GND
(N.C.)
CSU
DIR
DIO
SCLK
GND
SDCLK
GND
CTL2
CTL1
CTL0
APC-SEL
GND
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
DC controller
PCB
Jxxxx
1 ???
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Controller
PHSYNC
VIDEO
F-6-3
ERROR DODE:
E100
Issued when the BD signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the laser has been turned on.
6-2
Chapter 6
The laser driver circuit serves to drive the semi-conductor laser with reference to the laser drive signal (LD) coming from the DC controller PCB.
The laser drive circuit is associated with the following items of control:
- laser activation control
- laser intensity control (APC control)
- laser intensity control to suit the drum surface potential
The various signals have the following meanings and functions:
[1] sample laser activation signal; for each scan, it turns on the laser for sampling of light intensity (for imaging)
[2] laser activation enable signal; after the Start key has been pressed, it goes '0'when the laser is ready for activation.
[3] laser write start signal; when paper reaches the laser write start sensor (PS28) mounted in front of the registration roller, the machine starts laser write operation.
[4] the machine monitors the intensity of laser light upon its activation (for sampling), and feeds the appropriate value to the laser drive circuit.
[5] the machine controls the output so that the value that has been fed and the reference value from the DC controller are identical.
[6] laser intensity reference signal; it serves as the laser activation reference (determined as a result of potential control by the DC controller).
Video PCB
DC controller
PCB
GND
GND
VD1N
VD2P
GND
VD2N
VD2P
J122
GND
SDCLK
GND
SCLK
DIO
DIR
CSU
GND
Laser block
J1408
J1401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND
(N.C.)
CSU
DIR
DIO
SCLK
GND
SDCLK
GND
CTL2
[2] CTL1
[1] CTL0
APC-SEL
GND
+5V
J5501
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Laser
driver
Circuit
[5]
Laser
[4]
Photo
Monitor
J4500
J1411
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
[2]
5
5
[1]
4
4
[6]
3
3
2
2
1
1
Laser unit
J113
LWRPD B2
[3]
Laser write
Start sensor
(PS28)
F-6-4
MEMO:
- The laser power is adjusted automatically when the laser unit is replaced.
- When the manual feed tray is used as the source of paper, the write operation starts when the registration paper sensor (PS29) detects paper.
SERVICE MODE:
DISPLAY> DPOT> LLMT
indicates the laser power voltage control value for copier imaging.
DISPLAY> DPOT> LPOWER-P
indicates the result of potential control for the laser intensity used during printer (PDL) imaging.
DISPLAY> DPOT> LPOWER-C
indicates the result of potential control for the laser intensity used during copier imaging.
DISPLAY> MISC> LPOWER
indicates the laser intensity in real time.
ADJUST> LASER> PVE-OFST
used to adjust the laser incident point.
FUNCTION> LASER> POWER
used to turn on laser light.
6-3
Chapter 6
Video PCB
DC controller
PCB
J121
J101
CTL0
CTL0
CTL1
CTL1
CTL2
CTL2
APC-SEL
APC-SEL
PD
Laser
Driver
IC
LD
F-6-5
FG control
FG -> BD control
STBY
half speed
FG control
Imaging
full speed
BD control
Deceleration
BD -> FG control
FG control
Video PCB
DC controller
PCB
Reference
signal
generation
block
J126
J1403
BD
Motor
speed
control
block
J1410
J2511
FG
ACC
DEC
Laser Scanner
Motor
M22
BD
BD PCB
J2701
F-6-6
ERROR CODE:
E110 (scanner motor error)
-0001: after the scanner motor has been started up, the FG signal is not detected within a specific period of time, or while the scanner motor is rotating at a stable
speed, the FG signal is not detected.
6-4
Chapter 6
2) Turn off and then back on the main power switch.
[1]
F-6-7
2) Slide the developing assembly locking unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
- 1 Screw [1]
3) Detach the scanner cover [4].
- 4 Screw [3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-6-8
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-6-9
6-5
Contents
Contents
7.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Contents
Contents
Chapter 7
7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Overview
0015-4473
Description
Photosensitive drum
Developing assembly
Pre-exposure
LED array
on/off control
Potential sensor
potential control
[1] sets primary current
[2] sets laser output
[3] sets developing bias (DC)
DC non-control
Pre-exposure
Cleaner unit
Developing assembly
Dust-colleting roller
Transfer guide
F-7-1
7-1
Chapter 7
T-7-2
step 1
pre-exposure
step 2
step 3
laser exposure*
step 4
step 5
step 6
step 7
fixing
step 8
drum cleaning
*Toner is deposited. The machine also executes black exposure using its laser unit.
Static Image Formation Block
2. Primary charging
3. Laser exposure
1. Pre-exposure
4. Development
8. Drum charging
Manual feed tray
5. Transfer
Delivery
7. Fixing
Registration
6. Separation
flow of paper
Deck/cassette
F-7-2
WMUPR
WMUP
[1]
Main motor (M2)
Drum motor (M1)
Laser activation
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging
Grid bias
Developing clutch (CL4)
Developing bias (AC)
Developing bias (DC)
Dust-collecting roller bias (DC)
Pre-transfer charging bias (AC)
Pre-transfer charging bias (DC)
Transfer charging
Separation charging bias (AC)
Separation charging bias (DC)
Separation claw bias (AC)
F-7-3
7-2
200 C
Start key ON
STBY
[2]
INTR
Chapter 7
INRT
PRINT
[1]
[2]
STBY
LSTR
[3]
F-7-4
Laser light
Control
signal
J103
B4
B3
B2
B1
tion
s
igna
Developing cylinder
Developing bias (DC) determination
0V
POT-DT [1]
POT-ON [2]
24V
J3
1
2
3
4
Dete
c
Developing cylinder
Control
signal
DC controller PCB
Potential
sensor
F-7-5
7-3
Chapter 7
A. Timing and particulars of potential control
1. At the time of warm-up
The machine's potential control consists of copier potential control mechanisms and printer potential control mechanisms.
The machine uses VD=390V for both copier and printer control mechanisms.
The timing of potential control is as follows:
T-7-3
At time of warm-up
Purpose
Operating condition
- the temperature of the fixing assembly is 50 deg C or lower when the main power
switch is on
- when the first image is being formed 60 min after warm-up
Operation length
10 sec (approx.)
Service mode
Default
Purpose
Operating conditions
- start of the 1st job 10 min and 60 min after the main power switch has been turned
on
- the door is opened and closed
Operation length
service mode
Default
OFF
WMUP
Copier potential control [1]
F-7-6
7-4
STBY
Chapter 7
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT (enable/disable potential control)
0: disable potential control
1: enable potential control
2. In the service mode
The following settings may be made for potential control executed 10 min and 60 min after the main power switch is turned on and when the door is opened and
closed: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNTMD:
[1] off (default): disable potential control
[2] short mode: decrease the length based on potential attained by executing either of the 2 modes
[3] standard mode: execute both copier and printer potential control in succession
a. Short Mode
The machine executes one of the 2 potential modes, and makes an assumption for the other mode.
For warm-up after power-on, the machine refers to the primary current level, laser output level, and developing bias DC level for both copier potential control and
printer potential control, thereby computing and saving the resulting rate.
In the course of potential control after power-on, the machine executes one of the 2 potential control modes, thus computing the other in relation to the rate it obtained at time of power-on and after power-on.
The following is the sequence of operation used for short mode:
10 min later to less
than 60 min
Sets a constant level for both copier
and printer potential control
Copier
potential
control
Printer
potential
control
Start key ON
Assumes a potential l
evel for the other
based on the result
of copier or printer
potential control
60 min later
Assumes a potential
level for the other
based on the result
of copier or printer
potential control
Potential control
Potential control
F-7-7
b. Standard Mode
The machine executes both copier potential control and printer potential control in succession.
10 min later to less
than 60 min
Copier
potential
control
Printer
potential
control
60 min later
Copier potential control
and printer potential
control during 1st job
Potential control
Start key ON
Potential control
Start key ON
F-7-8
In addition to standard mode and short mode, the machine also offers 30-sec mode executed for 30-sec start-up.
c. 30-sec Mode
The machine executes 30-sec mode in a power save state and when it is turned on for the first time for the day.
The machine uses the value of the previous control session to initiate laser exposure, measuring the post-laser illumination potential (VLM) and determining the
developing bias DC (Vdc).
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> PO-CNT (turning off the potential control mechanism)
0: disable potential control
1: enable potential control (default)
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> PO-CNTMD (selecting potential control mode)
0: 10 min, 60 min potential control OFF (default)
1: 10 min, 60 min short mode
2: 10 min, 60 min normal mode
COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-POT-SW
Enter '1' if a transfer separation fault occurs because of a fault in the potential sensor (as a tentative remedy until the replacement of the sensor).
COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-POT-D
Enabled when '1' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-POT-SW.
0: if user primarily uses originals with low image ratio (text original; default)
1: if user primarily uses originals with high image ratio (photo original)
2: if re-transfer (drop-out at 50 mm of leading edge) occurs
COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-HUM-SW
Enter '1' if the environment sensor is faulty (as a tentative remedy until replacement of the sensor).
COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-HUM-D
Enabled if '1' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO-F-HUM-SW.
Enter the humidity reading of the site of installation (between 30% and 99%; default being 35%).
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC (forcing potential control)
ON: execute potential control
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> EPOTOFST (setting potential sensor offset value)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> DE-OFST (adjusting copy Vdc)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VD-OFST (setting copy VD target potential offset value)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> DE-OFS-P (adjusting printer Vdc)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VD-OFS-P (setting printer VD target potential offset value)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB.
7-5
Chapter 7
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC>OFST (adjusting potential sensor offset)
For the method of adjustment, see "Standards and Adjustments."
VD
VD
+6V
Target VD
-6V
VD
Previous potential
200 C
STBY
WMUPR
VD
Potential sensor
VD
VD
VD
VD
VD
Grid bias
Primary charging
Vpc
Vpc
Vpc
Vpc
Correction control
sequence start
Potential control
sequence start
F-7-9
VL1
VL1
+6V
Target VL1
-6V
VL1
VL1
Previous potential
Fixing assembly
temperature 195 Deg C
200C
WMUPR
WMUP
Potential sensor
STBY
VL1
Developing bias
(DC)
Laser
LP0
Potential control
sequence start
LP0
LP
Correction control
sequence start
F-7-10
7-6
Chapter 7
Potential sensor
Vpc
VD
Vdc
Photosensitive
drum
Developing
cylinder
200 C
WMUPR
Potential sensor
VD
VL1
STBY
VL2
Laser
Secondary
charging
Resulting
potential
Vpc Vpc
LP0
LP
Vdc
F-7-11
Main power
switch ON
Copier
potential
control
Printer
potential
control
1 min later
Start key ON
laser output
value correction
Laser output
value correction
7-7
Chapter 7
1. Adjusting the Density for Copying
The machine increases the developing bias to decrease the copy density. If increased in excess, the bias can cause light images; if decreased in excess, on the other
hand, the background can developing fogging. In light of this, the machine executes density processing using changes in the developing bias and image processing
(binary density processing).
Purpose: to obtain the density suited to the user's needs.
Method of correction: uses the developing bias and image processing (binary density processing) according to the F-value setting.
T-7-5
F value
Shift (V)
Image processing
Image density
240
60
yes
lighter
220
40
no
180
no
140
-40
no
120
-60
yes
darker
Shift (V)
Thickening*1
Image density
218
48
no
light
205
35
no
194
24
no
182
12
no
170
no
153
-17
no
137
-33
no
120
-50
no
120
-50
yes
dark
*1: Thickening processing may be enabled for all F values in user mode ('correct fine line').
7-8
24V
Pre-exposure lamp
PRE_LED_ON* [1]
DC-CON
J103A
Chapter 7
F-7-13
HVT-PRIMARY [2]
High-voltage PCB
J4502
J102A
DC controller PCB
PRIMARY-LEAKDETECT [1]
HVT-REMOTE [3]
F-7-14
7-9
J103A
DC controller PCB
Chapter 7
PRIMARY_CLEAN_OUT1 [1]
PRIMARY_CLEAN_OUT2 [2]
Wire
(to
rea
r)
Primary charging
wire cleaning motor
(M6)
(to
fro
nt)
Wire cleaner
7.5.2.3 Others
0015-4490
7-10
Chapter 7
High-voltage PCB
DC controller PCB
DC -1000V
J4502
J102A
HVT_ROLLER_BIAS
[1]
Dust-collecting
roller
Scraper
F-7-16
High-voltage
AC transformer
HVT_POST [3]
J4503
J4502
J102A
DC controller PCB
HVT_AC [2]
High-voltage PCB
AC+DC
F-7-17
Pre-transfer current
The pre-transfer charging current is optimized to suit the environment (i.e., reading of the environment sensor):
Low temperature
High temperature
F-7-18
SERVICE MODE:
7-11
Chapter 7
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY (turning on/off fuzzy control)
0: enable fuzzy control (default)
1: low humidity mode (for pre-transfer charging current level lower than standard)
2: normal humidity mode
3: high humidity mode (for pre-transfer charging current higher than standard)
When set to '1' through '3', the machine executes the appropriate modes independently of the reading of the environment sensor.
J103A
DC controller PCB
POST_CLEAN_OUT1 [1]
POST_CLEAN_OUT2 [2]
(to
wa
rd
rea
r)
(to
wa
rd
fro
nt)
Wire
Pre-transfer charging
wire cleaning motor (M7)
Wire cleaner
F-7-19
7.5.4.4 Others
0015-4496
7-12
Chapter 7
Drum cleaner
thermistor
Pre-exposure lamp (LED)
Cleaning blade
Auxiliary roller
Collecting toner
feedscrew
Separation claw
Magnet roller
F-7-20
J108A
The following shows the control mechanism used to see if the collecting toner case has become full:
DRUM_M_FG
DRUM_M_ON
5V
0V
M1
J107B
(front)
J103A
DC controller PCB
Drum cleaner
thermistor
Collecting toner
feedscrew lock
detection (SW5)
WASTE_TONER_
FULL_SW
0V
to SW5
to Drum cleaner
thermistor
Collecting toner bottle
F-7-21
ERROR CODE:
E013-0001
Indicated if the collecting toner feedscrew sensor (MSW2) has remained on for 5 sec or more.
E821-0001
The reading of the drum cleaner thermistor is 55 deg C at least once, causing the machine to assume that the inside of the cleaner is clogged with toner.
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WASTE-TNR
collecting toner counter; when its reading reaches '250,000', the machine will issue an alarm on the User screen.
Dispose of the collecting toner, and reset the error code.
MEMO:
The collecting toner bottle can hold toner good for a maximum of 500,000 prints. The machine will indicate a collecting toner bottle full alarm when the counter
7-13
Chapter 7
reading reaches '250,000'.
HVT
DC-CON
Separation
Claw AC
Bias PCB
Separation
Claw
F-7-22
J108B
J108A
DC controller PCB
The following shows the construction of the developing assembly drive control system:
24V
DEV_CL_ON* [1]
DRUM_M_FG
DRUM_M_ON
5V
0V
M1
CL1
Developing clutch
F-7-23
The following signal is associated with the developing assembly control mechanism:
[1] Developing clutch drive signal; when '0', the drive of the main motor (M1) is transmitted to the developing assembly.
7-14
Chapter 7
High-voltage PCB
HVT_DEV_BIAS
_DC [2]
J4502
HVT_DEV_BIAS
_DC [1]
J102A
DC controller PCB
AC output 1200Vpp
Developing cylinder
F-7-24
The following signals are used in association with the developing bias control mechanism:
[1] Developing DC bias current control signal; controls the DC component of the developing bias generated by the high-voltage power supply PCB.
[2] turns on/off the developing bias current output.
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>BIAS
(entering developing bias)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the DC controller PCB.
setting range: 0 (darker) to 600 (lighter)
COPIER> ADJUST> DEVELOP> HVT-DE
(entering offset value for developing high-voltage output of high-voltage unit)
Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high-voltage unit if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM on the DC controller
PCB.
setting range: -100 (lighter) to +100 (darker)
COPIER> ADJUST> DEVELOP> D-HV-DE
(entering offset value for developing high-voltage output of DC controller PCB)
Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the DC controller PCB if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM on the DC controller
PCB.
setting range: -100 (lighter) to +100 (darker)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> DE-OFST)
(adjusting VDC for copier)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> DE-OFS-P)
(adjusting VDC for printer)
Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC control PCB.
M9
HOP_BOTTLE
_ON[1]
[3]
TS2
HOP_BOTTLE_ON[3]
[2]
HOP_TONER_SENSOR[2]
M10
[1]
J103B
[4]
TS1
DEV_TONER_SENSOR[4]
J103A
[6]
DC-CON
F-7-25
7-15
Chapter 7
Developing assembly
toner level sensor (TS1)
Hopper supply motor
(M10)
Supply
Inside hopper
toner level sensor (TS2)
F-7-26
ERROR CODE:
E020-0000
Indicated while the output of the inside hopper toner level sensor (TS2) points to the presence of toner and the output of the developing assembly toner level sensor
(TS1) inside the developing assembly points to the absence of toner for 120 sec or more.
J4502
J102A
DC controller PCB
TRANSFER-LEAKDETECT [1]
High-voltage PCB
The following items are associated with the transfer charging control system:
1. controlling the DC bias constant current
2. controlling the output to suit the environment (fuzzy control)
The following shows the construction of the transfer charging control system:
HVT_TRANSFER [2]
HVT-REMOTE [3]
F-7-27
The following signals are associated with the transfer charging control mechanism:
[1] Transfer charging leakage detection signal; when the current is too high or too low, '0'
[2] Transfer charging current control signal; used to control the transfer current generated by the high-voltage PCB
[3] High-voltage remote signal; turns on/off the transfer current output
7-16
Transfer current
Chapter 7
Low temperature
High temperature
F-7-28
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY (turning on/off fuzzy control)
0: turns off fuzzy control (default)
1: low humidity mode (for lower transfer charging current than standard)
2: normal humidity mode
3: high humidity mode (for higher transfer charging current than normal)
When set to '1' through '3', the machine executes the appropriate modes independently of the reading of the environment sensor.
Transfer/separation charging
wire cleaning motor (M8)
DC controller PCB
Separation
charging assembly (tow
ard
the
rea
r)
(to
wa
rd
the
fro
J106A
nt)
T/S_CLEANER_1 [1]
T/S_CLEANER_2 [2]
F-7-29
The following signals are used in association with the cleaning mechanism:
[1] Transfer charging wire cleaning motor normal direction signal; when '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear.
[2] Transfer charging wire cleaning motor reverse direction signal; when '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front.
7.8.1.4 Others
0015-4509
7-17
Chapter 7
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TR-SP-C2
(switching over the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the left deck)
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TR-SP-C3
(switching over the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the cassette 4)
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TR-SP-C4
(switching over the transfer/separation output for pickup from the manual feed tray)
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TR-SP-MF
(Use it to switch the transfer/separation output for pickup from the manual feed tray.)
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TR-SP-DK
(switching over the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the side paper deck)
As necessary, switch over the transfer/separation output value for pickup from various sources of paper by way of correcting various faults:
0: normal (default)
1: prevent re-transfer
2: prevent separation fault
3: prevent transfer fault
HVT-AC [2]
HVT_SEPARATE [3]
High-voltage
AC transformer
J4503
J4502
J102A
DC controller PCB
High-voltage PCB
Separation
charging wire
SEPARATE-LEAKDETECT [1]
AC+DC
F-7-30
The following signals are associated with the separation charging control mechanisms:
[1] Separation charging leakage detection signal; if the current is too high or too low, '0'.
[2] Separation charging current control signal; used to control the DC bias current and the AC bias voltage generated by the high-voltage PCB.
[3] Separation charging remote signal; turns on/off the separation current output.
7.9.1.2 Correcting the Output to Suit the Environment and the Drum Surface Potential
0015-4514
A)
Separation current(
Low humidity
High humidity
[1] In a low humidity environment, paper tends to become dry, thus tending to collect charges (high resistance). The output is decreased.
[2] If the drum surface potential is low, the output is increased to prevent separation faults.
[3] If the drum surface potential is high, the current level is lowered to prevent re-transfer.
7-18
Chapter 7
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> FUZZY (turning off/on fuzzy control)
0: enable fuzzy control (default)
1: low humidity mode (for higher pre-transfer charging current than normal)
2: normal humidity mode
3: high humidity mode (for higher pre-transfer charging current than normal)
If '1' through '3' is set, the machine executes the individual modes independently of the reading of the environment sensor.
7.9.1.3 Others
0015-4515
7-19
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
0015-4867
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-35
[2]
F-7-32
2) Insert the drum rotating tool [1] that comes with the unit into the slit [3]
in the drum shaft [2]. While keeping the drum in place so that it will not
rotate counterclockwise, insert a screwdriver into the center opening [4]
in the drum rotating tool to remove the drum fixing screw.
[3]
5) Hold the left grip [1] and the right grip [2] of the process unit [3] as indicated, and take it out.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-7-36
[1]
[4]
F-7-33
If the drum is let to rotate counterclockwise, the cleaning blade will not come
into contact with the drum correctly, leading to poor cleaning. Thus, be sure
to fix the drum in place first before removing the drum fixing screw to avoid
the problem.
MEMO:
If the hopper assembly is released but not removed, be sure to open the right
cover (upper) and the right cover (lower) so that there will be space.
3) Unlock the fixing feeding unit release lever [1], and slide out the fixing
feeding unit [2].
7-20
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-39
[2]
[3]
F-7-40
[2]
0016-0073
F-7-37
2) After sliding the process unit into the machine, insert the screw [2] by inserting the drum fixing tool [1]. Then, match the slot in the drum shaft and
the drum rotating tool [3], and tighten the screw [2] using the drum rotating tool.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-41
[1]
F-7-38
F-7-42
1) Remove the primary fan duct. (page 10-29)Reference[Removing Primary fan Duct]
0015-4876
7-21
Chapter 7
to the direct rays of the sun.
[3] Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area subject to high or low temperature or humidity or where temperature or humidity tends to change rapidly.
[4] Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent/gas.
The foregoing requirements commonly apply to all photosensitive drums.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F-7-43
When replacing the primary charging wire or the primary charging assembly, be sure to execute the following in the service mode to clean the wire:
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN.
Further, be sure to use a strengthened polishing pad (blue holder) as the
cleaning pad.
0015-4888
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-45
[2]
[1]
F-7-46
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-44
Be sure to execute the wire cleaning in the user mode after mounting the pretransfer charging assembly.
7-22
F-7-47
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-48
If the temperature of the fixing assembly is 50 deg C or higher when replacing the drum unit, be sure to execute the following in the service mode; otherwise, the potential control will not be executed: COPIER > FUNCTION >
DPC > DPC.
5 10cm
7.10.5.4 Cleaning Photosensitive Drum
F-7-50
0016-0081
Do not rotate the magnet roller during work. Otherwise, waste toner may fall
throught the cleaner assembly.
1) Remove the process unit.
2) Remove the photosensitive drum.
3) Moisten lint-free paper [1] with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol solutions [2]; then,
pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of the drum cleaning powder (CK-0429) [3] on the lintfree paper.
4) While butting the lint-free paper relatively strongly against the photosensitive drum, wipe the surface of the drum from the front to the rear and
from the rear to the front.
[3]
CK-0429
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-49
F-7-51
7-23
Chapter 7
[1]
[3]
[2]
Protect the removed photosensitive drum against dirt and scratches by wrapping 5 to 6 sheets of paper or the drum protective sheet stored near the collecting toner container around the drum.
2) Remove the drum heater unit [1] from the rear.
[1]
F-7-54
[2]
F-7-52
[2]
[1]
F-7-55
0015-9371
Cleaning blade
Separation claw
F-7-56
7-24
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-57
F-7-61
8) Loosen the 5 screws [1], and remove the cleaning blade from the blade
support plate.
[3]
[1]
F-7-62
When mounting the cleaning blade, be sure that the side with the marking [1]
will be the face.
1) Push in the cleaning blade [2] until it butts slightly against the rear.
No gap
[2]
[1]
F-7-63
2) Tighten the 5 screws [3] lightly, and stop to turn them when resistance is
felt.
3) Turn the screws tightened lightly in the step 2 about 20 to 30 degrees in
the order indicated below, and tighten them fully.
[3]
[3]
5
Order of tightening
F-7-64
[1]
After mounting the cleaning blade, check that the edge of the blade is not extremely bent.
Further, be sure to clean the groove in the blade support plate before mounting the blade, as toner or the like in the groove can be the cause the bending
of the blade. B
[2]
F-7-59
[1]
F-7-60
7-25
Chapter 7
9) Remove the photosensitive drum. (page 7-22)Reference[Removing
Photosensitive Drum]
0015-9973
8mm
(Front)
30
40mm
[3] [2]
[4] 0 0.5mm
Rear
30
40mm
[1]
Magnet roller
4 8mm
[1]
F-7-65
4) Rotate the magnet roller in the clockwise direction (viewing from the
front).
5) Repeat the step 3 through 4 until the area from which toner was removed
in the step 3 is once again coated with an even layer of toner.
1) Open the right door unit (upper) [1], and remove the screw [2] from the
door tape; then, open the unit fully.
[2]
[1]
F-7-68
7-26
Chapter 7
of the arrow.
- 1 screw [1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-7-69
If tilting the hopper assembly, toner will be spilled out; thus, be sure to remove it without tilting.
[1]
- 1 connector [1]
- 5 screws [2]
F-7-71
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-7-72
[1]
F-7-70
0015-8341
7-27
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
F-7-77
F-7-73
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-78
F-7-74
4) Remove the hopper stirring motor [2] together with the mount.
- 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-79
F-7-75
F-7-76
7-28
[2]
1) Remove the developing assembly, and clean the developing toner blocking sheet [1].
Chapter 7
remove the push-on roll [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-84
F-7-80
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-85
[1]
[2]
F-7-81
[1]
[2]
[1]
Be careful not to drop the gear when removing the gear unit because it becomes free
2) Remove the grip ring [1] attached to the cylinder shaft at the rear; then,
remove the gear [2], the parallel pin [3], and the push-on roll [4].
F-7-86
2) Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk, and pour out the toner onto the
newspaper from the developing assembly.
3) Remove the developing blade [2] together with the mount.
- 2 mounting screws [1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-82
F-7-87
The blade must be mounted with a high accuracy. Do not remove it on its
own in the field. Be sure to remove it together with the mount.
[2]
F-7-83
4) Remove the grip ring [1] attached to the cylinder shaft at the front; then,
7-29
Chapter 7
1) Make sure that the 4 protrusions [1] on the transfer/separation charging assembly are correctly fitted into the cut-offs [2] in the fixing/feeding unit.
2) Make sure that the leaf spring [3] of the fixing/feeding unit comes in contact with the frame of the transfer/separation charging assembly by sliding the assembly from the front.
[1]
[1]
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
2) Detach the fixing/feeding unit front cover (right) [2].
- 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-91
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-7-92
[1]
[2]
F-7-88
[3]
[3]
F-7-93
3) Attach the fixing guide plate [1] with the screw [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-89
4) Pull out the transfer/separation charging assembly toward the front while
holding the front and the rear of it, and remove it in the direction of upper
left.
F-7-94
0015-6692
Be careful not to cut the nylon wire by coming into contact the transfer/separation charging assembly to the transfer guide.
7-30
Chapter 7
- 1 screw [1]
2) Detach the cover while pulling the separation claw holder [4] toward the
front.
- 2 screws [3]
[2]
[1]
sembly.
[3]
[1]
[4]
F-7-97
F-7-95
7.10.19.1 Outline
0015-4943
MEMO:
To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, and turn the
hex key 3 to 4 times; then, twist the charging wire.
4) Cut the end (excess) of the twisted wire.
5) Hook the loop on the stud.
Stud
Charging electrode
Reel
(Front)
Charging wire
(Rear)
F-7-98
6) At the rear, hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioning plate;
then, hook the charging wire tension spring on the charging wire where
indicated to the following figure.
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-7-100
(Wrong)
(Correct)
F-7-96
Grid side
(Correct)
(Wrong)
F-7-101
7-31
Chapter 7
9) Attach a cushion in front of the charging wire (except the primary charging assembly).
10) Attach the shield plates (left, right).
11) Attach the wire cleaner. At this time, make sure the orientation of the
wire cleaner.
12) Wipe the charging wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol solutions.
0015-9969
Screws
7.5
1.5
0 mm
7.5
1.5
0 mm
F-7-105
F-7-102
10.06
3) Loosen the screw, and move it in the direction of the arrow indicated below; then, temporarily tighten it in place.
4) Free a length of about 5 cm of the charging wire (0.1 mm in diameter)
from the charging wire reel, and form a loop at its end with a diameter of
about 2 mm.
0.3 mm
F-7-106
Screw
9.5
0.5mm
F-7-107
F-7-103
16.0
MEMO:
To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, and turn the
hex key 3 to 4 times; then, twist the charging wire.
5) Cut the twisted charging wire (excess) with nippers.
6) Hook the loop on the stud A.
7) After routing the wire for 31 runs, lead it through the section B, and give
it a half turn; then, put it between the washer and the monitor unit, and
wind it once around the screw (clockwise), and secure it in place with the
screw.
Stud A
Screw
F-7-104
7-32
F-7-108
Contents
Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Specifications and construction ................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.3 Outline of the Pickup Control System ......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 Outline of the Pickup Assembly Motor Control System ............................................................................................................. 8-5
8.9 Delivery........................................................................................................................................................................8-29
Contents
Contents
Contents
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Specifications and construction
0015-4519
Description
center
Paper capacity
by service person
front cassette 3, 4
by user
by user
Duplexing method
through path
8-1
Chapter 8
[8]
[7]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
PS23
PS52 PS4
PS36
[2]
PS23
PS35
PS51
[32]
[9]
PS28
[12]
PS46
[6]
PS31
PS34
[17]
PS30
[18]
PS38
[19]
PS24
PS33
[10]
PS20
PS37
PS32
[23]
[11]
[16]
PS19
[20]
[13]
[14]
PS25
[21]
[15]
[22]
[24]
[26]
PS21
[25]
PS26
[28]
[30]
[27]
PS22
[29]
PS27
[31]
F-8-1
The machine uses the following sensors to monitor the movement of paper:
T-8-2
Notation
Name
Notation
Name
PS4
PS30
PS19
PS31
PS20
PS32
PS21
PS33
PS22
PS34
PS23
PS35
PS24
PS36
PS25
PS37
reversal sensor 1
PS26
PS38
reversal sensor 2
PS27
PS46
PS28
PS51
PS29
registration sensor
PS52
8-2
Name
Ref.
Name
[1]
[17]
curl-imparting roller
[2]
[18]
[3]
[19]
[4]
registration roller
[20]
[5]
[21]
Chapter 8
Ref.
Name
Ref.
Name
[6]
[22]
[7]
[23]
[8]
[24]
[9]
[25]
[10]
reversing roller
[26]
[11]
[27]
[12]
[28]
[13]
[29]
[14]
[30]
[15]
[31]
[16]
8-3
Chapter 8
M17
PS29
PS28
M25
PS24
M24
SL7
DC controller PCB
PS10
PS11
PS32
M11
PS19
PS6
PS7
M5
M4
F-8-2
8-4
PS20
SL6
PS33
Chapter 8
M26
M27
PS25
DC controller PCB
Cassette 3
pickup solenoid drive signal
PS26
Cassette 3
lifter detection signal
PS21
SL3
Cassette 3
paper detection signal
PS17
Vertical path 4
paper detection signal
PS13
PS27
PS22
SL4
PS18
PS14
F-8-3
Motor
Remarks
Pickup system
same as above
same as above
same as above
same as above
same as above
Vertical path
system
8-5
Chapter 8
Location
Motor
Remarks
Reversal/
duplexing
system
same as above
same as above
same as above
same as above
others
DC controller
PCB
+24V
CPU
Motor driver
PCB
J104
J2101
J2104
A7
A14
A10
+24V
A8
A13
A*
A9
A12
A9
A11
3
2
1
B
+24V
B*
A10
M12
F-8-4
8-6
Chapter 8
Start key ON
or print command received
1st sheet picked up
2nd sheet picked up
PRINT
INTR
STBY
LSTR
STBY
Right deck
pickup motor (M11)
Right deck pickup
solenoid (SL6)
Right deck
retry sensor (PS19)
[1]
[1]
F-8-5
INTR
LSTR
STBY
[2]
Cassette 4
pickup solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 3
retry sensor (PS21)
Vertical path
lower motor (M27)
Vertical path 3
paper sensor (PS26)
Vertical path
upper motor (M26)
Vertical path 2
paper sensor (PS25)
Vertical path duplexing
feed motor (M25)
[1]
Vertical path 1
paper sensor (PS24)
Pre-registration motor
(M17)
Laser write start
sensor (PS28)
Registration roller
clutch (CL2)
Registration paper
sensor (PS29)
[1] stops to arch the paper at the registration roller.
[2] for 2nd and subsequent jobs, stops at 20 mm from the vertical path 3 roller
to control the sheet-to-sheet distance.
F-8-6
8-7
Chapter 8
Pickup motor
M
SL
Pickup roller
Retry sensor
F-8-7
Start key ON
Delay detected
Retry started
Pickup roller
Pickup roller
DOWN solenoid
Retry sensor
*1
Vertical path
sensor
F-8-8
8-8
Chapter 8
PS52 PS4
PS36
PS35
PS51
PS29
PS28
PS46
PS34
PS30
PS38
PS24
PS33
PS20
PS37
PS32
PS19
PS25
PS21
PS26
PS22
PS27
F-8-9
Types of Jams
T-8-5
Sensor
Notation
Delay
jam
Stationary jam
Power-on stationary
jam
PS19
yes
no
no
PS20
yes
no
no
PS21
yes
no
no
PS22
yes
no
no
PS32
yes
yes
yes
PS33
yes
yes
yes
PS24
yes
yes
yes
PS25
yes
yes
yes
PS26
yes
yes
yes
PS27
yes
yes
yes
PS28
yes
yes
yes
Registration sensor
PS29
yes
yes
yes
PS51
no
no
yes
PS4
no
yes
yes
PS52
yes
no
yes
PS35
yes
yes
yes
PS36
yes
yes
yes
Reversal sensor 1
PS37
yes
yes
yes
Reversal sensor 2
PS38
yes
yes
yes
PS34
yes
yes
yes
8-9
Chapter 8
Sensor
Notation
Delay
jam
Stationary jam
Power-on stationary
jam
PS30
yes
yes
yes
PS46
no
no
yes
INTR
[1]
[1]
Motor N-1
Jam check
Error
Normal
Sensor N
Motor N-1
right deck
left deck
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
8-10
Chapter 8
Start key ON
or PRINT setting recognized
INTR
Sensor N-1
[1]
[1]
Jam check
Error
Normal
Sensor N
INTR
L+A
Jam check
Normal
Sensor N
L+A
Error
8-11
Chapter 8
Sensor
vertical path 3 paper sensor (PS26)
vertical path 4 paper sensor (PS27)
write check sensor (PS28)
registration sensor (PS29)
fixing claw jam sensor (PS4)
inside delivery sensor (PS35)
outside delivery sensor (PS36)
reversal sensor 1 (PS37)
reversal sensor 2 (PS38)
duplexing paper sensor (PS34)
duplexing pre-registration sensor (PS30)
Cassette opening/closing
8-12
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
cassette 3 opening/closing
cassette 4 opening/closing
Chapter 8
Detection
sensor (PS15)
sensor (PS16)
Paper detection
(variable resistor)
(variable resistor)
---
---
drive motor
The following diagram shows the components of the cassette pickup unit:
Retry sensor
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Paper
Separation roller
Pickup roller
Lifter sensor
Lifter
Paper sensor
Cassette open/closed
sensor
F-8-13
Paper
Lifter
F-8-14
- Paper Absent
8-13
Chapter 8
Paper sensor
Paper detecting lever
Lifter
F-8-15
2 bars
1 bar
no bar
no paper
Variable
resistor
Level of paper (high)
Variable
resistor
Level of paper (low)
F-8-16
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-LVOL
Indicates the value when 50 sheets of paper exist in cassette 3.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-HVOL
Indicates the value when 275 sheets of paper exist in cassette 3.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4-LVOL
Indicates the value when 50 sheets of paper exist in cassette 4.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4-HVOL
Indicates the value when 275 sheets of paper exist in cassette 4.
8-14
Chapter 8
Paper width
detecting VR
Cassette
Length guide
F-8-17
T-8-12
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
UN18
UN19
UN16
UN17
Paper
STMT-R
A5-R
B5-R
KLGL-R
GLTR-R
G-LGL
A4-R
LGL/LTR-R
Remarks
U3
FLSC
B4/B5
U2
G-LTR
U1
279.4 x 431.8mm
U4
A3/A4
8-15
Chapter 8
Paper length PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/
sensor
PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103
Paper
width sensor
(slice level)
Unit: mm
Signal
SZ 2
SZ 1
SZ 2
SZ 1
SZ 2
SZ 1
SZ 2
SZ 1
ON/
OFF
288.5
A4
A3
(U4)
279.4 x
431.8mm
,,,
,,
(11 x17 )
(U1)
B5
B4
STMT
LTRR
LGL
(U2)
A5
A4R
G-LTRR
K-LGLR
B5R
A5R
273.7
261.8
238.0
212.9
206.6
196.6
186.0
165.2
144.1
STMTR
(U3)
F-8-18
The following sizes are grouped and specified in service mode. A size identified by an asterisk is a default paper size as selected at time of shipment from the factory.
T-8-14
Group
Size
U1
U2
G-LTR
K-LGL
FOOLSCAP
OFFICIO
E-OFFI
A-OFFI
M-OFI
U3
G-LGL
FOLIO
AUS-FLS
LTR
A-LTR
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST-U1
31: G-LTR *, 22: K LGL
COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST-U2
24: FLSC *, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI
COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST-U3
34: G-LGL *, 35: FOLI, 25: A-FLS
COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST-U4
18: LTR *, 29: A-LTR
*: factory setting
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-STMTR
Use it to change the paper width basic value for STMTR in cassette 3.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-A4R
Use it to change the paper width basic value A4R in cassette 3.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4-STMTR
Use it to change the paper width basic value for STMTR in cassette 4.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4-A4R
Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4 in cassette 4.
- Paper Types That May Be Used for the Machine
T-8-15
8-16
Name
Notation
A3
A3
A4R
A4R
Chapter 8
Name
Notation
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5R
A5R
B4
B4
B5R
B5R
B5
B5
11 x 17
11 x 17
LTRR
LTRR
LTR
LTR
STMT
STMT
STMR
STMTR
LEGAL
LGL
Korean Government
K-LGL
Korean Government R
K-LGLR
FOOLSCAP
FLSC
A-FLS
OFICIO
OFI
Ecuadorian Officio
E-OFI
Bolivian Officio
B-OFI
Argentine LTR
A-LTR
Argentine LTRR
A-LTRR
Government LTR
G-LTR
Government LTRR
G-LTRR
Argentine LGL
A-LGL
Government LGL
G-LGL
FOLIO
FOLI
Argentine Officio
A-OFI
Mexico Officio
M-OFI
8-17
Chapter 8
SL2
CL3
CL2
M1
DC controller PCB
A
Paper
A
Feed roller
Registration roller
Manual feed
pull-off roller
PS23
Tray
Separation roller
F-8-19
Side guide
(rear)
Variable resistor
Side guide
(front)
DC controller PCB
F-8-20
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R
Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4R in the manual feed tray.
COPIER> ADJUST> CSRT-ADJ> MF-A6R
Use it to change the paper width basic value for A6R in the manual feed tray.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4
Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4 in the manual feed tray.
8-18
Chapter 8
8.6 Deck
8.6.1 Lifter Operation (right/left deck)
0015-4553
Left deck
Cassette opening/closing
right deck
left deck
Detection
Paper detection
Drive motor
Pickup roller
Separation roller
Limiter
sensor
Pickup roller
Lifter sensor
Lift
position
lever
Paper
detecting
lever
Paper sensor
Deck open/closed
sensor
Lifter
F-8-21
8-19
Chapter 8
DC controller PCB
J112 Right deck lifter detection
signal
A2
Motor drive
signal
CPU
Right deck
lifter sensor
J2105
J105 J2113
Limit
detection
circuit
PS6
5
Motor
driver PCB
M4
Right deck
lifter drive
motor
J112
B8
Right deck lifter limit
signal
PS8
Right deck
limit sensor
PS10
Left deck
lifter sensor
F-8-22
DC controller PCB
J115 Left deck lifter detection
signal
A5
CPU
J2105
J105 J2113
Motor drive
signal
Limit
detection
circuit
Motor
driver PCB
3
M5
4
Left deck
lifter drive
motor
J115
A2
PS12
Left deck
limit sensor
Paper
Lifter
F-8-24
- Paper Absent
Paper sensor
Paper detecting lever
Lifter
F-8-25
8-20
Chapter 8
T-8-17
3 bars
2 bars
1 bar
no bar
no paper
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
Left deck
Paper level
[1] sensor
(PS47)
[2] sensor
(PS48)
[2] sensor
(PS50)
sensor (PS11)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
no paper
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
8-21
Chapter 8
Registration roller
Main motor
M2
CL2
DC controller
PCB
F-8-27
SL5
SL8
DC controller PCB
PS52
PS36 PS35
PS4
PS51
PS46
Delivery flapper
PS29
PS38
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F-8-28
8.8.2 Moving the Paper to the Duplexing Feed Assembly From the Reversing Assembly
0015-4567
8-22
Chapter 8
PS29
PS35
Curl-imparting
PS28
PS38 Duplexing feed Duplexing feed roller
Duplexing outlet
left roller
right roller
roller
PS30
PS31PS34
PS24
PS37
Reversing roller
M18
M19
M14
SL8
PS46
M25
DC controller PCB
F-8-29
8.8.3 Outline
0015-4569
8-23
Chapter 8
back of 2nd
sheet printed
[2] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-30
F-8-31
8-24
Chapter 8
F-8-32
F-8-33
F-8-34
F-8-35
8-25
Chapter 8
3
1
F-8-36
1
3
F-8-37
8. The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet, and the 1st sheet is delivered.
2
7
5
3
F-8-38
9. The 4th side is printed on the 2nd side, and the 3rd sheet is kept on hold at the duplexing wait point.
The 5th sheet is picked up.
3
7
1
F-8-39
3
7
F-8-40
8-26
Chapter 8
11. The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet.
The 4th sheet is kept on hold at the duplexing wait point.
5
9
4
F-8-41
7
4
3
F-8-42
7
9
6
4
F-8-43
14. The 4th sheet is delivered, and the 10th side is printed on the 5th sheet.
8
7
9
6
3
1
F-8-44
6
4
F-8-45
8-27
Chapter 8
Source of drive
Position measurement
PS31
10mm
M16
Home position
paper edge
paper
F-8-46
Registration sensor
(PS29)
Duplexing paper sensor
(PS34)
Duplexing horizontal
registration motor (M16)
Reverse
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Duplexing horizontal
registration sensor(PS31)
H.P
Duplexing
horizontal registration
sensor (PS31)
S.P
position
*1
10 mm (approx.)
Power edge
F-8-47
*1: The edge of paper and the contact with the sensor are detected in the absence of the light-blocking plate.
*2: The start position (SP) varies as the paper edge position varies depending on the size of paper.
8-28
Chapter 8
HP: start position of the duplexing horizontal registration sensor.
SP: start position of the duplexing horizontal registration sensor.
8.9 Delivery
8.9.1 Reversal Delivery Operation
0015-4576
Operation mode
Face-up
Face-done
The following shows the operation of the machine at time of reversal delivery in face-down delivery mode.
1. The sheet is moved to the duplexing feed assembly.
Inside delivery roller
PS35
Point of reversal
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F-8-48
2. The inside delivery sensor (PS35) goes on and the paper moves over a specific distance; then, the reversal motor (M14) goes on to stop the trailing edge of paper
at the point of reversal, timed to coincide with the activation of the reversal sensor 1 (PS37).
PS35
Print of reversal
PS37
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F-8-49
3. The reversal motor (M14) starts to rotate once again, and the trailing edge of paper is moved in the direction of delivery.
Print of reversal
PS46
PS37
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F-8-50
4. When the trailing edge of paper moves past the reversing roller coinciding with the activation of the outside delivery sensor (PS36), the reversal motor (M14)
stops. The delivery motor (M13) starts to rotate to move the paper to the outside delivery roller, which discharges the paper to the outside of the machine.
8-29
Chapter 8
M19
Outside delivery roller
PS36
Point of reversal
PS37
Reversing flapper
M14
F-8-51
Environment switch
no
no
---
no
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
---
yes
yes
---
no
no
Copy / Print
yes
---
yes
yes
Sleep mode
yes
---
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
no
---
no
yes: Heater ON
no: Heater OFF
---: Heater ON or OFF
Printer
Leakage breaker
ELCB1/2
SW1
SW5
Fu701
RL701
N.C.
Heater switch PCB
Reader
13VA1
Controller power
supply PCB
Reader heater
(H501)
Reader heater
(H502)
Cassette heater
unit (H2)
F-8-52
8-30
Chapter 8
1) Slide out the cassette 3/4.
2) Open the right door unit (rear).
[2]
[4]
0015-4965
[3]
[1]
[5]
F-8-56
0015-4968
F-8-53
[3]
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Remove the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Remove the main controller box cover.(page 10-17)Reference[Removing the Main Controller Box Cover]
5) Remove the right cover (upper rear).(page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
6) Remove the main controller box. (page 4-13)Reference[Removing the
Main Controller Box]
7) Remove the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
8) Remove the collecting toner bottle holder. (page 5-29)Reference[Removing the Collecting Toner Bottle Holder]
Front side of
the machine
[1]
F-8-54
- When mounting the pickup roller used at the rear of the machine [1],
make sure the punch mark [2] is at the rear of the machine.
Direction of
rotation
[2]
[1]
Rear side of
the machine
F-8-55
8-31
Chapter 8
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-60
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-57
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-8-58
F-8-61
0015-4978
0015-4977
[1]
F-8-59
8-32
[1]
F-8-62
Chapter 8
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-66
F-8-63
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-8-67
6) If the lifter drive guar is not away from the lifter motor, move the position
of the lifter motor M20/M21 [1] to the left and check again with keeping
the release button of the cassette 3/4 pressed halfway.
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-64
[1]
F-8-68
[3]
[1]
F-8-65
2) While keeping the lifter motor M21/M21 [1] to the right side, tighten the
screw [2] temporally.
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Detach the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Remove the HVT PCB. (page 10-28)Reference[Removing HVT PCB]
8-33
Chapter 8
[3]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-8-69
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-71
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F-8-70
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-8-72
[1]
F-8-73
7) Remove the screw [2] while sliding the cable fixing plate [1].
8-34
Chapter 8
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-8-74
[1]
[5]
[1]
F-8-77
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-75
[1]
F-8-78
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-76
F-8-79
An attempt sliding out the pickup assembly without removing the deck causes the lifter get trapped and may hold the pickup assembly from sliding out.
3) Disconnect the connector [3].
- 1 screw [1]
- 1 connector cover [2]
4) Remove the right deck pickup assembly [5].
- 3 screws [4]
Keep supporting the pickup assembly; otherwise the pickup assembly may
drop when the fixing plate is removed.
8-35
Chapter 8
[3]
[2]
[1]
- 2 screws [1]
- 1 connector [2]
[1]
[1]
F-8-80
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-82
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Detach the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Remove the HVT PCB. (page 10-28)Reference[Removing HVT PCB]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-8-81
F-8-83
[1]
0015-4999
8-36
F-8-84
Chapter 8
3) Detach the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Remove the HVT PCB. (page 10-28)Reference[Removing HVT PCB]
[1]
[3]
F-8-88
[A]
[2]
[A]
0015-9388
F-8-85
1) Remove the manual feeding pickup roller unit. (page 8-37)Reference[Removing the Manual Feeding Pickup Roller Unit]
Before removing the left deck pickup solenoid from the support plate [1],
take note of its position with reference to the fixing screw [2] of the solenoid.
Or, mark the position for the solenoid by drawing a line on the support plate
with a scriber.
When mounting the solenoid on its own, be sure to secure it in its original
position.
[1]
When removing the stopper [2] and the guar [3], be careful not to lose the
three parallel pins [7]; they will slip off.
[2]
F-8-86
[1]
F-8-87
2) Slide the 2 bushings [2] and remove the manual feeding pickup roller unit
[3].
8-37
Chapter 8
- 2 resin E-rings [1]
- 2 bushings [2]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[3]
[7]
[3]
[2]
F-8-91
2) Push the hook [1] using the driver etc. in the direction of the arrow to remove the separation roller [2].
[1]
Rear side
[1]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Front side
F-8-89
F-8-92
0015-5011
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-8-93
[3]
F-8-90
8-38
3) Move the mount [3] to adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller.
- If double feeding occurs, remove the mounting screw [2], lower the
mounting base [3] and tighten the screw [2] in the A hole.
- If pickup failure occurs, remove the mounting screw [2], raise the
mounting base [3] and tighten the screw [2] in the B hole.
Chapter 8
hole A
[1]
[1]
[2]
hole B
F-8-94
[3]
[4]
F-8-98
0015-5016
[2]
[1]
F-8-95
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-96
F-8-99
[1]
[2]
F-8-97
4) Free the harness [1] from the edge saddle [2], and disconnect the connector [3].
5) Remove the sensor [4].
8-39
Chapter 8
[1]
0016-0337
[5]
1) Pull out the pre-registration guide [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove from the machine.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-8-100
F-8-103
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
4) Pull out the registration roller [1] in the direction of the arrow in the order
of [A] and [B] to remove from the machine.
[1]
[B]
[3]
[2]
F-8-104
T-8-22
F-8-101
When mounting the pre-registration guide, make sure the presence of the
plate end [2] under the guide (front) [1] and the spring [3] on the guide
(front) [1]. Also make sure the presence of the plate end [5] under the guide
(rear) [4].
[1]
[A]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-102
8-40
Chapter 8
- 2 washers [4]
- 2 bearings [5]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-8-107
F-8-105
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-8-109
F-8-106
[1]
[1]
0015-9416
F-8-110
6) Disconnect the connector of the duplex feeding unit in the rear side [1],
and free the harness [2] from the 2 edge saddles [3].
8-41
Chapter 8
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-111
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-8-114
[1]
F-8-112
[2]
[1]
F-8-115
[1]
F-8-113
F-8-116
[1]
F-8-117
6) Disconnect the connector of the duplex feeding unit in the rear side [1],
and free the harness [2] from the 2 edge saddles [3].
8-42
Chapter 8
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-118
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-8-122
[1]
F-8-119
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-120
[1]
[2]
F-8-123
1) Remove the right deck pickup assembly. (page 8-35)Reference[Removing the Right Deck Pickup Assembly]
2) Remove the cassette pickup assembly. (page 8-31)Reference[Removing
the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Assembly]
3) Remove the left deck pickup assembly. (page 8-35)Reference[Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly]
[2]
F-8-121
0015-5199
8-43
Chapter 8
Cassette 3/4, Right deck pickup assembly
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
F-8-124
[5]
[4]
F-8-127
[2]
F-8-125
[1]
Check to make sure the protrusion in the roller plate and roller are engaged
securely.
F-8-128
front
[2]
[1]
rear
F-8-126
[7]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[3]
[1]
0015-5202
[2]
[5]
[6]
[9]
F-8-129
8-44
Chapter 8
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Detach the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
5) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
6) Detach the main controller box cover. (page 10-17)Reference[Removing the Main Controller Box Cover]
7) Remove the main controller box. (page 4-13)Reference[Removing the
Main Controller Box]
8) Remove the collecting toner bottle holder. (page 5-29)Reference[Removing the Collecting Toner Bottle Holder]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-131
[3]
[1]
[2]
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Detach the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Detach the right cover (upper rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
5) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
6) Detach the main controller box cover. (page 10-17)Reference[Removing the Main Controller Box Cover]
7) Remove the main controller box. (page 4-13)Reference[Removing the
Main Controller Box]
8) Remove the collecting toner bottle holder. (page 5-29)Reference[Removing the Collecting Toner Bottle Holder]
[1]
F-8-130
0015-5212
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-8-132
8-45
Chapter 8
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover.(page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Remove the duplex feeding unit.(page 8-49)Reference[Removing the
Duplex Feeding Unit]
0015-9393
0015-5226
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-8-133
[1]
[2]
F-8-136
2) Detach the fixing feeding unit release lever support plate [2].
- 2 screws [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-8-134
F-8-137
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-135
F-8-138
8-46
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover.(page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Remove the duplex feeding unit.(page 8-49)Reference[Removing the
Duplex Feeding Unit]
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-142
[3]
[1]
0015-9405
F-8-139
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover.(page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Remove the duplex feeding unit.(page 8-49)Reference[Removing the
Duplex Feeding Unit]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-140
[2]
[5] [3]
[4]
[6]
F-8-143
[2]
Before removing the screw, make sure to mark the line in the following step.
1) Adjust the position of the solenoid using the 2 screws [1] so that the driver
lever [2] is pushed fully when the solenoid is on (i.e., when the plunger is
down)
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-8-141
8-47
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-144
F-8-146
[2]
[1]
[3]
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover.(page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Remove the duplex feeding unit.(page 8-49)Reference[Removing the
Duplex Feeding Unit]
3) Detach the fixing front cover. (page 10-16)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Front Cover]
4) Detach the fixing upper cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Upper Cover]
5) Detach the fixing/feeding unit front cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover]
6) Detach the fixing/feeding unit middle cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Middle Cover]
7) Remove the fixing drive assembly. (page 10-22)Reference[Removing
the Fixing Drive Assembly]
F-8-147
[1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
F-8-145
2) Detach the fixing feeding unit release lever support plate [2].
- 2 screws [1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-148
[4]
[2]
F-8-149
8-48
Chapter 8
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover.(page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
Be careful not to trap your hand between the grip and the rail. Further, do not
place the duplex unit where the parts might suffer damage.
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-8-152
[1]
F-8-150
[1]
0015-9406
[1]
[2]
F-8-153
[2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-8-151
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-8-154
8-49
Chapter 8
cassette 3/4, right deck pickup assembly
[1]
F-8-159
[2]
F-8-155
The urethane sponge used for this part is pink at the beginning, and changes
yellow over time (accelerated if exposed to light; it may appear to change orange before turning pink). This is the common characteristic of urethane
sponge, and does not indicate physical deterioration (performance). In addition, notes that the part is not classified by color.
urethane sponge
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-156
[2]
[1]
F-8-157
Narrower groove
[3]
F-8-158
3) Remove the separation roller from the separation roller [1] shaft support
mount.
(rear of machine)
(front of machine)
F-8-162
8-50
Chapter 8
Left deck pickup assembly
Narrow groove
Wider groove
F-8-163
[2]
A
[3]
B
[4]
F-8-164
8-51
Contents
Contents
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.3 IH Fixing Method (outline).......................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.4 Limiting th Rise in Temperature at the Roller Edges by Use of a Flux blocking Plate (shutter) ................................................ 9-3
Contents
Contents
9.5.21.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5) .......................................................................................................9-37
Chapter 9
9.1 Construction
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0015-4580
Description
Fixing method
IH fixing
Fixing heater
IH heater
Fixing roller
Pressure roller
38 mm outside dia.
Control temperature
Protective mechanism
Executes the following error detection; in response to an error, cuts power to the fixing heater:
- thermistor temperature detention (THM1/THM2/THM3)
- thermal switch (TP1)
operating temperature: 200 +/-5 deg C
Separation claw
Bias application
no
Static eliminator
Cleaning mechanism
Inlet guide
no
9-1
Chapter 9
[7]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[10]
[12]
[11]
[2]
F-9-1
T-9-2
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[7]
F-9-2
T-9-3
[1] Fixing roller
9-2
Chapter 9
[3]
[4]
F-9-3
J2402
J1040
J130
INV_ON
IH DRIVER
PWM_OUT
DCON
F-9-4
MEMO:
The term IH stands for "induction heating."
When high-frequency current is supplied to a coil arranged inside a heater unit, a high-frequency magnetic field develops around the coil. The filed serves to permit
the flow of eddy current (induction current) to the fixing roller, causing the roller to heat on its own.
Characteristics:
The use of the IH method enables the fixing roller to warm up quickly, permitting a reduction in warm-up time (30 sec) as well as of power consumption.
9.1.4 Limiting th Rise in Temperature at the Roller Edges by Use of a Flux blocking Plate (shutter)
0015-4583
9-3
Chapter 9
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[3]
F-9-5
Sequence
Description
At power-on
High humidity environment start- This mode is used when all the following conditions exist:
up mode
- the site is in a high humidity environment.
- the temperature of the fixing roller is 70 deg C or lower.
Recovery mode
Standby mode
To limit power consumption, the target temperature is decreased at specific time intervals after the end of
start-up.
Sleep mode
To limit power consumption, the target temperature is decreased at specific time intervals after the end of
start-up.
In normal use
Copier/printer mode
To limit power consumption, the target temperature is decreased at specific time intervals after the end of
start-up.
Down sequence
None
Special mode
To enhance fixing, the machine changes the start-up sequence and the control temperature.
To ensure fixing on heavy paper, the machine changes the target temperature and copying/printing speed.
Transparency mode
To ensure fixing for bond paper, machine increases the target temperature in a low-temperature
environment while decreasing the copying/printing speed.
In wait
9-4
Chapter 9
POWER ON
(deg c)
STANDBY
250
200
[1]
150
[2]
100
50
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
(sec)
F-9-6
STANDBY
(deg c)
250
200
180
150
[1]
[2]
100
50
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
(sec)
F-9-7
9-5
Chapter 9
POWER ON
STANDBY
(deg c)
250
200
180
150
[1]
[2]
100
50
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
(sec)
F-9-8
POWER ON
STANDBY
250
200
[1]
150
[2]
100
50
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
(sec)
F-9-9
9-6
Chapter 9
STANDBY
(deg c)
215
210
205
200
195
190
185
180
175
0
0
180
360
540
720
900
1080
240
300
360
(sec)
F-9-10
0
0
60
120
180
(sec)
F-9-11
MEMO:
The time that passes from a shift to standby mode is monitored continuously while a copy/print job is under way, and is used for temperature control for copying/
printing. (See the descriptions under "Copying/Printing Mode.")
Standard temperature
-10% (default)
170 deg C
4 sec or less
-25%
160 deg C
6 sec or less
-50%
140 deg C
8 sec or less
9-7
Chapter 9
STANDBY
PRINT START
STANDBY
(deg c)
215
210
[2]
205
200
195
190
[1]
185
180
175
0
0
180
360
540
720
900
1080
(sec)
360
(sec)
F-9-12
PRINT START
STANDBY
(deg c)
215
210
[2]
205
200
195
190
[1]
185
180
175
0
0
60
120
180
240
300
F-9-13
normal mode
start-up sequence
9-8
75 sec or less
Chapter 9
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FSPD-S1 (Category 2)
Use it to select enhanced fixing mode:
0: normal (default)
1: enhanced fixing mode
2: not used
MEMO:
If both enhanced fixing mode and heavy paper mode (or, transparency mode) are selected at the same time, heavy paper mode (transparency mode) will be given
priority.
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>OHP-TEMP (Category 2)
0: normal (default)
1: -5 deg C
2: -10 deg C
3: -15 deg C
4: -20 deg C
9-9
Chapter 9
J106
DCON
-B15
-B16
-B17
-B18
-B19
-B20
GND
5V
FR_M_CLK
FSR_M_BRAKE
FSR_M_ON
FSR_M_LD
M3
J4005-1
-2
24V
GND
DC POWER
F-9-14
[1]
SL1
1
DCON
9
10
11
J251
24V
FUSER_F_SL_UP
FUSER_F_SL_DOWN
F-9-15
9-10
Chapter 9
FUSER_F_SL_DOWN:fixing inlet guide DOWN signal
[1] Fixing inlet guide
[2] Fixing roller
DCON: DC controller PCB
SL1: Fixing inlet guide solenoid
The following shows the position (up/down) of the fixing inlet guide controlled to suit the type/size of paper being in use:
T-9-7
Paper type
Paper length
Plain paper
down
257 mm or more
up
Heavy paper
down
ERROR CODE:
E841 (fixing inlet guide solenoid connection detection error)
0001 At power-on, the connection of the fixing inlet guide solenoid is not detected.
mm
12
(REAR)
SL9
THM1
[1]
THM3
F-9-16
9-11
Chapter 9
(REAR)
[1]
[2]
3m
(FRONT)
M3
F-9-17
[2]
M15
J128B-1
SHUT_M_24V
-2
SHUT_M_24V
-3 to -6
[1]
[3]
SHUT_M_X
DCON
PS53
J251-3
SHUT_HP_5V
J251B-8
SHUT_HP_SNS
J251-4
SHUT_HP_GND
F-9-18
9-12
Chapter 9
ERROR CODE:
E840 (shutter error)
0001 Indicates that the HP sensor signal is not detected when the shutter is operating, after executing 3 retry operations.
0002 The interval of ON-OFF detection by the sensor in response to shutter operation is shorter than a specific time period.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
PS53
F-9-19
[1]
F-9-20
[1]
F-9-21
9-13
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-22
WMUP
M15
HP
PS53
HP
F-9-23
THM2
THM3
1st Print
Nth Print
N+1st
Print
N+2nd
Print
N+9th
Print
N+10th
Print
N+11th
Print
185
186
203
210
209
149
145
146
185
185
201
204
203
197
194
195
PSTBY
(deg C)
HP
[1]
[2]
F-9-24
[1] When printing starts, the readings of the sub thermistor (THM2) and the shutter thermistor (THM3) are both above specific levels (THM2/THM3 >/= 203
deg C); as a result, the machine moves the shutter to small-size paper position (S).
[2] The machine continues printing operation. Consequently, the readings of both thermistor are below specific levels (120 deg C </= THM2 < 150 deg C,
165 deg C </= THM3 < 195 deg C); as a result, the machine moves the shutter to home position.
MEMO:
The foregoing chart has been prepared to illustrate the operation of the shutter, and the
readings of the thermistor do not necessarily fluctuate as shown in the chart.
9.3.2 Cleaning
9.3.2.1 Controlling the Drive of the Cleaning Web
0015-4612
9-14
Chapter 9
(FRONT)
[1]
[2]
[4]
(REAR)
SL9
[3]
F-9-25
Large-size*2
once
2nd sheet
once
3rd sheet
0 times
Thereafter, repeated.
1st sheet
twice
2nd sheet
once
3rd sheet
once
Thereafter, repeated.
*1: A4/A4R/B5/B5R/A5R/LTR/LTRR
*2: A3/B4/LGR/LGL
If paper exits in the fixing assembly because of a jam or error, the machine turns on the web solenoid 5 times at time of recovery (so as to prevent wrapping of the
cleaning web around the fixing roller).
ERROR CODE:
E005 (fixing web solenoid connection detection error)
0001 Indicates that, at time of power-on, the connection of the fixing web solenoid is not detected.
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CBLTINVL
Use it to set the number of times the fixing web solenoid goes on.
Use it if an image fault occurs as a result of soiling on the pressure roller.
0: normal (default)
1: twice as often as normal
9.3.2.2 Controlling the Mechanism Used to Detect the Remaining Length of the Cleaning Web
0015-4614
9-15
Chapter 9
when the fixing web solenoid goes on 4 times after the sensor has gone on.
[1]
[2]
[3]
PS45
DCON
9
8
7
J128B
WEB_SENSOR_FACT_VCC
WEB_SENSOR
GND
F-9-26
SERVICE MODE:
COPIER>OPTION>USER>WEB-DISP
Use it to enable/disable the web length warning message:
0: off (however, the message will be indicated on the service mode screen)
1: on (default)
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB
fixing web counter
If you have replaced the fixing web, be sure to reset the following counter readings to '0':
- COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB
- COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB
ERROR CODE:
E005 (no web)
0000 Indicates that the absence of the fixing web is detected for 5 sec or more.
9-16
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
PS52
PS51
F-9-27
Once open, the contact of the thermal switch will not reset itself even when the temperature drops to normal; be sure to replace the thermal switch after removing
the error.
9.4.3 Errors
0015-4621
9-17
Chapter 9
0010 the power has been turned off and then on without resetting of the error in question.
E004 (fixing heater power supply error (IH power supply))
0101 there is a mismatch between the input voltage and the IH power supply ID.
0102 the fault IH current is faulty (current leakage).
0103 the IH current is faulty (absence of current).
0104 there is overcurrent.
0201 when the power is turned on (or while the IH drive is suspended), the IH control mechanisms is not in an initial state.
0202 at time of IH start-up, the IH control enable flag is not set within 1 sec after the start flag has been set.
0203 when IH is stored, the IH control ongoing flag is not released within 1 sec.
0204 the 12-V power supply (IH relay) is identified as being OFF.
0205 at IH start-up, the PWM ON signal data has an error.
If E000 through E004 is indicated, the error code will not be reset even when you turn off the main power switch, requiring you to use service mode (COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR).
9-18
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
1) While pushing the hook shaft [1] found at the rear of the fixing/feeding
unit in the direction of the arrow (toward the machine front), rotate the
fixing/feeding unit release lever clockwise to lock it in place [2].
[1]
[1]
F-9-29
[2]
F-9-28
2) While pushing the 2 stopper plates [1] of the rail assembly of the fixing/
feeding unit to the inside and slide out the fixing/feeding unit [2].
Follow the steps above when sliding out the fixing/feeding unit.
Follow the steps below when detaching the fixing/feeding unit from the machine.
3) Remove the fixing/feeding unit [2] from the rail.
- 2 screws [1]
9-19
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-31
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-30
F-9-32
9-20
Chapter 9
1) Remove the pressure roller assembly [1]. Place the removed pressure roller assembly temporarily on the paper.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-9-35
2) Rotate the shutter drive gear [1] by finger so that the shutter gear [2] rotates until the cut-off [3] of the shutter gear matches the hole in the plate
[4].
F-9-33
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-9-34
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-9-36
As aged, the rubber surface of the pressure roller may be discolored by heat.
This change, however, will not affect its performance or output images. Further, the physical properties of the roller may develop wrinkles on the roller
surface. The wrinkles will be smoothed under heat and not affect the performance, so that the replacement is not required.
3) Fit the pin removed in the step 1) into the hole [2], then fix with 1 screw
[3] in place.
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-9-37
The pin should be fit back in the initial position after completing the foregoing steps and before mounting the fixing upper unit on the machine.
4) Remove 2 screws [2] that fix the AC connector support plate [1].
9-21
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-41
9) Remove 1 screw [1] and the pin [2]. The screw and pin removed here will
be used in the step 11).
F-9-38
[1]
[2]
F-9-42
10) Rotate the shutter drive gear [1] by finger so that the cut-off [2] of the
shutter gear matches to the hole in the plate [3].
[1]
[2]
F-9-39
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-40
9-22
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-43
11) Fit the pin [1] removed in the step 9) in the hole [2], then fix with 1 screw
[3] in place.
Chapter 9
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F-9-47
[3]
[1]
As aged, the fixing roller surface may be discolored by heat. This, however,
will not affect the performance. The fixing roller surface color is different
depending on the vendors but any rollers meet the specified performance.
[2]
F-9-44
The pin should be fit back in the initial position after completing the foregoing steps and before mounting the fixing upper unit on the machine.
12) Release 2 hooks [1] that fix the bearings at the both end of the fixing roller to remove the fixing roller assembly [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[2]
F-9-48
- When fixing the C-ring [1], be sure to hook the 2 ends of the C-ring [1]
on the protruded parts of the fitting gear and fit the 3 protrusions of the Cring [2] properly into the grooves on the fixing roller.
[1]
[1]
F-9-45
[2]
- When replacing gear/bushing/bearing only (that is, the fixing roller not
to be replaced), wrap paper around the roller before starting the
replacement. This is to prevent any possible damage to the roller surface
in such event that the bearing is fallen on it during the work.
- The removed roller should be placed on paper temporarily during the
work.
F-9-49
- When mounting the fixing roller, cares should be taken not to hit the
thermal switch with the fixing roller.
- After mounting the fixing roller, make sure that the main thermistor [1],
the shutter thermistor [2] and the sub thermistor [3] are parallel and
contact with the fixing roller.
F-9-46
13) Remove 2 C-rings [1], 2 gears [2], 2 bushings [3] and 2 bearings from
the fixing roller assembly.
9-23
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[3]
[A]
[3]
F-9-53
- Be sure to remove the paper around the roller after mounting the fixing
roller to the fixing unit.
- Be sure to fit the 2 pins [1] back to the initial positions. If this is undone
when turning the main power switch on, E840 error will be returned. If
turning on the main power switch with the only one pin fit, this will cause
not only the E840 error but also the shutter distortion.
F-9-50
[3]
[1]
F-9-51
- When fixing the core positioning plate [1] (both front and rear sides)
with screws [2] after mounting the fixing roller, tighten the screws while
pushing the bearing [3] of the fixing roller downward with finger. This is
to eliminate the gap [A] between the bearing and the fixing frame. This
work should be properly done, or the gap in the joint is likely to cause the
fixing fault or paper wrinkles.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-9-54
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-9-52
9-24
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-55
- Applied grease may be transferred from the bushing to the fixing roller
ends [1] when mounting; be sure to wipe it off when this happens.
[3]
[2]
F-9-58
When putting the removed delivery unit aside temporarily, place the unit to
the orientation as shown in the figure below. The separation claw may be
damaged if the claw hit against the floor.
[1]
F-9-56
F-9-59
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Detach the fixing/feeding unit. (page 9-19)Reference[Removing the
Fixing/Feeding unit]
[2]
[1]
F-9-57
9-25
Chapter 9
[8]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[9]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
F-9-61
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-9-60
[2]
[1]
F-9-62
[1]
F-9-63
9-26
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-64
[1]
[3]
F-9-65
[1]
[2]
F-9-68
[1]
F-9-66
[2]
[3]
[1]
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. (page 9-19)Reference[Removing the
Fixing/Feeding unit]
3) Detach the fixing front cover. (page 10-16)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Front Cover]
4) Detach the fixing/feeding unit front cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover]
5) Detach the fixing/feeding unit middle cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Middle Cover]
6) Detach the fixing upper cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Upper Cover]
7) Remove the fixing drive assembly. (page 10-22)Reference[Removing
the Fixing Drive Assembly]
8) Remove the fixing upper unit. (page 9-20)Reference[Removing the Fixing Upper Unit]
9) Remove the fixing web. (page 9-32)Reference[Removing the Fixing
Web]
[2]
[1]
F-9-67
9-27
Chapter 9
6) Remove the 2 leaf springs each [1] to remove the main thermistor [2] and
the shutter thermistor [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-9-74
F-9-69
[1]
[2]
F-9-70
[1]
[2]
F-9-75
- After mounting, make sure the main thermistor [1] and the shutter
thermistor [2] are parallel and contact with the fixing roller. If not, restart
the mounting steps
[2]
[1]
F-9-71
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-72
5) Shift the thermistor mounting shaft [2] to detach it from the bushing.
- 2 screws [1]
- 1 reuse band [3]
[1]
F-9-76
[3]
[2]
F-9-73
9-28
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. (page 9-19)Reference[Removing the
Fixing/Feeding unit]
3) Detach the fixing front cover. (page 10-16)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Front Cover]
4) Detach the fixing/feeding unit front cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Re-
Chapter 9
moving the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover]
5) Detach the fixing/feeding unit middle cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Middle Cover]
6) Detach the fixing upper cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Upper Cover]
7) Remove the fixing drive assembly. (page 10-22)Reference[Removing
the Fixing Drive Assembly]
8) Remove the fixing upper unit. (page 9-20)Reference[Removing the Fixing Upper Unit]
9) Remove the fixing web. (page 9-32)Reference[Removing the Fixing
Web]
[1]
[2]
F-9-81
[3]
[1]
F-9-82
[1]
[2]
- After mounting, make sure that the sub thermistor [1] is parallel and
contacts with the fixing roller. If not, restart the mounting steps.
F-9-77
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-9-78
F-9-83
[1]
F-9-79
[1]
F-9-80
9-29
Chapter 9
Fixing Upper Cover]
7) Remove the fixing drive assembly. (page 10-22)Reference[Removing
the Fixing Drive Assembly]
8) Remove the fixing upper unit. (page 9-20)Reference[Removing the Fixing Upper Unit]
9) Remove the main thermistor/shutter thermistor assembly. (page 927)Reference[Removing the Main Thermistor/Shutter Thermistor]
[1]
[2]
1) Free the harness of the thermal switch from the harness guide.
F-9-86
2) Rotate the shutter gear [2] by rotating the shutter drive gear [1] with finger
until the cut-off of the shutter gear [3] matches to the hole in the plate [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-9-84
2) Remove the thermal switch [2]. (Remove the harness of the thermal
switch [3] by leading it through the opening as shown in the figure below
[A].)
- 1 screw [1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-9-87
3) Fit the pin [1] (the one removed in the step 2)) in the hole [2] and fix it
with the 1 screw [3].
F-9-85
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-9-88
After completing the works in these steps, fit the pin back to the initial position.
0015-5060
9-30
4) Remove the 2 screws [2] that fix the AC connector support plate [1].
Chapter 9
move the AC inlet [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-93
[2]
[1]
F-9-94
The 2 screws shown in the figure (glued in place) should not be loosened or
removed.
[1]
[2]
F-9-90
[1]
F-9-95
11) Remove the fixing heater unit [2] in the direction of the arrow.
- the shutter [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-91
[2]
F-9-96
[1]
[2]
The shutter is thin (0.5mm in thickness) and may be easily deformed. Once
deformed, the fixing roller surface can be damaged by interference. Cares
should be taken during the work not to deform the shutter.
MEMO:
As aged, the shutter surface may be discolored by heat or damaged by friction, however, this will not affect the performance.
F-9-92
9) Remove the 2 screws [1] to free the AC harness from the clamp and re-
9-31
Chapter 9
F-9-99
[1]
0015-5062
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-9-97
2) While pushing the web feed roller [1] and the web take-up roller [2] toward the rear side, detach the fixing web [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-9-100
When winding the web, make sure the fixing web not skewed or free from
slack [A] or wrinkles.
[3]
F-9-98
[A]
F-9-101
Follow the orientation shown in the figure below when winding and mounting the fixing web.
9-32
Chapter 9
Take-up roller
[1]
[2]
Feed roller
F-9-102
2) After fitting the fixing web, move the plunger [1] of the web guide solenoid in the direction of the arrow until the fixing web is free of the slack.
F-9-105
[1]
F-9-103
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. (page 9-19)Reference[Removing the
Fixing/Feeding unit]
3) Detach the fixing front cover. (page 10-16)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Front Cover]
4) Detach the fixing/feeding unit front cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover]
5) Detach the fixing/feeding unit middle cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Middle Cover]
6) Detach the fixing upper cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Upper Cover]
7) Remove the fixing drive assembly. (page 10-22)Reference[Removing
the Fixing Drive Assembly]
8) Remove the fixing upper unit. (page 9-20)Reference[Removing the Fixing Upper Unit]
9) Remove the lower separation claw unit. (page 9-39)Reference[Removing the Lower Separation Claw (Unit)]
10) Remove the internal delivery roller. (page 9-26)Reference[Removing
the Internal Delivery Roller]
0015-5065
1) Remove the protrusion [2] to slide out the sensor support plate [3].
- 1 screw [1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-9-106
2) Remove the claw jam sensor [2] from the sensor support plate.
- 1 connector [1
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-9-104
2) Remove the delivery jam sensor [2] from the sensor support plate.
- 1 connector [1]
F-9-107
9-33
Chapter 9
[3]
[2]
F-9-110
2) Remove the internal delivery sensor [2] from the sensor support plate.
- 1 connector [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-9-108
2) Remove the external delivery jam sensor [2] from the sensor support plate.
- 1 connector [1]
F-9-111
[1]
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. (page 9-19)Reference[Removing the
Fixing/Feeding unit]
[2]
F-9-109
0015-5068
1) Check the positions (front, rear) of the fixing inlet guide base (the relative
positions between the marking line of the fixing inlet guide base and the
indexes of the height adjusting support plate). Then remove the 2 screws
[3] and the 1 connector [4] and remove the fixing inlet guide base [5].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[3]
F-9-112
2) Remove the fixing inlet sensor [1] from the fixing inlet guide plate.
9-34
Chapter 9
F-9-113
When mounting the fixing inlet guide base, be sure to mount it in the correct
position as checked in the step 1).
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. (page 9-19)Reference[Removing the
Fixing/Feeding unit]
3) Detach the fixing front cover. (page 10-16)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Front Cover]
4) Detach the fixing/feeding unit front cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover]
5) Detach the fixing/feeding unit middle cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Middle Cover]
6) Detach the fixing upper cover. (page 10-15)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Upper Cover]
7) Remove the fixing drive assembly. (page 10-22)Reference[Removing
the Fixing Drive Assembly]
8) Remove the fixing upper unit. (page 9-20)Reference[Removing the Fixing Upper Unit]
11.1mm
12.7mm
Fixing roller
1.6mm
[1]
Pressure roller
Inlet guide
Solenoid
F-9-114
[1]
[2]
F-9-116
2) Remove the shutter sensor [1] from the shutter sensor support plate.
[1]
0015-8281
0015-5070
[1]
F-9-117
F-9-115
9-35
Chapter 9
[3]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[2]
F-9-118
F-9-121
0015-5073
11.1mm
12.7mm
[1]
[1]
1.6mm
1) Free the harness from the wire saddle [3] and remove the harness guide.
- 1 connector [1]
- 1 screw [2]
[3]
Pressure roller
Inlet guide
Solenoid
F-9-122
0015-7200
F-9-119
[2]
1) Detach the duplexing feed front cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the Duplexing Feed Front Cover]
2) Detach the fixing/feeding unit. (page 9-19)Reference[Removing the
Fixing/Feeding unit]
3) Remove the external delivery roller. (page 9-25)Reference[Removing
the External Delivery Roller]
4) Remove the sensor support plate (the external delivery sensor/the delivery
jam sensor). (page 9-33)Reference[Removing the Delivery Jam Sensor]
F-9-120
Mark the screw positions before removing the screws in the next step.
9-36
Chapter 9
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-9-125
F-9-123
0015-9979
[2]
8.6mm
F-9-126
F-9-124
[2]
0015-8303
F-9-127
0015-5079
0015-5077
Mark the screw positions before removing the screws in the next step.
1) Remove the fixing web solenoid [3].
- 1 connector [1]
- 2 screws [2]
9-37
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-128
2) Turn the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever [1] counterclockwise to unlock. Hold the lever [1] to slide out the fixing/feeding unit [2] forward.
(Note that the duplexing feed unit will also be slid out.)
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-9-131
F-9-129
F-9-130
4) While lifting the spring [1], remove the upper separation claw [2].
F-9-132
9-38
Chapter 9
Fixing Upper Cover]
7) Remove the fixing drive assembly. (page 10-22)Reference[Removing
the Fixing Drive Assembly]
8) Remove the fixing upper unit. (page 9-20)Reference[Removing the Fixing Upper Unit]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-9-136
[1]
F-9-133
[2]
F-9-134
When removing the lower separation claw unit, follow the steps above.
Follow the steps below when removing the lower separation claw.
3) Remove the 2 springs [1] from the lower separation claw.
[1]
F-9-135
4) Remove the lower separation claw support plate [2] and remove the lower
separation claw [3].
- 3 screws [1]
9-39
Contents
Contents
10.1 Control Panel..............................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 LCD Indication Processing ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.3 Adjusting the LCD Contrast .................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU........................................................................................................................................ 10-1
Contents
Contents
Chapter 10
J1018A,J1018B
J511
Touch panel
J1114
J1112
J1113
J1110,J1111
Color LCD
J1
Control panel
inverter PCB
J6801,J6802
Control panel
Keypad PCB
Control panel
F-10-1
10.2 Counters
10.2.1 Soft Counters
0015-4628
10-1
Chapter 10
T-10-1
Copier/printer operation
Counter name
Simplex mode
Duplex mode
Finisher mode
delivery sensor
The counters may be grouped into 8 types, a total of 16 individual types when further divided according to paper size (large and small); specifically,
T-10-2
Copier/printer mode
Large size
Small size*1
Local copy
PDL print
Box print
Report print
Duplex print
Scan
100V
Counter
Description*1
Default
Change
counter 1
total (A through L)
ON
not possible
counter 2
OFF
possible
counter 3
OFF
possible
counte 4
OFF
possible
counter 5
OFF
possible
counter 6
OFF
possible
T-10-4
Description*1
Default
Change
counter 1
total (A through L)
ON
not possible
counter 2
ON
possible
counter 3
ON
possible
counter 4
ON
possible
counter 5
OFF
possible
counter 6
OFF
possible
T-10-5
10-2
Chapter 10
230V (inside Europe)
Counter
Description*1
Default
Change
counter 1
total (A through L)
ON
not possible
counter 2
ON
possible
counter 3
ON
possible
counter 4
ON
possible
counter 5
OFF
possible
counter 6
OFF
possible
*1: the notation in parentheses indicates the support mode of the basic counter.
*2: the counter type may be changed or counter display may be enabled or disabled in service mode (not applicable to counter 1).
10.3 Fans
10.3.1 Arrangement, Functions, and Error Codes
0015-4629
T-10-7
Notation
Name
Function
FM1
feed fan
yes (24/12 V)
E805-0002
FM2
yes (24/12 V)
E824-0001
FM3
yes (24/12 V)
E805-0001
FM4
cools the laser unit, developing block drive block, and yes (24/12 V)
controller
E121-0001
FM5
curl-removing fan
yes (24/12 V)
FM6
yes (24/12 V)
E804-0000
FM7
yes (24/12 V)
E804-0001
FM8
non (24 V)
FM9
yes (24/12 V)
FM10
yes (24/12 V)
E804-0002
FM11
HVT fan
yes (24/12 V)
FM501
no (24 V)
T-10-8
The following shows the arrangement of the fans and the direction of air current:
10-3
Chapter 10
FM9
FM7
FM501
FM4
FM2
FM5
FM8
FM1
FM6
FM11
FM3
FM10
F-10-2
DC controller PCB
24V
12V
24V or 12V
Full speed
signal
Voltage
switchover
circuit
CPU
Half speed
signal
Lock signal
Fan
F-10-3
WMUP
WMUPR
Standby
Printing
Sleep 1
Jam
Door open
Sleep 3
In reader operation
: full speed
: half speed
F-10-4
10-4
Chapter 10
Description
-limits rush current for the fixing feed unit, duplex unit, and high-voltage PCB
-serves as the power switch for loads other than the drum heater (H3), cassette heater (H4), and deck heater
(H5)
-turns on/off the drum heater (H3), cassette heater (H4), and deck heater (H5)
- turns on/off the cassette heater (H4) and the deck heater
Sleep
Env.switch
Copying/ printing
OFF
Main switch
OFF
ON
Cassette switch
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Latch relay RL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Drum heater
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/
OFF
ON/
OFF
ON/
OFF
ON/
OFF
Cassette heater
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-10-11
Main power switch OFF
Sleep
Env. switch
Copying/ printing
ON
Main switch
OFF
ON
Cassette switch
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Latch relay RL
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Drum heater
ON
ON
ON/
OFF
ON/
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/ OFF
ON/ OFF
ON/ OFF
ON/ OFF
Cassette heater
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2. 120/230-V Model
10-5
Chapter 10
T-10-12
Main power switch OFF
Sleep
Env. switch
Copying/ printing
OFF
OFF
ON
Cassette switch
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Control relay
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Drum heater
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Cassette heater
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-10-13
Main power switch OFF
Sleep
Env. switch
ON
Main switch
OFF
ON
Cassette switch
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Control relay
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Drum heater
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Cassette heater
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
The following shows the default settings of the machine's environment switch (SW3) and cassette heater switch (SW4):
T-10-14
Default setting
100-V model
120-V model
230-V model
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
not
present
OFF
Environment switch
Cassette heater
switch
10-6
Copying/ printing
OFF
ON
Chapter 10
Fixing
heater
driver PCB
Potential
control
PCB
3.3VA
12VU3
24VU3
Clutch
solenoid
24V
24V
A
5V
DC controller PCB
24V
24V
24VU1
24V
5V
HVT PCB
Laser
driver
PCB
Laser
scanner
motor
Drum
motor
(M1)
Separation
clew
AC bias PCB
DC power
supply
PCB
Motor
driver
PCB
24V
13V
5V
24VU2
13V converter
PCB
24V
BD
PCB
Power accumulateing
unit
(only for iR5075
Japanese models)
24V
12V 5V
3.3V
I/F PCB
/ Memory PCB
Finisher
(accessory)
24V
5V
10V
24VU3
24V
Pper Deck
(accessory)
24V
12VU
ADF
Motor
fan
CCD/AP
PCB
3.3VB
3.3VA2
12VU/5V
24V
B
24V
Reader
controller PCB
24VU3
Fax unit
(accessory)
Fixing
feed
unit
24V
24V
Mirror heater(H502)
Duplex
drive PCB
Main
motor
(M2)
Lens heater(H501)
Drum heater(H3)
Fixing
motor
(M3)
Drum
temperature
control PCB
5V
AC
driver
PCB
12V
Manual feeder
door switch(SW6)
Deck heater(H5)
Heater
switch
(SW4)
5.7V
Environment
switch
(SW3)
Cassette heater(H4)
3.3V
Accessories
power
supply PCB
24V
AC line
LF1
ELCB
AC input
Fixing heater
5V
Choke coil
Inverter
PCB
F-10-5
Output
5VA
3VA1
3VA2
3VA3
3VB
24VU1
24VU2
24VU3
24VU4
12VU
Uninterruptive/
interruptive
interruptive
interruptive
uninterruptive
interruptive
interruptive
Rated output
+5.10V
+3.40V
+3.50V
+24.0V
+12.0V
+/-3%
3.25-3.46V
+/-2%
(1.0-2.0A)
+/-5%
+/-5%
10-7
Chapter 10
T-10-16
Output
24VA
Uninterruptive/
interruptive
interruptive
Rated output
24V
Power supply
tolerance
+7-5%
Battery life
Battery replacement
You must always be sure that the battery is replaced correctly. Be sure to replace it with a battery of a type indicated by the manufacturer of the unit (bearing the
same model name or equivalent).
Be sure also to dispose of the removed battery as instructed by the manufacturer of the battery.
10-8
Chapter 10
SDRAM
CPU
Image
processing
block
Control panel
power switch
Fax
reception
detection
Hard disk
drive
Printer unit
Scanner unit
3. AC Off State
The machine is in an AC off state when its main power switch remains off, with all its power supplies and heater control mechanisms also remaining off.
4. Power Supply Arrangement
The following shows how the various loads of the machine are supplied with power while the machine is in individual states:
T-10-18
Operation set
Main power switch
Input
Output
AC off
Sleep 3
Front door
open
Sleep 1
Standby, copying,
power save
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
RMT2*
3VB
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
3VB
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
5V
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
12VU
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
24VU1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
24VU2/3/4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
10-9
Chapter 10
F-10-7
10-10
Chapter 10
F-10-8
10-11
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-11
[2]
[2]
0015-8142
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-10-12
F-10-13
10-12
[2]
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-10-16
[4]
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
F-10-14
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-15
[2]
[1]
F-10-17
10-13
Chapter 10
[5]
[1]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-10-20
[4]
[5]
[6]
[5]
F-10-18
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-21
[6]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[1]
[6]
[4]
F-10-19
F-10-22
2) Turn the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever [1] counterclockwise to unlock. Hold the lever to slide out the fixing/feeding unit [2] fully. (The duplexing feed unit will be also slid out.)
MEMO:
Perform the step above when sliding out the fixing/feeding unit.
When removing the duplexing feed unit, slide out the duplexing feed unit only.
10-14
Chapter 10
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-23
[2]
F-10-26
3) Remove the 2 jam removal levers [1] of the duplexing feed unit and detach
the duplexing feed front cover [3].
- 3 screws [2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-10-27
F-10-24
[3]
[3]
F-10-25
2) Turn the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever [1] counterclockwise to unlock. Hold the lever [1] to slide out the fixing/feeding unit [2] fully. (The
duplexing feed unit will also be slid out.)
[4]
F-10-28
10-15
Chapter 10
[1]
[1]
F-10-29
F-10-32
2) Turn the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever [1] counterclockwise to unlock. Hold the lever [1] to slide out the fixing/feeding unit [2] fully. (The
duplexing feed unit will also be slid out.)
2) Turn the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever [1] counterclockwise to unlock. Hold the lever [1] to slide out the fixing/feeding unit [2] fully. (The
duplexing feed unit will also be slid out.)
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-30
[2]
F-10-33
3) Open the delivery unit [1] and detach the fixing upper cover [3].
- 1 screw [2]
3) While pushing the rear hook shaft [1] of the fixing/feeding unit in the direction of the arrow (to the machines front), turn the fixing/feeding unit
releasing lever [2] clockwise to lock.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-10-31
[2]
F-10-34
4) Remove the knob [2] and the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever [4].
- 2 screws [1,3]
10-16
Chapter 10
[1]
0015-6685
[4]
[3]
F-10-35
[1]
F-10-38
[1]
F-10-36
[2]
[2]
F-10-39
10-17
Chapter 10
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-10-40
[3]
F-10-43
4) Bend up the rubber cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2] each; then detach the 2 angle guide plates [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-41
[3]
F-10-44
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-42
F-10-45
0015-6687
10-18
Chapter 10
[2]
[3]
Before removing the screw, make sure to mark the line in the following step.
2) Loosen the screw [3] to release the belt tensioner [4], and detach the belt
[5].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-46
[3]
[5]
F-10-48
[1]
[2]
[1] [4]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-49
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Detach the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Detach the main controller box cover. (page 10-17)Reference[Removing the Main Controller Box Cover]
5) Removing the Right Cover (Upper Rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing the Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
6) Remove the main controller box. (page 4-13)Reference[Removing the
Main Controller Box]
7) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
8) Remove the collecting toner bottle holder. (page 5-29)Reference[Removing the Collecting Toner Bottle Holder]
10-19
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-10-50
[1]
F-10-52
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-51
F-10-53
[2]
[1]
0015-5097
10-20
F-10-54
5) Loosen the belt tensioner [1] to detach the main motor belt [2].
Chapter 10
Main Controller Box]
7) Detach the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
8) Remove the collecting toner bottle holder. (page 5-29)Reference[Removing the Collecting Toner Bottle Holder]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-10-55
[2]
[1]
F-10-56
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-10-58
- The removal procedure of the right deck pickup assembly and the cassette
3/4 pickup assembly is the same.
- An illustration uses a right door pickup assembly as an example to explain.
- An attempt removing the pickup assembly without removing the deck/
cassette causes the lifter get trapped and may hold the pickup assembly
from sliding out.
3) Slide out the cassette 3 and the cassette 4.
4) Open the manual tray cover and the right cover (lower).
5) Disconnect the connector [3].
- 1 screw [1]
- 1 connector cover [2]
6) Remove the pickup assembly [5].
- 3 screws [4]
[4]
[2]
F-10-57
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
F-10-59
10-21
Chapter 10
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-10-62
T-10-19
F-10-60
Do not disassembly
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-10-63
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-10-61
[2]
[1]
F-10-64
10-22
Chapter 10
- 6 connectors [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-10-67
[2]
[1]
F-10-65
4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the auxiliary power and connect the jumper connector [2].
[1]
[2]
10-12)Reference[Removing the
10-17)Reference[Removing the
10-12)Reference[Removing the
10-17)Reference[Removing the
10-17)Reference[Detaching the
5) Once the main power is turned on, the following message is displayed on
the control panel.
"Time for maintenance work.
The capacitor needs checking. Please call the service personnel.
You can continue to use the machine, however, the operational speed
during printing may be slower than usual"
6) Once pressing "Close" button, a message, "The capacitor needs checking
(Please call the service personnel)", is displayed at the bottom on the control panel.
This is a temporary measure. Be sure to replace with the new one once you
receive the Power Accumulating Unit.
T-10-20
[2]
This step enables direct power supply from the auxiliary power to the
reader/DADF. Therefore, the speed of continuous print after power-on (for
approx. 15 min) becomes shorter.
[1]
F-10-68
[1]
[2]
10-23
Chapter 10
1) Enter the latest values for the service mode indicated on the label [1] on
the back of the front cover with the service mode.
2) Enter the values indicated on the label [1] of the new PCB using the following service mode items:
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> D-PRE-TR
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> D-HV-TR
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-SP> D-HV-SP
COPIER> ADJUST> DEVELOP> D-HV-DE
3) Move the J303 shorting connector [2] on the PCB from the existing to the
new PCB.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-70
3) Shift the control panel [3] together with the cover, and remove the use
band [1] and disconnect the connector [2]. Then, remove the control panel
[3].
[2]
F-10-73
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-10-71
0015-5125
[1]
0015-6585
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-74
[1]
F-10-72
10-24
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-10-75
[1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
F-10-77
[2]
F-10-76
[2]
[1]
F-10-78
0015-6607
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-10-79
10-25
Chapter 10
[2] [3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
F-10-83
[2]
[1]
F-10-80
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-81
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-84
[1]
[2]
F-10-82
10-26
Chapter 10
[3]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
F-10-87
[1]
[2]
0016-1513
F-10-85
[2]
iR5075 / iR5075N
1) Remove the transformer unit [3] by sliding it to the left.
- 2 screws [1]
- 3 connectors [2]
[3]
[1]
F-10-88
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-10-89
[2]
[1]
F-10-86
10-27
Chapter 10
4) Remove the main controller box. (page 4-13)Reference[Removing the
Main Controller Box]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-90
[3]
F-10-92
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
1) Remove the charger unit (this step is necessary only for iR5075 for Japan).
(page 10-22)Reference[Removing the Charger unit]
2) Remove the rear cover (upper). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Upper)]
3) Remove the rear cover (lower). (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the
Rear Cover (Lower)]
4) Remove the main controller box cover.(page 10-17)Reference[Removing the Main Controller Box Cover]
5) Remove the right cover (upper rear).(page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Upper Rear)]
6) Remove the main controller box. (page 4-13)Reference[Removing the
Main Controller Box]
7) Remove the right cover (lower rear). (page 10-12)Reference[Removing
the Right Cover (Lower Rear)]
8) Remove the collecting toner bottle holder. (page 5-29)Reference[Removing the Collecting Toner Bottle Holder]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-10-91
[1]
Enter the values indicated on the label of the HVT PCB using the following
service mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>H-PRE-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>HVT-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>HVT-SP
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>HVT-DE
[1]
[1]
0015-9422
10-28
F-10-93
Chapter 10
1) Detach the front cover. (page 10-13)Reference[Removing the Front
Cover]
2) Detach the toner supply cover. (page 10-14)Reference[Removing the
Toner Supply Cover]
[1]
[2]
F-10-97
F-10-94
0015-8449
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
F-10-95
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-10-98
2) Separate the fan duct [2] and the curl-removing fan [3].
- Screw [1] 2pc.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-10-99
2) Disconnect the connector [1] from behind, and detach the primary charg-
10-29
Chapter 10
Rear Cover (Upper)]
[1]
[3]
0015-5152
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
F-10-102
[1]
[1]
F-10-100
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[3]
F-10-101
F-10-103
10-30
Chapter 10
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-10-106
F-10-104
Be sure that the arrow indicating the direction of air is as indicated when
mounting the duplex feeding fan.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
F-10-107
F-10-105
[1]
F-10-108
10-31
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-109
[2]
F-10-112
0015-5163
[4] [3]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[1]
F-10-113
[2]
[1]
F-10-110
[3]
[2]
[3]
0015-5167
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-111
10-32
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-10-116
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-10-114
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-117
[3]
[1]
F-10-115
0015-5172
[1]
F-10-118
[2]
10-33
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-10-121
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-10-119
[1]
0015-6727
[2]
[2]
F-10-122
[1]
F-10-120
10-34
Chapter 11 MEAP
Contents
Contents
11.1 MEAP.........................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment. .................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS ......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.4 Login to SMS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.1.5 Checking Application List ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application .......................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information ....................................................................................................................................... 11-13
11.1.8 MEAP Specifications............................................................................................................................................................. 11-14
11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS ................................................................................. 11-15
11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application................................................................................................... 11-16
11.1.11 Reference (Application System Information) ...................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.1.12 Installing an Application...................................................................................................................................................... 11-18
11.1.13 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.1.14 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.1.15 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) .................................................................................................................. 11-23
11.1.16 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File.......................................................................................................... 11-25
11.1.17 Reusable license................................................................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.1.18 License for forwarding......................................................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.1.19 Uninstalling an Application ................................................................................................................................................. 11-30
11.1.20 Changing Login Services ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-31
11.1.21 Initializing the Password...................................................................................................................................................... 11-35
11.1.22 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the
Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)........................................................................................................................... 11-36
11.1.23 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive............................................................................................................................................ 11-38
11.1.24 MEAP Safe Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 11-38
11.1.25 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)............................................................................................................. 11-39
11.1.26 Reference material ............................................................................................................................................................... 11-42
11.1.27 Option for exclusive individual measure ............................................................................................................................. 11-43
Chapter 11
11.1 MEAP
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment.
0017-8217
Memo:
Java Script must be enabled in every environment.
Important:
For the following operations in the combined environment of Windows XP and Internet Explorer6, Java2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1 or later
is required.
- User registration / edit in SDL
- User registration / edit in SSO local device
- Use of SSO remote login in SSO
Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services
Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services guarantee operation under the following system environment.
T-11-1
Operating System
Supported browser
Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a
Microsoft Windows ME
Mac OS X 10 - 10.2.4
Remote UI (RUI)
RUI guarantees operation under the following system environment.
T-11-2
Operating System
Supported browser
Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows ME
Microsoft Windows NT Workstartion 4.0
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows XP
SMS
SMS guarantees operation under the following system environment.
11-1
Chapter 11
T-11-3
Operating System
Supported browser
Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows XP
SDL and SSO with Local Devoce Authentication (user registration/edit functions)
For user registration / edit in SDL and SSO(with Local Authentication), following system requirements must be satisfied.
System environment for administrator
T-11-4
Operating System
Supported browser
Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows XP
Supported browser
Microsoft Windows 98 SE
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation4.0
Microsoft Windows ME
T-11-6
Hardware
11-2
Memory
256MB or more
Hard disk
CPU
Chapter 11
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP4
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4
Software
OS
* Construction of SSO domain environment by using Active Directory of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 needs SA of version 2.0.1 or newer, SSO Login application of version 3.0.0 or newer.
Combination list of the versions of SSO Login application of MEAP device and SA
T-11-7
Product Nameof MEAP Device
US
EU
Version Version of SA
of SSO
V1.1.0 V1.2.0
Login
Applicati
on
AO
V1.3.0
V1.3.1
V2.0.0
V2.0.1
V3.0.1
iR5020i/ iR6020i
V1.1.0
iR2220i/ iR2220N/
iR3320i/ iR3320N
iR2220i/ iR2220N/
iR3320i/ iR3320N
iR2220i/ iR3320i
V1.1.0
iR C3220/ iR C2620
iR C3220/ iR C2620
iR C3220/ iR C2620
V1.1.1
V1.1.2
V2.2.7
V1.1.3
V2.2.7
iR 5570/ iR 6570
iR 5570 / 6570
iR 5570 / 6570
V2.0.0,
V2.2.9
iR C3170U/ iR C3170i
iR 3170C/ iR 3170Ci/ iR
C2570/ iR C2570i
iR C3170/ iR C3170i/ iR
C2570/ iR C2570i
V2.2.6
iR C5870U/ iR C6870U
iR 5870C/ iR 5870Ci/ iR
6870C/ iR 6870Ci
iR C5870/ iR C5870i/ iR
C6870/ iR C6870i
V2.4.0
iR C5180i/ iR C4580i/ iR
C4080i
imagePRESS C1
imagePRESS C1
imagePRESS C1
V3.1.0
iR C2880/ iR C3380
iR C2880 / C3380
iR C2880 / C3380
V3.2.0
V3.4.1
V3.9.0
iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 V3.5.0
iR C5185
iR C5185
iR C5185
V3.6.0
imagePRESS C7000VP
imagePRESS C7000VP
imagePRESS C7000VP
V3.8.0
iR 5050
11-3
Chapter 11
-In the case that Active Directory has been constructed in Windows Server 2003 SP1/Server 2003 R2 and Windows Firewall is set enabled, TCP port '5678' used
by Security Agent needs to be added in Windows Firewall.
Browser
The following combinations of operations are guaranteed for the access from Web browser to MEAP device.
T-11-8
OS
Supported Browser
Microsoft Windows ME
F-11-1
2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Use HTTP button> On button > OK button .
11-4
Chapter 11
F-11-2
Memo:
When using SSL, set [Use SSL] ON.
(This setting is also applied to the SSL setting of RUI. Same is true in the case of setting SSL ON on the side of RUI.)
Setting [Use SSL] ON displays the message dialogue 'Changes effective after the main power switch is turned OFF and ON' . Press [OK].
F-11-3
3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears.
4) Turn off the device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on.
- The setting [Use HTTP] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have turned off and then on the device's main power switch.
- You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use, enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the
browser. Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button
of Proxy server group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As network settings vary among environments, consult the
network administrator.
- If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to use SMS.
- To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP device's touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize
some characters.
- When [se SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL
with [Certificate Settings] that exists in [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] on the iR device.
11-5
Chapter 11
The table below shows the setting methods for each combination of login method and Start/Stop.
T-11-9
Start RLS Authentication
Setting unavailable
When only RLS Authentication is enabled, there may be a case you cannot login to device for the following reasons.
- Authentication server down
- Disconnection with authentication server due to network failure
In these cases, boot the device as MEAP SAFE mode from device service mode.
By booting the device as MEAP SAFE mode, login to SMS becomes available as Default Authentication is enabled. After login to SMS, set RLS Authentication
as Started, return the device to normal mode, and then login by RLS Authentication.
F-11-4
2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.
F-11-5
3) In order to enable login by Password Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the other hand,
in order to disable login by Password Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and click [Stop].
11-6
Chapter 11
F-11-6
4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen
before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and login becomes unavailable.
Login error screen
F-11-7
F-11-8
2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.
11-7
Chapter 11
F-11-9
3) In order to enable Login by RLS Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the
other hand, in order to disable login by RLS Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and click
[Stop].
F-11-10
4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen
before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and Login becomes unavailable.
Login error screen
11-8
Chapter 11
F-11-11
F-11-12
2) The following screen appears if the password has been changed by the user's system administrator. If so, check with the system administrator for the new password. Keep in mind that there is no special password offered for service work.
11-9
Chapter 11
F-11-13
Memo:
- In case the device authentication method is SSO and login to domain, enter User Name, Password, and Login Destination registered in Active Directory, and
click 'Log in'.
- In case the device authentication method is SDL or SSO and login to 'this device', enter User Name and Password registered in the device and click 'Log in'.
F-11-14
11-10
Chapter 11
F-11-15
11-11
Chapter 11
F-11-16
F-11-17
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either "Started" or "Stopped."
11-12
Chapter 11
F-11-18
Some applications may not be installed to some MEAP devices of specific specifications. (See 'MEAP Specifications').
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click System Management tab.
F-11-19
11-13
Chapter 11
F-11-20
About Name
MEAP Specification is shown as 'MEAP Specifications' in the screen to check the version on the side of device that supports MEAP (counter confirmation button)
and MEAP platform (SMS). On the other hand, in the manifest file of MEAP application, it is shown as 'MeapSpecVersion' (described in the same way in the SDK
document)
(Note) 'MEAP Specifications' hereafter in this document.
Mechanism
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2 information below:
- Device Specification ID
- MEAP Specifications
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum
copy number, thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID
required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models declared. Upon installation of
MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine.
The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects installation of such an application.
Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does
not always have the same version.
MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application
is operable in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the application rejects installation of such an
application.
11-14
Product Name
USA
EUR
OCE
SPL
KOR
iR 6020
iR 5020
iR 3320
iR 2220
iR C3220
1, 2, 3
iR C2620
1, 2, 3
iR 4570
iR 2870
iR 2270
iR 3570
iR85+
iR 8070
Chapter 11
Product Name
USA
EUR
OCE
SPL
KOR
iR 105+
iR 9070
iR 6570
5, 6
iR 5570
5, 6
iR C3170
5, 6, 7
iR C2570
5, 6, 7
iR 7105
5, 6, 7
iR 7095
5, 6, 7
iR 7086
5, 6, 7
iR 7095P
5, 6, 7
iR C6870
5, 6, 7
iR C5870
5, 6, 7
iR C5180
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11
CLC5151
iR C4580
CLC4040
iR C4080
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11
iR C5185
imagePRESS C1
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11
iR C3380
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR C2880
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR 3025
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR 3045
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR 3035
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR 3030
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR 5050
5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,
17,18
iR 5055
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR 5065
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
iR 5075
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
imagePRESS C7000VP
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13
* Due to the change in I/F specifications, these models support '5' only.
T-11-11
Description
[Reserved]
MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL
[Reserved]
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF(Text Searchable) + USB-Host(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer)
[Reserved]
10
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host(Exception + ClearFeature + SetFeature + HotPlug) + WINS address acquisition using
MIBAgent + TimerService + SSL client authentication
11
13
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth PDF + CTK2.0
14
15
17
18
11-15
Chapter 11
3) On System Management screen, click System Info tab.
4) Click Details button.
F-11-21
5) When the following status information of MEAP applications (including the system application) appears in a different window, copy and paste all information
to create an attachment (text information) for preparing a problem report. You can also use this function whenever you want to check the status of any particular
application.
F-11-22
11-16
Chapter 11
F-11-23
2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Print System Information button >Yes button.
F-11-24
3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears.
4) Turn off the MEAP device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on.
Important:
The previous version of printing function for MEAP application status information (system information) was depended on PDL. However, current version of
function is not dependent on PDL. So even device for which PDL is not available can print it. (Since iRC3220)
T-11-12
11-17
Chapter 11
Application Name
It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application ID/System Application Name
In the case of a system application, it will be the file name. If a general application, it is the application ID (application-ID) declared in a statement within the application program. Within the device, the applications are set apart by means of their application IDs.
Application Version
It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement within the application program.
Status
It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically,
Installed: the application has been installed.
Active: the application is being in use.
Resolved: the application is at rest.
Installed On
It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor
It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name (bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program.
License Status
It indicates the status of the license; specifically,
None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed.
Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
License Expires After
It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
License Upper Limit
It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Counter Value
It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Maximum Memory Usage
It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the application
program, and is expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service
It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the MEAP framework. Some services may not have printable data.
Memory
Thread
Socket
iR5020/iR6020/iR2220/iR3320
300MB
20MB
128
48
42
iRC2620/iRC3220
400MB
20MB
128
48
42
iR2270/iR2870/iR3570/iR4570/iR85/iR8070/iR6570/iR5570
400MB
20MB
128
48
42
iRC3170/iRC2570
400MB
20MB
128
48
42
iR7086/iR7095/iR7105
iRC4080/iRC4580/iRC5180
imagePRESS C1
11-18
File
Description
HDD
400MB
20MB
128
48
42
1024MB
20MB
128
48
42
1024MB
30MB
128
128
128
1024MB
20MB
128
48
42
iRC2880/iRC3380
1024MB
20MB
128
48
42
iR3025/iR3030/iR3035/iR3045
400MB
20/30MB*
128
48
42
iR5050
1024MB
30MB
128
128
128
iR5055/iR5065/iR5075
1024MB
20MB
128
48
42
iRC5185
1024MB
30MB
128
128
42
imagePRESS C7000VP
1024MB
20MB
128
48
42
Chapter 11
*20MB for 512MB model, 30MB for 768MB model.
- As for memory, check the available resource when starting up the application. For other resources other than memory, check them when installing.
- Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the User's Guide that comes with the individual applications.
1) Long on to SMS.
2) Click Install tab.
F-11-25
F-11-26
11-19
Chapter 11
F-11-27
Important:
- You cannot install only the license.
- You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license. Be sure to select its license file.
- If you are adding a license to an existing application, see 1.3.10 Adding a License File.
- If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application
while it is running.
F-11-28
7) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and click OK.
8) Check the message "Installing...Please wait a moment." appears, beginning the installation.
9) Check Application List page appears when the installation is completed.
Important:
To use the application that you have just installed, you must make sure that the application status is Started.
11-20
Chapter 11
Major functions
Discovery of devices available for MEAP
Discovery of devices available for MEAP on network
Storage of the serial number list of discovered device
Installation of application and license file
Management of application (starting / stopping)
Uninstallation of application
Others
System configuration
MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) functions in combination with DIS (DSL Installer Service) installed on the MEAP platform side of the device.
This system can be used only for MEAP-available device with appropriate DIS installed.
(*) When using this system on the firmware for version upgrading on October 2003 or older, version upgrading of the system software on the field device is necessary.
The versions available for ESM are as follows:
iR5160 / iR6020: System v54.02 or newer, MEAP Contents v53.07 or newer
iR2220 / iR3320: System v33.01 or newer, MEAP Contents v33.02 or newer
Other products: Available from the initial version
When installing MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) of master CD on PC, Microsoft '.NET Framework' v1.0 or v1.1 is necessary. The user should
download it from the Web site of Microsoft.
F-11-29
3) Check appears.
4) On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.
11-21
Chapter 11
F-11-30
5) Click Browse button, and select the license file you want to install.
F-11-31
11-22
Chapter 11
F-11-32
F-11-33
11-23
Chapter 11
F-11-34
3) License File Management page appears. On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.
F-11-35
11-24
Chapter 11
F-11-36
5) Click OK.
1) Login to SMS.
2) Application List page appears.
3) On Application List page, click the name of the application you want.
F-11-37
11-25
Chapter 11
F-11-38
F-11-39
7) When you have selected Download button, specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen.
8) To delete, click Delete button.
11-26
Chapter 11
F-11-40
Memo:
For devices for System version of 33.01, 54.02 (iR 2220 series / iR5020 series) or older, version upgrading is required. It is already installed in the model with
iR C3220 or newer.
11-27
Chapter 11
F-11-41
2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (http:// IP address of device: 8000/sms/ForwardLicense).
F-11-42
F-11-43
11-28
Chapter 11
F-11-44
F-11-45
6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click 'Download'.
F-11-46
11-29
Chapter 11
F-11-47
F-11-48
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click 'Delete' to display the confirmation screen and click 'OK' to delete the file (in consideration of breakage
of license for forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
F-11-49
Memo:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the
name of product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
11-30
Chapter 11
F-11-50
4) Check the screen to make sure that what is shown is the application you want to uninstall; then, click OK button.
In response, the system runs an uninstall sessions.
Important:
- The status of the license must be 'Not Installed' or 'Unnecessary' for its application to be uninstalled. As necessary, go to License File Management page, and
disable the license file before starting to remove it.
- A license file may be invalidated only when its application is not active.
- If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will
no loner be available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.
Important:
- To set SDL, the registered information in SDL and the registered user data (Department ID and Password) in Department ID Management of the machine have
to match.
- To set up SDL or SSO, Department ID Management must be set to Off in advance. To use SDL and Department ID Management simultaneously, set
Department ID Management to On after switching the login service to SDL.
- If SSO is set as the login service, NetSpot Accountant is necessary for using Department ID Management.
- If SSO is set, you cannot use an optional card reader.
- To set to SSO, first adjust the current time for the PC where Active Directory is running, the iR, and the PC where users log on. If there is more than a 30minute difference among them, an error occurs at logon.
- If SSO or SDL is set as login service, it takes time until the iR is ready to start up.
- When the SEND function is used in the environment of SDL and SSO, it is necessary to set each user's mail address to transmit E-mail. When the mail address
is not set, E-mail cannot be transmitted. However, when i-Fax is transmitted, the mail address set to the device is used.
11-31
Chapter 11
In this mode of authentication, you will be using Department ID Management or you will not be using any authentication mechanism. If you enable the Department
ID Management in the MEAP device's Additional Functions mode, the user can use the device only when he/she enters an ID number (a 7-character ID and password) that has been registered from the device's touch panel display or through Remote UI.
Outline of SDL (Simple Device Login)
In this mode of authentication, you will be operating on a MEAP device on its own. You will store user information to the MEAP device's memory by accessing
the device through a Web browser. SDL offers the following functions:
a. it brings up the Login screen on the MEAP device's touch panel display for user authentication.
b. it brings up the Login page when you access the MEAP device from Web browser to manage the numbers of printed and scanned sheets for each department ID
working with the department ID management function. it operates in conjunction with the group ID control mechanisms to keep track of the number of print
pages or scan pages according to group IDs.
c. it enables register/editing of user authentication information through a Web browser.
F-11-51
- The three user authentication systems can be changed at Web browser (See 'Setting the User Authentication System' on MEAP Administrator Guide).
- The default setting is 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'. To increase security, set 'Domain Authentication' as user authentication system
or change the user name and password of the administrator of Local Device Authentication from the default ones, just after starting to use SSO.
Domain Anthentication
This is the authentication of the domains on network simultaneously with log-in to iR device, in combination with the domain controller on Active Directory environment network. It authenticates up to four domain users (multi domain) with trusts as well as the domain with iR device installed. Users select the domain name
of log-in destination when they log in.
Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager enables analysis / management of the usage of iR device.
11-32
Chapter 11
Domain A
NetSpot
Security Agent
Accountant
Domain A User
Domain B
Domain
Controller
(Active Directory)
iR
Domain
Controller
(Active Directory)
Domain B User
F-11-52
- Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager is necessary to use Domain Authentication and department ID management
simultaneously. When Domain Authentication is set without combination with NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager, log-in is impossible.
Therefore, department ID management should not be 'ON'. If department ID management is set to 'ON' while using Domain Authentication and log-in becomes
impossible, change the log-in service to Default Authentication and turn department ID management to [OFF].
- For combination with NSA / iWAM, it is necessary to set the user with administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account.
- When the print count and scan count for each department ID needs to be managed in conjunction with Local Device Authentication and department ID
management, turn department ID management to [ON]. To use simultaneously Local Device Authentication and department ID management, the information
registered with Local Device Authentication should be matched with the user information of department ID management (department ID and password).
- The user information registered by SDL and the one by Local Device Authentication are managed separately in the iR device. The user information registered
in one system is not reflected to the other.
- The card reader for optional control card cannot be used for Local Device Authentication. When using the card reader for control card, set SDL.
- Security Agent is necessary only for Domain Authentication.
- Security Agent should be installed on the computer in the domain with iR device installed.
- Installation of Security Agent is included in MEAP Administrator CD-ROM.
Operating Environment
The operation is guaranteed for SDL or SSO if the system environment is in keeping with the following requirements:
SDL (registering/editing user information)
a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-14
Operating System
Supported browser
Windows 98 SE
Windows XP
Important:
- If you use Internet Explorer 6 on Windows XP, you will need Java 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1.
SSO
To use SSO, you must have a Widows server to which Active Directory has been installed as well as Security Agent.
1) PC for hosting Security Agent
a. Supported OS
T-11-15
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
11-33
Chapter 11
When using SA on WindowXP SP2, it is necessary to exclude Security Agent from the targets of firewall at the setting of the firewall.
b. Others
Access right to Windows 2000 domain Name System (DNS)Access right to domain controller
For combination with NetSpot Accountant / iW Accounting Manager, and department ID management is turned on to use it, it is necessary to set the user with
administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account.
2) Client PC (if access from Web browser to MEAP device is desired)
a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-16
Operating System
Supported Browsers
Windows 98 SE
Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a
Windows ME
Windows XP Professional
b. Others
Access right to Windows 2000 Domain Name System (DNS)
Access right to Domain Controller Client
Steps to Change Login Services
1) Make the following selections: System Management > Enhanced Sys. App.
F-11-53
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Select the radio button of the login service mode you want to use; then,
click Select button.
11-34
Chapter 11
F-11-54
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, turn off the device's main power, and turn it back on after 10 seconds.
F-11-55
11-35
Chapter 11
F-11-56
3) When you click Initialize button, the confirmation message appears. Click OK button. Then Login page opens. Enter the default password 'MeapSmsLogin' to
log in. The password is case-sensitive.
If you click Cancel button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
11.1.22 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with
the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)
0017-8238
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP
counter readings and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation.
Memo:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the same license.
The following list shows the details of area that SST backs up;
Jar files of MEAP applications
Settings set with MEAP applications.
Note that SST does not back up images in Mailboxes that MEAP applications use.
User information data registered with SDL
Requirements for Backup Using the SST
The following conditions must be met for use of the function:
1) Device Firmware Version
T-11-17
Boot ROM
System
SST
iR2220 Series
iR2250 Series
24.42 later
33.01 later
iR5020 Series
iR5160 Series
24.42 later
54.02 later
Devices ither than those listed the above. Already supported since the 1st version. Already supported since the 1st version. The version supporting the
corresponding devices.
2) SST Version
Version 1.81 or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed, upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup
To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 300 MB of free space at maximum.
11-36
Chapter 11
Making a Backup and Formatting Hard Disk Drive with Service Support Tool
1) If SDL or SSO is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing up the user information. Although SST will back up SDL user information, it is recommended to export the user information just in case. For SDL user information backup, go to User Management page of Simple Device Login
site and export the data. (The SDL login page opens with the URL "http://<device IP address>:8000/sdl/").
If a hard disk of a system that uses SDL or SSO is formatted without changing the login service to the default authentication, the error message "The login service
must be set again with SMS" appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to restart the system after formatting. If this problem occurs, change the
login service to SDL or SSO with SMS. If you cannot access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system with FIXIP mode hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on. The IP address "172.16.1.100" will be automatically assigned for the device. Then log in to
SMS specifying the address.
2) While holding down the 2 and 8 buttons, start up the device in download mode.
As in the case of Sramimg.bin, the function is available only when the device is in Download Mode.
3) Connect the PC to the device and start the Service Support Tool.
4) In Download/Upload session of SST, select the appropriate device model, System in the tree view, and take necessary steps to connect to the device.
5) Click Upload the Backup Data button.
6) Click the option "Meapback.bin" from Name list of Backup Data Available for Selection, and click Start Storing button.
Selecting Meapback.bin
F-11-57
7) When the data has been generated, enter an appropriate name in File name field and click Save button; then, click OK button to end the backup session.
8) In Selecting Model/Unit screen, select HDFormat and start formatting. All the partitions in the hard disk drive will be formatted.
Restoring the Backup Data
1) After formatting the hard disk drive with SST, install the System, MEAP Contents, Language, and Remote UI files.
2) To restore the backup "Meapback.bin," click Download the Backup Data button.
3) Select the backup data file and click Start Writing button to download the backup data. Note that SST cannot restore backup data created with a different version.
Selecting Backup Data
F-11-58
11-37
Chapter 11
4) When the screen with OK button appears, the restoration of backup data finishes. Click OK button.
5) Reboot the main power and access the device with SMS and check that the MEAP applications are restored.
6) Restore non-MEAP backup data and settings that are saved before formatting the hard disk drive. The SDL user information is included in the backup data. You
do not have to restore it.
11-38
Chapter 11
F-11-59
7) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click OK button.
F-11-60
8) Check that the notation 'MPSF' has appeared in the lower right corner of the screen; then, turn off and then on the main power.
F-11-61
If you want to end safe mode, repeat the steps but change '1' to '0' in step -7 and turn off and then on the main power.
11-39
Chapter 11
-Make sure not to use 1 through 1023 other than 80 (HTTP) as a port for MEAP. Because the ports in this range are used by general servers, there is a possibility
that the ports in this range will be duplicated in the future.
F-11-62
8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-11-63
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
F-11-64
11-40
Chapter 11
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on
control panel, the screen is displayed.
3) Press [COPIER] button.
4) Press [Option] button.
5) Press [BODY] button.
6) Press [<-] button.
7) Press [MEAP-SSL] button.
F-11-65
8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-11-66
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
F-11-67
11-41
Chapter 11
11-42
Applet
Applet Type Application. A Type of MEAP application that is designed to display user interface on device control panel.
Application
Application ID
A unique identifier assigned to each application. Used for indicating memory usage of the application in the MEAP system.
ASP
AVS
Applet Viewer Service. One of the MEAP system services that shows the user interface of the current applet type service on the
console.
Code Sign
To attach Digital Signature to software code. MEAP has the mechanism to reject MEAP application without Code Sign for
security reason.
CPCA
Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device
by creating or modifying objects in the device.
CPCA Java CL
CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a device.
The login service used when the department ID control is used but other authentication controls are not used. When the Department
ID control is turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID and password. The dialog appears the initial
screen of both the control panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
Device Specification ID
ID assigned for each device model. It shows the usage of functions that are equipped by MFP, as well as CPCA API specification
and version numbers that is necessary for acquiring the values such as maximum number of copies, etc.
DIS
Dynamic Service Loading Installer Service. Receives data from the DSL on the MEAP platform. Enables an application to install
to two or more devices.
DSL
Dynamic Service Loading. While the SMS installs a license file and application to one device, the DSL can install them to two or
more devices. It consists of MEAP ESM and the DIS.
Esplet
Esplet Type Application. A type of MEAP application that does not have a user interface on the device console or on the web
browser. The term of "Esplet" is a coinage by Canon inspired from Applet, Servlet, and "Espresso".
File descriptor
With a file descriptor, an OS identifies the files that a program accesses. The file descriptor includes information such as file name
and size as well as the identifier. An OS determines files to operate with the identifier.
iR Native Application
The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy, Universal Send and Mailbox.
ISV
Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or sells applications and tools but does not entire
computer systems. Refers application developer in this document.
J2ME
Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices
such as cellular phones and PDA.
Java
A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A. Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on
various platforms. Taking advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses Java. The MEAP platform
uses J2ME - a type of Java.
Java Script
A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A., runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and
Internet Explorer.
Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as animated buttons and display of timetables.
Java VM
JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code
using the native instruction set.
A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires entries of application ID, expiration date/times
information, and the number of access numbers, to issue license access numbers.
License File
A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a
user concludes with the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application.
Login Service
Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user names and passwords. Three login services are
available for MEAP device - Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple Device Login) and SSO
(Single Sign-On).
MEAP
Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment for executing application programs on a peripheral
device. Uses the Java platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for MEAP.
MEAP AMS
MEAP Application Management System. The license issuing server that issues "License File" necessary for MEAP applications
to be installed onto MEAP device. Also used for issuing the "License Access Number".
MEAP Application
Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files (*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
MEAP Contents
MEAP ESM
MEAP Enterprise Service Manager. One of software programs composing the DSL, to be installed on a PC in a Windows
environment. Works as the interface with the DSL.
MEAP Specifications
MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than
CPCA, such as network and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
MEAP device
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
OSGi
Portal Service
Proxy Server
Chapter 11
LicenseFile-Version: 1
LicenseFile-Id: f6489a8c-8c7e-4d74-bd12-b031ea6a62a5
Application-Id: e92b0b91-7c42-45b1-96b3-295d5d1b5877
Serial-No: XYZ00123
Validated-Period: 100
MaximumBWScan1: 1000, stop
MaximumBWScan2: 900, stop
MaximumBWScan3: 800, stop
MaximumBWScan4: 700, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions: 1000, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW: 800, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Large: 200, stop
MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Small: 600, stop
MaximumScannedImpressions: 2000, stop
MaximumScannedImpressions-BW: 1200, stop
License File ID
Application ID
Serial No
Validated Period
Counter information
IxQvZ/A8O0aDsUBdMeu5XrxqIsqLzq7JAjHAD/ZMnNxVMsR7RGcuI2c6RRdU7mlW
ht2VF8LA3SH6n4kxvZYmEQZ8pBhu67wliysAJ0gHS0l6WsMqX6WI5ZAQeD8TZnnf
344VXYG4
F-11-68
Setting Procedure
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Press [COPIER] button.
3) Press [Option] button.
4) Press [BODY] button.
5) Press [<-]or[->] (arrow) button.
6) Press [UI-COPY] button.
7) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
8) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
Memo:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
- As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
- As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
Default value
1: No activation of warning display
11-43
Chapter 11
Setting Procedure
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on
control panel, the screen is displayed.
3) Press [COPIER] button.
4) Press [Option] button.
5) Press [BODY] button.
6) Press [<-]or[->] button.
7) Press [ANIM-SW] button.
8) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
Setting Procedure
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then,
by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on
control panel, the screen is displayed.
3) Press [COPIER] button.
4) Press [Option] button.
5) Press [BODY] button.
6) Press [<-] (arrow) button.
7) Press [ANIM-DSP] button.
8) Press either 0 (transit to Native screen) or 1 (no-transition to Native screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press
[OK] button.
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
11-44
Contents
Contents
12.1 e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote ........................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Application operation mode..................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Service Center URL and Port Specification ............................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.3 Communication test ................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.4 Communication log.................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.5 Detailed Communication log ................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.6 SOAP communication function ............................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.7 Resend at SOAP transmission error......................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.8 e-RDS setting screen................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.1.9 Sleep operation......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.1.10 Network Setting (Maintenance) ............................................................................................................................................. 12-5
12.1.11 e-RDS Setting (Maintenance) ................................................................................................................................................ 12-5
12.1.12 Trouble shoot ......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.1.13 Error message......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
Chapter 12
12-1
Chapter 12
List of Transmissions:
Content of transmission
Transmission timing
Communication test
Every 6 hours
Every 6 hours
Every 6 hours
Every 6 hours
Every 6 hours
Application log
Jam
Alarm
Error
Every 6 hours
12-2
Chapter 12
Menu Screen
F-12-1
Setting screen of e-RDS. The form and the initial value of each setting item are as follows.
Item(meaning)
Explanation
E-RDS
(Embedded-RDS)
RGW-ADR
(RDS-Gateway ADDRESS)
URL of the host (When the input area is selected (touched), shift to the keyboard screen)
Initial value: URL of an actual host.
Length: 129 characters (NULL is contained)
RGW-PORT
(RDS-Gateway PORT)
COM-TEST
(Communication Test)
COM-LOG
(Communication Log)
12-3
Chapter 12
Log list screen
F-12-2
History list of communication test error (error generation date, error code and error information) is displayed.
When the each line is selected (touched), it shifts to "Log detailed screen".
It shifts to "Menu screen" by the [Function] > [INSTALL].
The list screen changes by a right arrow or a left arrow.
Maximum log number: 30
Notes: Only the first part of error information is displayed.
12-4
Chapter 12
Log detailed screen
F-12-3
12-5
Chapter 12
- Press [Additional Functions (*)] key.
- Press 2 and 8 of the numeric keys at the same time.
- Press [Additional Functions (*)] key. => SERVICE MODE LEVEL1
A-2. Initialize e-RDS
- Select (touch) [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] on the Touch Panel Display.
A-3. Display Menu screen of e-RDS
- Select (touch) [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] => Menu screen
F-12-4
B. Set 1 in [E-RDS].
C. Input the URL of UGW in [RGW-ADR]. (Select the input area to shift to the keyboard screen, and Input URL.)
D. Input the port number of UGW in [RGW-PORT].
E. Select [COM-TEST] and push [OK] button to start the communication test with UGW.
F. While the result is "NG!", repeat to correct the setting and try [COM-TEST] until the result becomes "OK!". You need checking the setting of the network of the
device and the connection of the network if necessary.
Notes: In the environment with the proxy server, you should set the proxy server. Refer to the proxy setting in the network guide of the device for details.
12-6
Chapter 12
Moreover, when it fails in the event waiting in the device and either of a Jam notification, an Alarm notification, and a Service call notification or an Alert notification is specified, following string is displayed.
"Event Registration is Failed."
In other cases error information is displayed in the form of the following.
"[*] [Error string]: [Method name] [Server side detailed error]"
The enclosed character string by [] is replaced as follows.
[*]:
*(asterisk) is added to the head of the string only at the communication test.
[Error string]:
As for number 1 and 2 of the following Error string lists, only the Error string is displayed. Besides, it is displayed as "[*] [Error string]: [Method name]
[Server side detailed error]". ([Server side detailed error] might not go out.)
Error string
Cause
SUSPEND: Communication
test is not performed
The e-RDS is started (the device is rebooted) when e-RDS is ON Complete the communication test.
and communication test isn't done.
URL Scheme error (not https) The header of registered URL of UGW is not https.
URL server specified is illegal Illegal URL (other than UGW) is specified.
Correct URL.
10
Unknown error
11
Server response error (NULL) UGW returns the error but communication to UGW is succeeded. After waiting for a while, try again.
If (NULL) is displayed after the message, the error occurs in the
HTTPS communication.
12
UGW returns the error but communication to UGW is succeeded. After waiting for a while, try again.
(Hexadecimal) displayed after the message is error code that
UGW returns.
[server side detailed error] is added at the end of error
information only at this error.
13
Device internal error such as the memory cannot be taken occurs. Turn OFF/ON of the device main switch. Or, replace the
system software of the device (upgrade).
14
The schedule setting value given by UGW is found faulty at the Report the detailed information of error occurrence to the
time of communication test.
support department.
After the remedy by UGW, retry the communication test.
15
16
Counter Measure
12-7
Chapter 12
Error string
Cause
17
You execute the communication test while the E-RDS switch is Turn ON E-RDS switch, and execute the communication
OFF.
test.
Counter Measure
18
19
20
URL error
Correct URL.
T-12-1
[Method name]:
Method name
Meaning
postServiceModeCount
postModeCount
postPartsCount
postFirmwareInfo
getOperationList
postOperationOutcome
postConfiguration
postGlobalClickCount
postJamLog
10
postServiceCallLog
11
postAlert
12
postDebugLog
13
getConfiguration
14
communicationTest
12-8
Contents
Contents
13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .......................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
Chapter 13
The intervals indicated may vary depending on the site environment and user habit.
Q'ty
Life
Part name
FB4-3687-000
Part No.
AR
500,000
FY1-0883-000
AR
500,000
thermistor unit
FK2-5252-000
500,000
Sub thermistor
FM2-4161-000
500,000
FL2-4271-000
500,000
FL2-4272-000
500,000
FL2-4271-000
500,000
FL2-4272-000
500,000
FF5-3090-000
500,000
10
FF5-3090-000
500,000
11
Air filter 1
FC6-3482-000
500,000
12
Air filter 2
FC6-3483-000
500,000
13
Ozone filter
FC6-3693-000
500,000
Remarks
(*)
*: Do not use the old type (gold plated). After replacement of the charge wire, be sure to execute wire cleaning in service mode. (COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEANING > WIRECLN)
T-13-2
Chemical replaced parts
No.
As of December 2006
Part name
Part No.
Q'ty
Life
Photosensitive Drum
F43-7801-000
3,000,000
F42-7901-000/
F42-7911-000/
F42-7921-000
44,000(TBD)
Remarks
13-1
Chapter 13
- Machine
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
- Accessory
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
Part name
Part No.
Life
Remarks
Developing cylinder
FB6-6569-000
1,000,000
FB2-6899-000
500,000
Cleaning blade
FA6-3995-000
1,000,000
FM2-3069-000
1,000,000
FM2-9716-000
1,000,000
FM2-9647-000
1,000,000
FA4-1867-000
500,000
Fixing roller
FC4-4274-000
500,000
*1
10
Pressure roller
FC7-4237-000
FC7-4236-000(JPN only)
500,000
*2
11
Fixing web
FY1-1157-000
500,000
XG9-0636-000
12
FM2-9641-000
Q'ty
1,000,000
500,000
12
FC6-3502-000
500,000
13
FC7-4287-000
500,000
14
FB5-3625-000
500,000
*3
15
FA2-9037-000
1,000,000
16
FF5-7830-000
500,000
17
FF5-7829-000
500,000
18
FB6-0615-000
500,000
19
FB5-6586-000
500,000
20
FB1-8581-000
120,000
21
FB5-0873-000
120,000
*1 As the fixing roller is used more and more, its surface tends to become discolored because of heat. The change, however, will not affect the performance of the
roller. Also, note that the roller surface varies in color among manufacturers and the fact will not affect the roller performance.
*2 Replace this also at the time when replacing the pressure roller bearings.
Before attaching the bearings, apply the grease (Molykote HP300) uniformly around the outer circumference of the pressure roller shaft.
Apply about 2 drops of the grease each on the front and rear sides of the shaft.
*3 Replace simultaneously with fixing roller. When you replace bushings, apply about 20 mg of grease (Molykote HP-300; CK-8012) on the inner and outer surfaces
of the bushing until there is a white coating covering the entire sources.
13-2
Chapter 13
(double-sided print)
- If you need to dispose of the waste toner, be sure to do so in strict accordance with the regulations imposed by the local authorities.
- Do not dispose of waste toner in a fire. Doing so may cause an explosion.
5) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass.
6) Make test copies.
7) Make sample copies.
8) Check the operation of the leakage breaker.
With the power switch at ON, push the test switch of the leakage breaker to see that it operates normally (i.e., the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side to cut
off the power).
If the leakage beaker fails to operate normally, replace it, and run a check once again.
<Resetting the Breaker>
When you have made the check, turn off the main power switch, and turn on the breaker switch, and then turn the main power switch back on.
9) Put the sample copies in order, and clean up the area around the machine.
10) Record the final counter reading.
11) Fill out the Service Book, and report to the person in change. Be sure to update the history of checks on the leakage breaker in the Service Book.
Location
Remarks
as needed
13-3
Chapter 13
Original exposure
system
Copyboard glass
clean
clean
Scanner rail
clean/lubricate
clean
Reflecting plate
clean
Part
Upon
installation
every
250,000
Ozone filter
Replace
Air filter 1
Replace
Air filter 2
Clean
Dust-proof glass
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Roller electrode
Photosensitive
drum
Clean
Photosensitive
drum
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Clean
Developing
assembly
Cleaner
Developing cylinder
13-4
Clean
Replace
Inspect
Clean
Clean
Side scraper
collecting toner bottle holder
Remarks
Clean
Clean
every
1,000,000
Replace
Dust-proofing
filter (primary)
Laser optical path
every
500,000
Clean
Clean
Chapter 13
Intervals
Unit name
Fixing
assembly
Part
Upon
installation
every
250,000
Inlet guide
Web
Remarks
every
1,000,000
Clean
Inspect
Oil dish
Clean
Web guide
Clean
Thermistor unit
Clean
Replace
Sub thermistor
Clean
Replace
left stay
Clean
every
500,000
Replace
Clean
Clean
Clean
Toner collection
area
Inspect
Pickup/ feeding
assembly
Transfer guide
Clean
Registration
roller (upper, lower)
Clean
Feeding belt
Clean
Feeding rollers
Clean
- Make a thorough check of the block (front, rear) for melting by leakage, deformation by heat, cracking, discoloration (yellowing). If a fault is found, replace the
part with a new one immediately.
- Check the block (front, rear) including its inside.
- Do not use a cloth on which metal powder is found.
- If you have used solvent, make sure that the part has dried completely before mounting it back to the machine.
- Do not use a moist cloth unless specifically indicated.
- Be sure to provide scheduled servicing/replacement at the specified intervals.
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors
Clean it with a blower brush;
if dirt is excessive, dry wipe
with lint-free paper.
Primary/Transfer/Separation/
Pre-transfer charging assembly
Dry wipe with lint-free paper;
then, clean with alcohol.
Dust-proofing glass
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Pre-exposure glass
Dust-collecting roller
Disposing of toner.
Developing assembly
base
Clean with a moist
cloth; see Note 1.
Pickup/feeding roller
Registration roller
Fixing roller
(upper/lower)
Use cleaning oil and
lint-free paper.
Transfer guide
Reversing roller
F-13-1
13-5
Chapter 13
13.4 Cleaning
13.4.1 Cleaning Primary Toner Blocking Sheet
0016-0072
[1]
F-13-2
[1]
F-13-3
[1]
F-13-4
40mm
(Front)
30
8mm
13-6
Chapter 13
Rear
30
40mm
Magnet roller
4 8mm
Remove collected toner
F-13-6
4) Rotate the magnet roller in the clockwise direction (viewing from the front).
5) Repeat the step 3 through 4 until the area from which toner was removed in the step 3 is once again coated with an even layer of toner.
Do not rotate the magnet roller during work. Otherwise, waste toner may fall throught the cleaner assembly.
1) Remove the process unit.
2) Remove the photosensitive drum.
3) Moisten lint-free paper [1] with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol solutions [2]; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of the drum cleaning powder (CK-0429) [3] on the lint-free paper.
4) While butting the lint-free paper relatively strongly against the photosensitive drum, wipe the surface of the drum from the front to the rear and from the rear to
the front.
[3]
CK-0429
[2]
[1]
F-13-7
13-7
Chapter 13
5 10cm
F-13-8
13.4.5 Cleaning the fixing oil dish and the fixing cleaning belt guide
0015-5278
[1]
F-13-9
13-8
Contents
Contents
14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ...........................................................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Making Pre-Checks.................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.2 Making Checks on the Printer Unit (1/2)................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.3 Making Checks on the Printer Unit (2/2)................................................................................................................................. 14-3
14.1.4 Making Checks on the Reader Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.5 Checking the Potential System ................................................................................................................................................ 14-7
14.1.6 Checking the Surface Potential Control System ...................................................................................................................... 14-9
14.1.7 Potential Control System Conversion Table.......................................................................................................................... 14-11
14.1.8 Emergency Measures for a Fault in the Potential Sensor ...................................................................................................... 14-16
Contents
Chapter 14
<Pre-Checks>
Clean the following:
1. primary charging assembly grid wire
2. primary charging wire
3. pre-transfer charging wire
4. transfer charging wire
Output Conditions
F value = 5
potential control:
ON
The test print is
free of a fault.
NO
YES
Go to "Checking on the
Reader Side.
F-14-1
14-1
Chapter 14
<Checking Images>
Checking Halftone Images
Are there vertical
lines in the image?
NO
YES
Is there a
NO
difference in density between
front and rear?
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
Turn the adjusting screw
found at the front of the
primary charging assembly
clockwise. (2 full turns
Execute forced
potential control.
F-14-2
1. If there still is a difference in density after giving the adjusting screw 2 turns (each turn causing a change of about 0.7 mm), check the scanning lamp and the
scanner for soiling.
2. When making a clockwise turn, be sure that the intervals between wire grid runs are not larger than 9 mm.
When making a counterclockwise turn, be sure that the intervals between wire grid runs are not smaller than 7.5 mm.
MEMO:
Moving the wire from the photosensitive drum causes the image to be lighter, while moving it closer causes the images to be darker.
14-2
Chapter 14
NO
Is it foggy?
YES
Check the following readings (VD target value) in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM (for copier image)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM-P (for printer image)
NO
YES
Check the following readings (VL1 target value) in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M (for copier image)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M-P (for printer image)
NO
YES
-10
F-14-3
14-3
Chapter 14
Is the density
too low or too high (too
light or too dark)?
NO
YES
Check the following readings (VD target value) in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM (for copier image)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM-P (for printer image)
Are the
readings 6 V of the
target value?
(*1)
NO
YES
Check the following readings (VL1 target value) in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M (for copier image)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M-P (for printer image)
Are the
readings 6 V of the
target value?
(*2)
NO
YES
D
Adjust the offset of the VD target potential.
F-14-4
<Checking the Halftone Density>
YES
Is the halftone
density optimum?
End.
NO
Lighter image
-5
-4
-3
-2
Default
-1
Darker image
+1
+2
+3 +4
+5
F-14-5
14-4
Chapter 14
Is there a difference
in density between
front and rear?
NO
YES
NO
YES
Is there a
difference in density
between front
and rear?
NO
YES
Perform the instructions under
for the printer unit.
F-14-6
<Checking the Solid Black Density>
Make a copy of
the NA3 Chart in text mode. Is
gray scale No. 1 (solid black)
too light?
NO
Make a copy of
the NA3 Chart in text mode.
Is the white background
foggy?
YES
YES
NO
YES
J
K
Is the density of
NO
gray scale No. 1 (solid black)
too low (light)?
YES
Perform the instructions under
Checking the Solid Black Density
for the printer unit.
F-14-7
14-5
Chapter 14
YES
Is the white
background
foggy?
YES
YES
Is the white
background
foggy?
NO
YES
14-6
Chapter 14
When
the A3 Chart
is copied in text/photo
mode, is the density of No.8 optimum
YES
End.
If it is too dark,
If it is too light,
Increase the setting of the
following in service mode:
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
>DENS-ADJ
YES
Is the
density of gray scale
No.8 (halftone)
different?
NO
14-7
Chapter 14
Start
Disable the potential control mechanism
by entering '0' for the following:
COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>PO-CNT.
<Checking the Primary Output>
NO
Is the image
better?
YES
Turn off the main power
NO
Is the difference
between the measured PR-CNT
and 'PRIMARY' shown in service
mode +/-10%?
replace the DC
controller PCB.
NO
replace the DC
controller PCB.
YES
YES
turn off the main power
Try replacing the
high-voltage transformer. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
End
NO
Try replacing the photosensitive drum.
If the problem is not corrected, go to
'Checking the Laser Output'.
A
F-14-10
B
Enable potential control: COPIER>
OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT=1.
Is the indication
70 15 V?
YES
NO
Check the laser output.
YES
F-14-11
14-8
NO
Forced execution
of potential control
Chapter 14
Is the toner
image on the photosensitive
drum before transfer
normal?
NO
Replace the
photosensitive
drum.
YES
NO
Is the
deferense between
the actual measurement of
Replace the
HVT_DEV-BIAS_DC and 'BIAS'
DC controller
in service mode
PCB.
10%?
YES
Is the
difference between
the measurement of HVT_
TRANSFER and 'TR' in
service mode
+/- 10%?
NO Replace the
DC controller
PCB.
YES
Check the developing assembly
for leakage; if normal, go to a
check on the transfer output.
Replace the
high-voltage transformer.
Is the problem
corrected?
YES
END
NO
F-14-12
When the machine is in non-auto control mode, all settings used for corona current control, laser power control, and developing bias control will be automatically
be set to default settings.
Using Non-Auto Control Mode
1) Make the following selections in service mode, enter '0', and press the OK key:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT.
2) Press the Reset key twice.
3. Making a Zero-Level check
A "zero-level check" is a check made to see if the control mechanism of the DC controller PCB is identifying a 0-V level without fail when the drum surface
potential is 0 V.
A zero-level check may be made in either of 2 ways, and you can use it to decided whether the DC controller PCB and the potential measurement PCB is free
of error:
Method 1: use it to find out if the level shift circuit on the DC controller PCB is free of a fault
Method 2: use it to find out if the potential control circuit is free of a fault
(1) Method 1
1) Turn off the main power switch.
2) Remove the upper rear over.
3) Short GP33 on the DC controller PCB and GND using a cable equipped with an alligator clips or probes on both ends.
When shorting CP33 and GND, take full care to avoid contact between the clip/probe and the pattern of the PCB and other elements.
4) Remove the left cover (upper), delivery cover, and left cover (middle).
5) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the PCB cover [2].
14-9
Chapter 14
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-14-13
6) Disconnect the connector [1] connected to the DC controller PCB of the potential control PCB.
[1]
F-14-14
7) Close the front door, and turn on the main power switch.
8) Make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K; then, check to see that the indication during initial rotation is between 0 and 30. If not, suspect a fault in the DC
controller PCB.
9) Turn off the main power switch.
10) Remove the jumper wire found on the DC control PCB.
11) Connect the connector of the potential control PCB.
12) Mount the PCB cover, left cover (middle), delivery cover, and left cover (upper); then, close the front cover.
13) Mount the upper rear cover.
14) Turn on the main power switch.
(2) Method 2
1) Disable the potential control mechanism so that the machine is in non-auto control mode.
2) Turn off the main power switch.
3) Remove the potential sensor from the machine.
4) Connect the connector of the potential sensor to the connector of the machine.
5) Fit the potential sensor checking electrode (FY9-3012) [2] to the potential sensor [1].
[2]
[1]
F-14-15
When fitting the checking electrode to the potential sensor, take full care so that the electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover.
6) Connect the clip [1] of the checking electrode to the machine frame (GND).
14-10
Chapter 14
[1]
F-14-16
Be sure never to bring the clip [1] into contact with the sensor cover. Also, be sure to fit it sufficiently away from the sensor window.
7) Fit the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly.
8) Turn on the main power switch.
When you have turned on the main power switch, be sure never to touch the potential sensor.
9) Make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K. Then, check to see that the indication during initial rotation is between 0 and 30.
MEMO:
1. If the result of Method 1 is as indicated but that of Method 2 is not, suspect soiling of the sensor and a fault in the potential measurement unit.
2. If the results of both Methods 1 and 2 are as indicated, assume that the signal path and operation from the potential sensor unit to the microprocessor on the DC
controller PCB are normal.
10) Turn off the main power switch.
11) Detach the potential sensor checking electrode.
12) Mount the potential sensor.
13) Turn on the main power switch.
14) Enable the potential control mechanism.
Pre-transfer (uA)
Transfer (uA)
Separation (uA)
3.00
1,400
440
100
3.05
1,391
-2
437
96
3.10
1,382
-4
434
92
3.15
1,373
11
-6
431
88
3.20
1,365
15
-8
429
85
3.25
1,356
18
-10
426
81
3.30
1,347
22
-12
426
77
3.35
1,338
26
-14
420
73
3.40
1,330
30
-16
418
70
3.45
1,321
33
-18
415
66
3.50
1,312
37
-20
412
62
3.55
1,303
41
-22
409
58
3.60
1,295
45
-24
407
55
14-11
Chapter 14
14-12
Control (V)
Pre-transfer (uA)
Transfer (uA)
Separation (uA)
3.65
1,286
48
-26
404
51
3.70
1,277
52
-28
401
47
3.75
1,268
56
-30
398
43
3.80
1,260
60
-33
396
40
3.85
1,251
63
-35
393
36
3.90
1,242
67
-37
390
32
3.95
1,233
71
-39
387
28
4.00
1,225
75
-41
385
25
4.05
1,216
78
-43
382
21
4.10
1,207
82
-45
379
17
4.15
1,198
86
-47
376
13
4.20
1,190
90
-49
374
10
4.25
1,181
93
-51
371
4.30
1,172
97
-53
368
4.35
1,163
101
-55
365
-1
4.40
1,155
105
-57
363
-5
4.45
1,146
108
-59
360
-8
4.50
1,137
112
-61
357
-12
4.55
1,128
116
-63
354
-16
4.60
1,120
120
-66
352
-20
4.65
1,111
123
-68
349
-23
4.70
1,102
127
-70
346
-27
4.75
1,093
131
-72
343
-31
4.80
1,085
135
-74
341
-35
4.85
1,076
138
-76
338
-38
4.90
1,067
142
-78
335
-42
4.95
1,058
146
-80
332
-46
5.00
1,050
150
-82
330
-50
5.05
1,041
153
-84
327
-53
5.10
1,032
157
-86
324
-57
5.15
1,023
161
-88
321
-61
5.20
1,015
165
-90
319
-65
5.25
1,006
168
-92
316
-68
Chapter 14
Control (V)
Pre-transfer (uA)
Transfer (uA)
Separation (uA)
5.30
997
172
-94
313
-72
5.35
938
176
-96
310
-76
5.40
980
180
-99
308
-80
5.45
971
183
-101
305
-83
5.50
962
187
-103
302
-87
5.55
953
191
-105
299
-91
5.60
945
195
-107
297
-95
5.65
936
198
-109
294
-98
5.70
927
202
-111
291
-102
5.75
918
206
-113
288
-106
5.80
910
210
-115
286
-110
5.85
901
213
-117
283
-113
5.90
892
217
-119
280
-117
5.95
883
221
-121
277
-121
6.00
875
225
-123
275
-125
6.05
866
228
-125
272
-128
6.10
857
232
-127
269
-132
6.15
848
236
-129
266
-136
6.20
840
240
-132
264
-140
6.25
831
243
-134
261
-143
6.30
822
247
-136
258
-147
6.35
813
251
-138
255
-151
6.40
805
255
-140
253
-155
6.45
796
258
-142
250
-158
6.50
787
262
-144
247
-162
6.55
778
266
-146
244
-166
6.60
770
270
-148
242
-170
6.65
761
273
-150
239
-173
6.70
752
277
-152
236
-177
6.75
743
281
-154
233
-181
6.80
735
285
-156
231
-185
6.85
726
288
-158
228
-188
6.90
717
292
-160
225
-192
14-13
Chapter 14
14-14
Control (V)
Pre-transfer (uA)
Transfer (uA)
Separation (uA)
6.95
708
296
-162
222
-196
7.00
700
300
-165
220
-200
7.05
691
303
-167
217
-203
7.10
682
307
-169
214
-207
7.15
673
311
-171
211
-211
7.20
665
315
-173
209
-215
7.25
656
318
-175
204
-218
7.30
647
322
-177
203
-222
7.35
638
326
-179
200
-226
7.40
630
330
-181
198
-230
7.45
621
333
-183
195
-233
7.50
612
337
-185
192
-237
7.55
603
341
-187
189
-241
7.60
595
345
-189
187
-245
7.65
586
348
-191
184
-248
7.70
577
352
-193
181
-252
7.75
568
356
-195
178
-256
7.80
560
360
-198
176
-260
7.85
551
363
-200
173
-263
7.90
542
367
-202
170
-267
7.95
533
371
-204
167
-271
8.00
525
375
-206
165
-275
8.05
516
378
-208
162
-278
8.10
507
382
-210
159
-282
8.15
498
386
-212
156
-286
8.20
490
390
-214
154
-290
8.25
481
393
-216
151
-293
8.30
472
397
-218
148
-297
8.35
463
401
-220
145
-301
8.40
455
405
-222
143
-305
8.45
446
408
-224
140
-308
8.50
437
412
-226
137
-312
8.55
428
416
-228
134
-316
Chapter 14
Control (V)
Pre-transfer (uA)
Transfer (uA)
Separation (uA)
8.60
420
420
-231
132
-320
8.65
411
423
-233
129
-323
8.70
402
427
-235
126
-327
8.75
393
431
-237
123
-331
8.80
385
435
-239
121
-335
8.85
376
438
-241
118
-338
8.90
367
442
-243
115
-342
8.95
358
446
-245
112
-346
9.00
350
450
-247
110
-350
9.05
341
453
-249
107
-353
9.10
332
457
-251
104
-357
9.15
323
461
-253
101
-361
9.20
315
465
-255
99
-365
9.25
306
468
-257
96
-368
9.30
297
472
-259
93
-372
9.35
288
476
-261
90
-376
9.40
280
480
-264
88
-380
9.45
271
483
-266
85
-383
9.50
262
487
-268
82
-387
9.55
253
491
-270
79
-391
9.60
245
495
-272
77
-395
9.65
236
498
-274
74
-398
9.70
227
502
-276
71
-402
9.75
218
506
-278
68
-406
9.80
210
510
-280
66
-410
9.85
201
513
-282
63
-413
9.90
192
517
-284
60
-417
9.95
183
521
-286
57
-421
10.00
175
525
-288
55
-425
10.05
166
528
-290
52
-428
10.10
157
532
-292
49
-432
10.15
148
536
-294
46
-436
10.20
140
540
-297
44
-440
14-15
Chapter 14
Control (V)
Pre-transfer (uA)
Transfer (uA)
Separation (uA)
10.25
131
543
-299
41
-443
10.30
122
547
-301
38
-447
10.35
113
551
-303
35
-451
10.40
105
555
-305
33
-455
10.45
96
558
-307
30
-458
10.50
87
562
-309
27
-462
10.55
78
566
-311
24
-466
10.60
70
570
-313
22
-470
10.65
61
573
-315
19
-473
10.70
52
577
-317
16
-477
10.75
43
581
-319
13
-481
10.80
35
585
-321
11
-485
10.85
26
588
-323
-488
10.90
17
592
-325
-492
10.95
596
-327
-496
11.00
600
-330
-500
14-16
Chapter 14
[1]
[2]
1.5mm
1.0mm
F-14-17
1.5mm
[2]
0
2
4
6
8
10
F-14-18
[1]
F-14-21
4.0
4) Make sure that the side registration values (left margins) of a copy made
from the cassette 3/4 are L1 = 2.51.5mm respectively.
1.5mm
1.0mm
F-14-19
1.5mm
image
L1
[1]
0
2
4
F-14-22
8
10
F-14-20
[1]
F-14-23
14-17
Chapter 14
[3]
[3]
[2]
0
2
[1]
[2]
F-14-24
8
10
F-14-29
[1]
0015-5292
4) Make sure that the side registration values (left and right margins) of a
copy made from the front deck left/right are L1 = 2.51.5mm respectively.
F-14-30
image
L1
[3]
2.5mm2.0
[3]
0
2
4
6
8
10
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-14-27
F-14-31
[1]
F-14-28
14-18
F-14-32
Chapter 14
3-2) ADF white level adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DFWLVL1/2)
Be sure to generate the latest P-PRINT printout before replacing the reader
controller PCB.
- If you are initializing the RAM on the reader controller without replacing
the PCB
Using the SST, upload the backup data of R-CON; initialize the RAM, and
then download the data, thus eliminating the need for the following.
1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2) Make the following selections in the service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON. Then, press the OK key to execute RAM initialization. Thereafter, turn off and then back on the main power.
3) Enter the appropriate settings for the following items in the service mode:
a. setting indicated on the service label (found behind the reader unit front
cover)
a-1. image read start position adjustment (X direction; in fixed reading
mode)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
a-2 image read start position adjustment (Y direction; in fixed reading
mode)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
a-3 shading position adjustment (in fixed reading mode)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
a-4 feeder mode main scanning position adjustment
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
a-5 ADF stream reading CCD reading position
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS
a-6 density manipulating value adjustment
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFCH-G2
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFCH-G10
(After inputs it, execute COPIER>FUNCTION>DF-LNR)
[C]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[B]
F-14-33
The machine retains ADF-related service data in the RAM of its reader controller.
ADF adjustment is necessary whenever you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the RAM.
2) Arrange the mirror positioning tool so that it is ready for use in the machine (by changing the pin position; FRONT).
[C]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[B]
F-14-34
3) Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2]; rear [3]) into the appropriate holes [1] of the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base.
14-19
Chapter 14
1) ADF white level adjustment (COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/
2).
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-14-36
4) Secure the end of the cable that has temporarily been fixed in place on the
hook of the reader unit frame.
5) Fully tighten the screws on the cable fixing plate both at the front and the
rear.
6) Detach the mirror positioning tool (FRONT, REAR).
7) Put the detached parts back on by reversing the foregoing steps.
[1]
F-14-37
14-20
Chapter 14
3) Free a length of about 5 cm of the charging wire (0.06 mm in diameter)
from the charging wire reel, and form a loop at its end with a diameter of
about 2 mm.
Screws
MEMO:
To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, and turn the
hex key 3 to 4 times; then, twist the charging wire.
4) Cut the end (excess) of the twisted wire.
5) Hook the loop on the stud.
Stud
Charging electrode
Reel
F-14-42
(Front)
Charging wire
3) Loosen the screw, and move it in the direction of the arrow indicated below; then, temporarily tighten it in place.
4) Free a length of about 5 cm of the charging wire (0.1 mm in diameter)
from the charging wire reel, and form a loop at its end with a diameter of
about 2 mm.
(Rear)
F-14-38
6) At the rear, hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioning plate;
then, hook the charging wire tension spring on the charging wire where
indicated to the following figure.
Screw
F-14-39
MEMO:
To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, and turn the
hex key 3 to 4 times; then, twist the charging wire.
F-14-40
(Wrong)
(Correct)
Stud A
Grid side
(Correct)
(Wrong)
Screw
F-14-41
F-14-44
0015-9964
0015-9963
7.5
1.5
0 mm
7.5
1.5
0 mm
F-14-45
14-21
Chapter 14
<Tolerance> +/-1 mm
0015-9972
10.06
0.3 mm
F-14-46
[3] [2]
9.5
0.5mm
F-14-47
[1]
[4] 0 0.5mm
16.0
F-14-48
MEMO:
The height (position) of the primary charging wire and the transfer charging
wire can be adjusted by turning the screw at the back of the charging assembly. A single turn changes the position of the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.
F-14-51
[1]
F-14-49
2) Tighten the 5 screws [3] lightly, and stop to turn them when resistance is
felt.
3) Turn the screws tightened lightly in the step 2 about 20 to 30 degrees in
the order indicated below, and tighten them fully.
[2]
[1]
[3]
Order of tightening
F-14-50
After mounting the cleaning blade, check that the edge of the blade is not extremely bent.
Further, be sure to clean the groove in the blade support plate before mounting the blade, as toner or the like in the groove can be the cause the bending
of the blade. B
14-22
F-14-52
- Applied grease may be transferred from the bushing to the fixing roller
ends [1] when mounting; be sure to wipe it off when this happens.
Chapter 14
Adjust the position of the fixing inlet guide solenoid with the screw [1] so
that the guide positions as shown in the figure below when the solenoid is
turned on.
11.1mm
12.7mm
Fixing roller
[1]
1.6mm
[1]
Pressure roller
Inlet guide
Solenoid
F-14-56
F-14-53
Fixing roller
0015-9976
11.1mm
12.7mm
[1]
[1]
1.6mm
Inlet guide
Solenoid
F-14-57
[2]
8.6mm
F-14-54
0015-9986
[2]
14-23
Chapter 14
The direction of the mounting pickup roller
The pickup roller may be mounted by reversing the steps used to remove it;
however, be sure to keep the following in the mind.
- The roller used at the front and the rear of the machine is not compatible.
- When mounting the pickup roller used at the front of the machine [1],
make sure the round mark [2] and the punch mark [3] found on the side
of the roller are toward the front of the machine.
[1]
[2]
Direction of
rotation
[2]
[3]
Front side of
the machine
[1]
F-14-58
F-14-60
- When mounting the pickup roller used at the rear of the machine [1],
make sure the punch mark [2] is at the rear of the machine.
Direction of
rotation
[2]
[1]
Rear side of
the machine
F-14-61
Mounting the separation roller in a wrong orientation may lead to interference against the crimping washer. Make sure it is mounted in a correct orientation.
Cassette 1/2, Right deck pickup assembly
Wider groove
Narrower groove
[4]
(rear of machine)
(front of machine)
F-14-62
[1]
[3]
F-14-59
F-14-63
14-24
Chapter 14
sure the belt pulley [2] is at the front of the machine.
Check to make sure the protrusion in the roller plate and roller are engaged
securely.
aration roller.
- If double feeding occurs, remove the mounting screw [2], lower the
mounting base [3] and tighten the screw [2] in the A hole.
- If pickup failure occurs, remove the mounting screw [2], raise the
mounting base [3] and tighten the screw [2] in the B hole.
hole A
[1]
front
[2]
[2]
hole B
[1]
F-14-67
rear
F-14-64
0015-5326
Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [3] so that the distance from the bottom of the pickup assembly to A of the roller arm is 36-/
+0.5 mm when [1] and [2] are op-erated.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
36
[2]
0.5mm
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-14-68
[4]
0015-5327
F-14-65
Adjust the position of the mounting screw [2] using the screw [2] so that the
drive lever [1] is pushed fully when the solenoid turns on (i.e., when the
plunger is drawn).
[1]
[2]
0016-0025
[1]
F-14-66
3) Move the mount [3] to adjust the position of the pressure spring of the sep-
14-25
Chapter 14
[2]
[1]
[A]
57.2 0.5mm
A
[3]
F-14-70
F-14-73
1) Remove the cable from the wire saddle, and detach the guide plate [3].
- 1 connector [1]
- 3 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-14-71
F-14-74
2) While keeping the lifter motor M21/M21 [1] to the right side, tighten the
screw [2] temporally.
[1]
Before removing the screw, make sure to mark the line in the following step.
1) Adjust the position of the solenoid using the 2 screws [1] so that the driver
lever [2] is pushed fully when the solenoid is on (i.e., when the plunger is
down)
[1]
[2]
F-14-75
[1]
[2]
[2]
1) Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual feed tray against section A (open
state).
2) Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt [2]
onto the pulley [3].
F-14-76
6) If the lifter drive guar is not away from the lifter motor, move the position
of the lifter motor M20/M21 [1] to the left and check again with keeping
the release button of the cassette 3/4 pressed halfway.
14-26
Chapter 14
[1]
F-14-77
14-27
Contents
Contents
15.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Site Environment ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.2 Checking the Originals for Symptoms..................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.3 Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate............................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.4 Checking the Charging Assemblies ......................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.5 Checking the Developing Assembly........................................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.1.6 Checking the Paper .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ............................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.8 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure......................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.9 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB............................................................... 15-25
15.2.9.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB .............................................................................................15-25
15.2.9.2 DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................................................................................................................15-25
15.2.9.3 DC Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................................................................................................15-26
15.2.9.4 HVT PCB ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15-26
Chapter 15
15.1.9 Others
0015-5341
15-1
Chapter 15
Name
Description
CL1
Remarks
CL2
registration clutch
CL3
CL4
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SL7
SL8
SL9
T-15-2
15-2
Notation
Parts No.
PART-CHK
CL1
FK2-0852
CL>4
J108
CL2
FK2-0856
CL>5
J106
CL3
FK2-0851
CL>1
J108
CL4
FK2-0850
CL>2
J115
SL1
FK2-0841
SL>9 (recover)
(SL10) (plunger drawn)
J106
SL2
FK2-0832
SL>5
J108
SL3
FH7-5702
SL>3
J110
SL4
FH7-5702
SL>4
J110
SL5
FK2-0835
SL>7
J106
SL6
FK2-0836
SL>1
SL7
FK2-0836
SL>2
SL8
FK2-0838
SL>8
SL9
FK2-0839
SL>11
J2105/ J2101
DC controller PCB
J104
J102
J2306/ J2302
J107
J106
Chapter 15
SL2
SL5
SL8
SL9
SL1
SL3
SL4
CL1
CL3
CL2
CL4
SL6
SL7
F-15-1
15.2.2 Motor
15.2.2.1 Motors
0015-5385
Name
Description
Parts No.
E code
M501
scanner motor
FK2-3773
E202
T-15-4
Notation
M501
Connector
I/F PCB
J306/308
J202
15-3
Chapter 15
M1
F-15-2
<Printer Unit>
T-15-5
15-4
Notation
Name
Description
M1
drum motor
M2
main motor
M3
fixing motor
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
stirs toner inside the sub hopper, supplies toner to the developing
assembly
M10
M11
M12
M13
delivery motor
M14
reversal motor
M15
shutter motor
M16
M17
pre-registration motor
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M24
M25
M26
M27
Remarks
Chapter 15
T-15-6
Notation
Parts No.
PART-CHK
Error
M1
FK2-3689
MTR>2
E012-0000
M2
FK2-3491
MTR>3
E010-0000
M3
FK2-3690
MTR>4
E014-0000
M4
FK2-0017
MTR>25
M5
FK2-0017
MTR>26
M6
FH5-1138
MTR>17
M7
FH6-1038
MTR>18
M8
FH6-1038
MTR>19
M9
FK2-0813
MTR>20 (CW)
MTR>21(CCW)
M10
FK2-0015
MTR>22
M11
FK2-3475
MTR>5
M12
FK2-3475
MTR>7
M13
FK2-0827
MTR>14
M14
FK2-4564
MTR>12
M15
FK2-0828
MTR>24
M16
FK2-0144
MTR>23
M17
FK2-4563
MTR>15
M18
FK2-0826
MTR>13
M19
FK2-0826
MTR>16
M20
FK2-0814
MTR>27
M21
FK2-0814
MTR>28
M22
FM2-0018
MTR>1
M24
FK2-3475
MTR>6
M25
FK2-0824
MTR>8
M26
FK2-0820
MTR>10
M27
FK2-0822
MTR>9
E110-0001
T-15-7
Notation
Video PCB
DC controller PCB
M1
J108
M2
J108
M3
J106
M4
J2105/J2113
M5
J2105/J2113
J105
J105
M6
J103
M7
J103
M8
J106
M9
J103
M10
J103
M11
J2102/J2101
J104
M12
J2104/J2101
J104
M13
M14
M15
J106
J2305/J2302
J107
J128
15-5
Chapter 15
Notation
M16
J2306/J2302
Video PCB
DC controller PCB
J107
M17
J2102/J2101
J104
M18
J2307/J2302
J107
M19
J2305/J2302
J107
M20
J113
M21
J113
M22
J1406/
J116
M24
J2103/J2101
J104
M25
J2112/J2101
J104
M26
J2102/J2101
J104
M27
J2110/J2101
J104
M22
M9
M10
M13
M6
M7
M15
M16
M8
M18
M3
M4
M14
M5
M19
M20
M21
M1
M17
M25
M2
M26 M11
M24
M27
M12
F-15-3
15.2.3 Fan
15.2.3.1 Fans
0015-5387
15-6
Chapter 15
T-15-8
Notation
FM501
Name
Description
Parts No.
FK2-0636
Connector
Interface PCB
J313/J308
J202
FM501
F-15-4
<Printer Unit>
T-15-9
Notation
Name
Description
FM1
feed fan
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
curl-removing fan
FM6
FM7
FM8
FM9
FM10
FM11
HVT fan
T-15-10
Notation
Parts No.
I/O
FM1
FH5-1117
P013-0: half-speed
P013-1: full-speed
1:ON
E805-0002
FM2
FK2-0103
P013-2: half-speed
P013-3: full-speed
1:ON
1:OM
E824-0001
FM3
FH5-1118
P013-6: half-speed
P013-7: full-speed
1:ON
1:ON
E805-0001
FM4
FK2-0844
P014-2: half-speed
P014-3: full-speed
1:ON
1:ON
E121-0001
FM5
FH6-1548
P014-6: half-speed
P014-7: full-speed
1:ON
1:ON
P012-3
1:ON
E804-0000
FM7
FK2-0795
P014-0
P014-1
1:ON
1:ON
E804-0001
FM8
FH6-1742
P014-5
1:ON
FM9
FK2-0103
P023-2
1:ON
FM10
FK2-0472
P015-1: half-speed
P015-2: full-speed
1:ON
E804-0002
FM11
FH6-1742
P013-4: half-speed
P013-5: full-speed
1:ON
FM6
Error
15-7
Chapter 15
T-15-11
Notation
Duplexing PCB
DC controller PCB
FM1
J109
FM2
J103
FM3
J111
FM4
J108
FM5
FM6
J106
PN4001/J4002
J102
FM7
J124
FM8
J2303/J2302
J107
FM9
J124
FM10
J6503
FM11
J137
FM9
FM2
FM5
FM8
FM6
FM7
FM4
FM1
FM11
FM3
FM10
F-15-5
15.2.4 Sensor
15.2.4.1 Sensors
0015-5388
15-8
Chapter 15
T-15-12
Notation
SR1
Name
Description
Parts No.
Connector No.
Interface PCB
J310/308
J202
SR2
Scanner HP sensor
FK2-0149
J310/308
J202
SR3
FK2-0149
J310/308
J202
CF1-CF4
FK2-0238
J207(AB)
J208(INCH)
CF1 - CF4
SR1
SR2
SR3
F-15-6
<Printer Unit>
T-15-13
Notation
Name
Description
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS23
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS29
PS30
PS31
PS32
15-9
Chapter 15
Notation
Name
Description
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS36
PS37
Reversal sensor 1
PS38
Reversal sensor 2
PS45
PS46
PS47
PS48
PS49
PS50
PS51
PS52
PS53
Shutter HP sensor
PS54
UN13
UN14
UN15
UN16
UN17
UN18
UN19
15-10
Notation
Parts No.
PS2
FK2-0149
I/O
P009-13
DC controller PCB
0:open
J113
JAM
PS3
FK2-0149
P009-0
0:open
J103
PS4
FK2-0149
P001-14
0:present
J106
PS5
FK2-0149
P009-11
0:open
J112
PS6
FK2-0149
PS7
FK2-0149
P001-7
1:present
J112
PS8
FK2-0149
P002-4
1:present
J112
PS9
FK2-0149
P009-12
0:open
PS10
FK2-0149
PS11
FK2-0149
P001-9
1:present
J115
PS12
FK2-0149
P008-4
1:present
J115
PS13
FK2-0149
P001-3
1:present
J110
PS14
FK2-0149
P001-5
1:present
J110
PS15
FK2-0149
P009-8
0:open
J110
PS16
FK2-0149
P009-9
0:open
PS17
FK2-0149
J110
PS18
FK2-0149
J110
PS19
FK2-0149
P001-2
1:present
J112
xx0B
PS20
FK2-0149
P002-2
1:present
J115
xx0C
PS21
FK2-0149
P002-0
1:present
J110
xx0D
PS22
FK2-0149
P002-1
1:present
J110
xx0E
PS23
FK2-0149
P001-0
0:present
J108
PS24
FK2-0149
P001-8
1:present
J113
xx03
PS25
FK2-0149
P001-10
1:present
J113
xx04
PS26
FK2-0149
P001-4
1:present
J110
xx05
PS27
FK2-0149
P001-6
1:present
J110
xx06
PS28
FK2-0149
P002-8
1:present
J113
xx02
PS29
FK2-0149
P001-1
1:present
J106
xx01
PS30
FK2-0149
P002-5
1:present
J107
xx16
xx0F
J112
J115
-
J115
J110
Chapter 15
Notation
Parts No.
PS31
FK2-0149
P002-6
I/O
0:present
J107
PS32
FK2-0149
P009-2
1:present
J112
xx07
PS33
FK2-0149
P001-15
1:present
J107
xx08
PS34
FK2-0149
P002-11
1:present
J107
xx15
PS35
FK2-0149
P001-12
0:present
J106
xx10
PS36
FK2-0149
P001-11
1:present
J106
xx11
PS37
FK2-0149
P002-3
1:present
J107
xx14
PS38
FK2-0149
P002-7
1:present
J107
xx13
PS45
FK2-0149
P002-12
1:absent
J128
PS46
FK2-0149
P008-09
1:present
J106
PS47
FK2-0149
P006-8
1:present
J115
PS48
FK2-0149
P006-12
1:present
J115
PS49
FK2-0149
P006-9
1:present
J115
PS50
FK2-0149
P006-13
1:present
J115
PS51
FK2-0149
P008-8
1:present
J106
xx18
PS52
FK2-0149
P002-13
1:present
J106
xx17
PS53
FK2-0149
P002-14
0:HP
J106
PS54
FK2-0149
P009-14
0:open
UN13
FG5-6231
UN14
FG6-1941
P009-5
UN15
FG6-1941
P009-6
UN16
FG5-1957
J111
UN17
FG5-1957
J125
UN18
FG5-9581
J111
UN19
FG5-9581
J125
DC controller PCB
JAM
xx12
J103
-
1:present
J108
J113
1:present
J113
15-11
Chapter 15
PS23
PS25
PS49
PS50
PS47
PS48
PS26
UN16
PS13
UN18
PS21
PS17
UN17
PS15
PS27
PS14
UN19
PS22
PS18
UN15
PS16
PS24
PS7
PS11
PS28
PS8
PS19
PS32
PS6
PS12
PS20
PS10
PS5
PS9
F-15-7
15-12
UN14
Chapter 15
UN13
PS3
PS34
PS30
PS31
PS38
PS33
PS37
PS2
PS54
PS29
PS4
PS52
PS36
PS51
PS45
PS35
PS46
PS53
F-15-8
15.2.5 Switch
15.2.5.1 Switches
0015-5389
Name
Description
SW1
Parts No.
FK2-0796
SW2
WC4-5125
SW3
environment switch
WC1-5179
SW4
WC1-5179
SW5
WC4-0153
SW6
WC4-5112
SW7
WC4-5112
15-13
Chapter 15
SW6
SW2
SW7
SW1
SW5
SW4
SW3
F-15-9
Name
Description
H501
lens heater
Parts No.
F26-4601 (100V; option)
FK2-0228 (230V; service part)
H502
mirror heater
LA1
15-14
scanning lamp
illuminates originals
FM2-3184 (100V/230V)
FM2-3185 (120V)
Chapter 15
H501
LA1
H502
F-15-10
<Printer Unit>
T-15-17
Notation
Name
Description
Parts No.
LED1
IH
fixing heater
H1
drum heater
FK2-0807
FK2-0786 (100V)
FK2-0787 (120V)
FK2-0788 (230V)
H2
cassette heater
THM1
THM2
FK2-0811
THM3
shutter thermistor
TP1
ELCB
leakage breaker
FH7-7626 (100V)
FK2-0014 (120V)
FH7-7625 (230V)
TS1
FK2-0812
TS2
THU1
temperature/humidity sensor
C1
charger unit
WP2-5200
15-15
Chapter 15
TS2
LED1
TS1
THM2
THM3
IH
C1
TP1
THM1
H1 / TH5
THU1
ELCB
H2
F-15-11
15.2.7 PCBs
15.2.7.1 PCBs
0015-5391
Name
Description
[1]
interface PCB
Parts No.
[2]
Memory PCB
FM3-0471
FM3-0472
[3]
FM3-0470
[4]
CCD/AP PCB
[5]
inverter PCB
FK2-0630
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
F-15-12
<Printer Unit>
T-15-19
Ref.
Name
Description
[1]
DC controller PCB
Parts No.
FM2-9857
[2]
supplies DC power
FK2-3472i100V/120Vj
[3]
AC driver PCB
FK2-3473i230Vj
FM2-9861 (100V; AC driver unit)
FM2-9861 (120V; AC driver unit)
FM2-9862 (230V; AC driver unit)
[4]
15-16
FM2-9895
Chapter 15
Ref.
Name
Description
Parts No.
[5]
HVT1 PCB
FM2-9897
iR5065/iR5065N/iR5055/iR5055N
FM2-9859
iR5075/iR5075N
[6]
potential PCB
FM2-0839
[7]
FM2-0841 (100V/120V)
[8]
FM2-0842 (230V)
FK2-2660i100Vj
FK2-2661i230Vj
FK2-3476(100/230 universal)
[9]
FM2-9903
[10]
[11]
BD developing PCB
[12]
FM2-1250
[13]
FM2-1249
[14]
FM2-1251
[15]
FG6-4978
[16]
capacitor PCB
removes noise
[17]
FM3-0221
[19]
FM2-5430 (option)
[20]
FM2-3661
[21]
FM2-3657
[22]
FM3-0233
[23]
Video PCB
image control
FM2-9868
[24]
FM3-0957
[25]
Filter PCB
FM2-9865 (100V)
FM2-9866 (120V/230V)
[26]
generates 13V
FM2-9869
15-17
Chapter 15
[10]
[11]
[20]
[21]
[7]
[9]
[2]
[12]
[14]
[13]
[24]
[6]
[23]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[15] [1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[26]
[16]
[22]
[8]
[25]
F-15-13
15.2.8 Connectors
15.2.8.1 Connectors
0015-5393
15-18
Chapter 15
J505
J202
J306
J305
J308
J503
J502
J301
J313
J310
J204
J102
J101
J315
J312
J505
J6
J501
J7
J8
J2
J203
J601
J5102
J203
J207
J5100
J309
J5101
J602
J205
J206
F-15-14
<Printer Unit>
15-19
Chapter 15
J1523
J1519
J122
J6502
J126
J113
J803
J1409
J1403
J1401
J807
J115
J421
J1521
J5700
J5701
J571
J8492
J572
J418
J804
J9006
J802
J573
J419
J810
J574
J9008
J2105
J8508
J809
J805
J9004
J2106
J801
J806
J9003
J2204
J5503
J4500
J116
J5501
J1408
J1406
J1411
J110
J1402
J1015
J2511
J2701
CP1000
J112
J518
J115
J511
J717
J531
J513
J515 J517
J512
J516
J567
J536
J533
J537
J5370
J561
J534
J564
J532
J535
J568
J565
J541
J569
J546
J543
J547
J5470
J4008
J4002
J544
J542
J545
F-15-15
15-20
Chapter 15
J1404
J1504
J103
J15
J4070
J4
J408
J2002
J3
J154
J427
J407
J4260
J1502
J203
J426
J3230
J160 J1405
J157
J2
J323
J153
J2053
J103
J165
J163
J1761
J151
J155
J156
J150
J162
J153
J107
J191
J712
J222
J158
J203
J193
J192
J1610
J161
J229
J222
J223
J230
J236
J235
J227
J231
J234
J224
J2303
J2301
J2306
J228
J2302
J2305
J2307
J225
J1513
J232
J1518
J233
J226
F-15-16
15-21
Chapter 15
J727 J728
J726
J128
J118
J3004
J304
J106
J729
J303
J119
J3005
J251
J256
J264
J3301
J257
J3005
J3008
J3009
J3003
J251
J1003
J3006
J1004
J3007
J3002
J1006
J261
J1005
J262
J251
J254
J259
J611
J612
J268
J271
J258
J273
J1
J1403
J125
J6503
J6403
J8402
J1291
J1241
J129
J8401
J8400
J205
J1251
J9013
J4013
J5
J9014
J3503
J6
J8403
J129
J3502
J3504
F-15-17
15-22
J255
J274 J263
J270
J260
Chapter 15
J1533
J9011 J1355
J1354
J1018
J1060
J1024
J1062
J6802
J6801
J1111
J511
J1
J1113
J3
J6801
J2
J1110
J1114
J1112
J9
J2051
J7
J8
J503
J1
J1022
J11
J124
J1023
J1542
J9001
J1541
J123
J114
J754
J753
J3000
J2054
J9000
PN4001
J4016
J350
J4001
F-15-18
15-23
Chapter 15
J1021
J119
J3002
J4503
J3001
J102
J566
J4505
J2055
J4007
J4502
J4013
J4002
J4015
J9741
J742
J705
J4017
J701
J707
J704
J703
J101
J107
J3100
J414
J109
J104
J4111
J105
J411
J413
J412
J417
J4171
J2052
J2122
J2102
J2602
J2103
J2601
J2004
J2113
J2110
J2101
J2104
J8
J418
J5
J9007
J10
J211
J111
J2441
F-15-19
15-24
Chapter 15
J725
J715
100V
120V
230V
3031
3032
3033
J1041
J1030
J1031 J1040
J130
J131
J726
J108
J111
J101
J125
J5770 J1401
J5500
J2109
J4009
J719
J325
J702
J718
J550
J577
J713
J602
J601
J4006
J4003
J1404
J137
J251
J901
J124
J902
J108
J1543
J903
J1415
J107
J321
J1414
J631
J322
J632
J222
J6310
J6320
J4004
J138
J4005
F-15-20
15.2.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
15.2.9.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB
0015-5395
- Some LEDs carry current and emit light when they are off; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind.
- Take note of the following:
...VR that may be used in the field.
...VR that must not be used in the field.
15-25
Chapter 15
2 1
4 1
8 1
B20
J116
J117
J130
J131
J19
A20
A1
B10
J128
A10
1
J118
A1
B20
J106
A20
B1
A13
A1
B13
J101
J100
J119
A1
B1 B13
A10
J111
A1
B10
J125
J109
A18
A1
A9
A18
B1
J107
A1
A20
B9
B1
J112
B1
A1
A15
J104
7
A1
A16
B15
B1
B1
A1
J102
J115
J105
B20
B1
A1
12
B17
B1
J303
1
J113
A13
J110
B1
A17
B1
A1
B1
A1
J203
J114
1 10
J3
J123
CP33
B1
A13
J108
VR3
B13
A1
A40
B40
J124
J304
16
B1
J103
J121
B16
F-15-21
- J303
When replacing the PCB, be sure to move the J303 shorting connector from the existing to new PCB.
The control panel indications will fail to appear unless the shorting connector has been connected properly.
- CP33
Use it when checking the potential system.
- VR3
for factory use
J4010
J4002
2 1
2 1
3
J4013
1
J4009
J4015
1
1
J4008
1
8 1
VR4701
J4004
J4007
J4003
1
VR4501
J4011
1
CN4001
J4006
J4019
J4014 1
41
J4016
3
1
J4017
1
10
J4005
VR4601
J4001-2
J4001-1
VR4605
F-15-22
15-26
Chapter 15
J4506
J4507
T4505
T4506
J4508
J4505
J4504
VR4501
J4509
13
J4503
J4502
J4501
F-15-23
- VR4501
for factory use
15-27
Contents
Contents
16.1 Error Code Table........................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.1.1 Error Code................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-1
Chapter 16
Description
E000
E001
E002
E003
E004
E005
E010
E012
E013
E014
E020
there is no toner in the developing assembly; there is an error in the detection of developing assembly toner sensor connection; there is an error in
the detection of developing hopper toner sensor connection
E025
there is an error in the detection of toner feed motor over-current, there is an error in the detection of toner bottle motor over-current, there is an error
in the detection of toner bottle motor connection
E032
E061
E100
there is a BD error
E102
E110
E121
E193
E196
E197
there is an error in communication between the DC controller PCB and the video PCB/an error in communication of the DC controller PCB
E225
E240
there is an error in the communication between the main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB
E315
E503
E505
E514
E519
E530
E531
E532
E535
E537
E540
E542
E584
E590
E591
E592
E593
E5F0
E5F1
E5F2
E5F3
E5F4
E5F5
E5F6
E5F9
E602
E604
E609
E610
E611
retried reboot due to SRAM crash and the like during the shutdown recovery job execution
16-1
Chapter 16
Code
Description
E612
error in postponement
E674
There is a fault in the communication between the fax controller PCB (2-line) and the main controller PCB.
E710
E711
E713
E717
E719
E730
E732
E733
E740
E744
E746
E748
E804
there is a DC power supply fan error/there is an IH power supply cooling fan error
E805
E808
E821
E824
E840
E841
Description
E000
Remedy
0000 After power-on, the reading of the main thermistor does not increase to 70 - Replace the main/shutter thermistor.
deg C or higher within 20 sec.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
0010 The power has been turned off and then on without resetting the error.
E001
- Check the connector of each thermistor for any fault in connection and
wiring.
- Replace the thermistor in question.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
0002 The reading of the main thermistor, shutter thermistor, or sub thermistor is - Replace the thermistor in question.
230 deg C or higher for 2 sec.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
0003 The reading is not 150 deg C or higher or 210 deg C or lower within 30 sec. -Cheak the connecting of the main/ sub/ shutter thermistors.
-Check the mounting of the main/ sub/ shutter thermistors.
-Exchange the main/ sub/ shutter thermistors.
-Exchange the DC controller PCB.
0010 The power has been turned off and then back on without resetting the error. - Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)
E002
16-2
Chapter 16
Code
Description
0000 The reading of the main thermistor is not 100 deg C 12 sec after it has
exceeded 70 deg C.
0001 The reading of the main thermistor is not 150 deg C 15 sec after it has
exceeded 100 deg C.
Remedy
- Check the connector of the main/shutter thermistor for any fault in
connection and wiring.
- Check the main/shutter thermistor for mounting condition.
- Replace the main/shutter thermistor.
- Replace the fixing heater unit.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
0010 The power has been turned off and then back on without resetting the error. - Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)
E003
0010 The power has been turned off and then back on without resetting the error. - Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)
E004
0101 There is a mismatch between the input voltage and the IH power supply ID. Replace the fixing heater power supply with one designed for the country
of installation (voltage).
0010 The power has been turned off and then back on without resetting the error. - Reset the fixing web counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB)
E010
E012
16-3
Chapter 16
Code
Description
E013
Remedy
0010 The power has been turned off and then back on without resetting the error.
E014
E020
There is no toner in the developing assembly; there is an error in the detection of developing toner sensor connection; there is an error in the detection
of hopper toner sensor connection
0000 The presence of toner is detected inside the sub hopper and, in addition, the
absence of toner is detected inside developing assembly for 120 sec
continuously even when operation has been under way for the supply of
toner to the developing assembly.
- Check the connector of the developing toner sensor for any fault in
connection.
- Replace the developing toner sensor.
- Replace the hopper toner sensor.
0001 At power-on, the connection of the developing assembly toner sensor is not - Check the connector for any fault in connection.
detected.
- Replace the sensor.
0002 At power-on, the connection of the developing hopper toner sensor is not - Check the connector for any fault in connection.
detected.
- Replace the sensor.
E025
E032
There is a toner feed motor over-current detection error, there is a toner bottle motor connection detection error.
0003 At power-on, the connection of the toner bottle motor is not detected.
E061
Turn off the main power, and check for an open circuit in the cable; then,
turn the main power back on.
0002 The primary charging output used at time of printer output and the drum
surface potential after laser output is identified as being 200 V or more (i.e.,
causing a solid black image).
E100
There is a BD error.
0001 A check is made of VLOCK at intervals of 100 msec while the laser is on. - Replace the laser scanner unit.
An error will be identified if it is not detected 10 times in sequence.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
E102
E110
16-4
Chapter 16
Code
Description
Remedy
0001 - Although the polygon motor has been turned on, VLOCK is not detected - Replace the laser scanner unit.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
at all within 76.5 sec.
- At time of a shift from full-speed to half-speed control, VLOCK is not
detected at all for 7.5 sec.
- At time of half-speed control, a check is made of VLOCK at intervals of
100 msec. An error will be identified if it is not detected 10 times
continuously.
E121
E193
E196
The ID in EEPROM that has been read and the ID in ROM are compared.
2abb An error will be identified if they do not match. (a: chip No. 0 through 5;
bb: chip faulty address)
3abb When the main power is turned on, the ID in EEPROM and the ID in ROM - Check the position and condition of the EEPROM.
are compared. An error will be identified if they do not match. (a: chip No. - Initialize the RAM.
0 through 5; bb: chip faulty address)
- Replace the EEPROM.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
E197
There is an error in communication between the DC controller PCB and the video PCB/an error in communication of the DC controller PCB.
0000 An error in the communication between the DC controller PCB and the
video PCB has occurred.
0001 An error in the communication with the laser driver module of the DC
controller PCB has occurred.
E225
E240
The communication between the main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB is faulty.
0000 There is an error in the communication between the main controller PCB
and the CPU of the DC controller PCB.
E248
0002 Error appears when writing in EEPROM for reader controller PCB.
0003 Error appears when reading from EEPROM for reader controller PCB.
0101 Error appears when turning ON the EEPROM for ADF controller PCB.
0102 Error appears when writing in the EEPROM for ADF controller PCB.
0103 Error appears when reading from the EEPROM for ADF controller PCB.
E315
16-5
Chapter 16
Code
Description
0300 Cubic timeout
Remedy
- Turn off/on the power switch. Replace the PCB for frequent error
occurrence.
0003 There is an error in the communication between the finisher and the punch - Check the communication between the saddle stitcher controller PCB and
unit.
the finisher controller PCB.
E505
E514
- Turn off the main power; check the DC controller PCB and the finisher
controller PCB for wiring; check the 24-V system fuse; then, turn the main
power back on.
- Turn off the main power; check the DC controller PCB and the puncher
controller PCB for wiring; then, check the 24-V system fuse; then, turn the
main power back on.
8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the trailing edge assist
motor has rotated for a specific period of time.
E519
0002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the gear change motor
has rotated for a specific period of time.
E530
16-6
Chapter 16
Code
Description
8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the front alignment
motor has rotated for a specific period of time.
Remedy
1. Check the aligning plate home position sensor. Is it normal?
2. Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the aligning
plate front motor. Is it normal?
3. Is there any mechanical obstacle in the path in which the aligning plate
moves?
4. Try replacing the aligning plate front motor. Is the problem corrected?
8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the front alignment
motor has rotated for a specific period of time.
E531
E532
8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the stapler shift motor
has rotated for a specific period of time.
E535
8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the swing motor has
rotated for a specific period of time.
E537
16-7
Chapter 16
Code
Description
Remedy
8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the swing motor has 1. Check the aligning plate rear home position sensor. Is it normal?
rotated for a specific period of time.
2. Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the aligning
plate rear motor. Is it normal?
3. Is there a mechanical obstacle in the path of the aligning plate?
4. Try replacing the aligning plate rear motor. Is the problem corrected?
8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the swing motor has
rotated for a specific period of time.
E540
1. Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are they normal?
2. Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray
shift motor. Is it normal?
3. Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism?
4. Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
8003 The tray 1 closing detect switch is activated while the tray 1 is operating.
8004 Clock signal input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift motor has been
driven for 0.2 second.
8005 The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock detection signal
turned ON.
8006 The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray 1 shift motor has
been driven for 1 second.
8007 The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 1 shift motor is
at a stop.
E542
1. Check the No. 2 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal?
2. Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the No. 2 tray
shift motor. Is it normal?
3. Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism?
4. Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
E584
0002 The shutter open sensor does not go on. (The shutter does not open.)
E590
16-8
Chapter 16
Code
Description
Remedy
8001 The punch home position sensor is not detected even when the punch motor - Check the punch home position sensor, horizontal registration motor, and
has been driven for 200 msec.
punch driver PCB; thereafter, turn off and then back on the main power.
8002 The puncher does not detect the punch home position sensor while the
motor is at rest at time of punch motor initialization.
E591
E593
E5F0
0002 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not go off even
when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1 sec.
paper positioning plate motor (M4S), paper positioning plate home
position sensor (PI7S)
E5F1
16-9
Chapter 16
Code
Description
Remedy
0001 The number of detection pulses of the paper folding motor clock sensor is - Check the paper folding motor (M2S) and the paper folding motor clock
lower than a specific value.
sensor (PI4S).
paper folding motor (M2S), paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S)
0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor does not change even
when the paper folding motor has been driven for 3 sec.
paper folding motor (M2S), paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S)
E5F2
0002 The guide home position sensor does not go off even when the guide motor
has been driven for 1 sec.
guide motor (M3S), guide home position sensor (PI13S)
E5F3
0002 The aligning plate home position sensor does not go off even when the
aligning motor has been driven for 1 sec.
alignment motor (M5S), aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S)
E5F4
0002 the stitching home position sensor does not go off even when the stitching
motor (rear) has been driven in normal direction for 0.5 sec or more.
stitching motor (rear, M6S), stitching home position sensor (rear, MS5S)
E5F5
0002 The stitching home position sensor does not go off even when the stitching
motor (front) has been driven in normal direction for 0.5 sec or more.
stitching motor (front, M7S), stitching home position sensor (front, MS7S)
E5F6
16-10
Chapter 16
Code
Description
8001 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not go on even when
the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
paper pushing plate motor (M8S), paper pushing plate home position
sensor (PI14S)
Remedy
- Check the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) and the paper pushing plate
home position sensor (PI14S).
8002 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not go off even when
the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec.
paper pushing plate motor (M8S), paper pushing plate home position
sensor (PI14S)
8003 The number of detection pulses of the paper pushing plate motor clock
- Check the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) and the paper pushing plate
sensor is lower than a specific value.
motor clock sensor (PI1S).
paper pushing plate motor (M8S), paper pushing plate motor clock sensor
(PI1S)
8004 The paper pushing plate leading edge sensor does not go off even when the - Check the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) and the paper pushing plate
paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec.
leading edge position sensor (PI15S).
paper pushing plate motor (M8S), paper pushing plate leading edge
position sensor (PI15S)
8005 The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does not go on even
when the paper pushing plate has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
paper pushing plate motor (M8S), paper pushing plate leading edge
position sensor (PI15S)
E5F9
0002 With any of the following sensors identifying its respective cover as being - Check the front cover switch (MS2S) and the delivery cover switch
closed, the front cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more (MS3S).
after the start of initial rotation or printing.
- inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
- front cover switch (MS2S), delivery cover switch (MS3S)
0003 With any of the following sensors identifying its respective cover as being - Check the delivery cover switch (MS3S).
closed, the delivery cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or
more from the start of initial rotation or printing:
- inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
- delivery cover switch (MS3S)
E602
16-11
Chapter 16
Code
Description
Remedy
0001 [Cause] HD detection error: the HD cannot be detected; the machine fails - See details for E602.
to turn ready; an error state is returned.
[Description] at time of Bootrom processing, BARSAC is started up and
mounted (usrIde).
[Timing] once at power-on
0002 [Cause] start-up file absent: the main CPU program does not exist on the
HD (/BOOTDEV/BOOT/and lower).
[Description] at time of Bootrom processing, when the system files are
being loaded (usrIde).
[Timing] once at start-up
0006 [Cause] SubBootable compatible with the PDL type does not exist in /
BOOTDEV/BOOT.
[Description] when SubBoot in oclibroot is being loaded
[Timing] once at start-up of Bootable
0007 [Cause] ICC-Profile compatible with the PDL type does not exist in /
- See details for E602.
BOOTDEV/PDL.
[Description] beginning of oclibroot; the PDL team function is called and
determined
[Timing] once at start-up of Bootable
2000 error in the authentication between the host machine and the encryption
board
- Check the encryption board connection, plug off/in the connector and turn
off/on the power switch.
- Perform the key-clear.
- Check the encryption board connection, plug off/in the connector and turn
off/on the power switch.
- Perform the key-clear.
- Replace the encryption board and reinstall the HDD format and SYSTEM
of SST
- Replace LAN-BARSAC board -> replace the main board
E604
E609
- Add memory.
E610
16-12
The HDD encryption key is faulty. (hardware composition error, initialization error, ID key error, ID processing error)
Chapter 16
Code
Description
0001 There is no encryption board.
Remedy
- Check the hardware composition.
0101 The attempt to initialize the memory used for storage of the key has failed. - Turn off and then on the main power.
0102 The attempt to initialize the encryption processing area has failed.
retried reboot due to SRAM crash and the like during the shutdown recovery job execution
0000 SRAM data were broken and the stored job information cannot be read; this Clear SRAM to cancel the shutdown recovery job.
causes the repeated reboot trials to recover the power shutdown, and thus
the redundant job transmission. This phenomenon triggers E code.
E612
error in postponement
Timing: when starting the host machine
0000 other errors
Write the correct license and new serial numbers and turn off/on the power
Unlikely errors except the errors shown below
switch.
Write the correct license and new serial numbers and turn off/on the power
switch.
0001 error in the license checksum
Unmatched license checksum
0002 error in the machine code
Different machines are specified by the old and new machine codes,
respectively.
0003 error in the new serial number
No data is entered in the new serial number field
0004 error in old serial numbers
The license serial number is unmatched with SoftID
0005 error in postponement
- Turn off and then on the main power.
The license is written although postponement has already been performed
once.
E674
There is a fault in the communication between the fax controller PCB (2-line) and the main controller PCB.
0001 An attempt to set fax device mode has failed.
E710
- Check the connection of the cable between the fax controller PCB (2-line)
and the main controller PCB.
- Replace the ROM DIMM of the fax controller PCB (2-line).
- Replace the fax controller PCB (2-line).
- Replace the main controller PCB.
E711
16-13
Chapter 16
Code
Description
Remedy
0001 After power-on, the occurrence of an error has been written 4 times in 1.5 - Check the connection of the cable.
sec to the error register of the communications IC on the main controller
PCB.
E713
E717
E719
0002 An IPC error has occurred while the coin vendor is in operation.
The IPC may have an open circuit, or the IPC communication cannot be
recovered.
The pickup/delivery signal line has an open circuit.
An illegal connection has been detected.
0003 While a unit price is being obtained at start-up, an error has occurred in the
communication with the coin vendor.
0011 An error has occurred at card reader start-up.
The card reader that was connected before power-off is not connected at
power-on.
0012 An IPC error has occurred while the card reader is in operation.
The IPC may have an open circuit, or the IPC communication cannot be
recovered.
E730
100A An error has occurred that can be fatal to the system (e.g., initialization
error).
9004 There is a fault in the PAI communication with an outside controller.
9005 There is a fault in video connection with an external controller.
A006 absence of PDL response: there is no PDL response because of a fault in or - Execute PDL resetting.
the absence of Subbootable.
- Turn off and then on the main power.
- Check the connection of the SURF board.
- Re-install the firmware.
- Replace the main controller PCB.
A007 There is a mismatch in version between the machine control software and - Execute PDL resetting.
the PDL control software.
- Turn off and then on the main power.
- Execute full formatting and install the system software.
B013 The font data is corrupted.
E732
E733
16-14
Chapter 16
Code
Description
0000 The attempt at communication with the printer fails at start-up.
0001 There is a DDI-P communication error.
0010 DDI-P communication error
Remedy
- Check the connection of the cable between the DC controller and the main
controller.
- Check the power supply of the printer. (Check to see if initialization takes
place at start-up.)
- Replace the DC controller PCB or the main controller PCB.
DC controller cannot detect Vsync signal even after 2 minutes elapsed from
register setting completed in the controller.
E740
E744
0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too big.
0003 There is no language file that is described in CONfig.txt on the HDD.
0004 A switchover to a language file on the HDD cannot be made.
E746
1000 The boot ROM in question is one designed for a different model.
E748
E804
- Replace the UFR board with one for the model in question.
There is a DC power supply fan error/there is an IH power supply cooling fan error.
0000 The DC power supply fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec or more - Check the connection of the connector.
even when the DC power fan is on.
- Replace the fan.
0001 The IH power supply cooling fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec or - Check the connection of the connector.
more even when the IH power supply cooling fan is on.
- Replace the fan.
0002 The accessories power supply cooling fan stop signal has been detected for - Check the connection of the connector.
5 sec or more even when the accessories power supply cooling fan is on. - Replace the fan.
E805
0002 The feed fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec even when the feed fan - Check the connection of the connector.
is on.
- Replace the fan.
E808
E821
E824
E840
16-15
Chapter 16
Code
Description
Remedy
0001 While the shutter is in operation, the sensor signal is not detected and, in
addition, it is still not detected after 3 retries.
- Check the connection of the connector of the shutter motor and the shutter
HP sensor.
- check the mounting of the pin used to match the shutter gear phase of the
fixing unit (See descriptions under "Points to Note When Mounting the
Fixing Roller.")
- Replace the shutter HP sensor and the shutter motor.
YY
Description
01
02
The system software for the main 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST; then, re-install
CPU is absent.
the system software, and turn off and then on the power.
2. Replace the HDD.
An interrupt has been detected
during writing to BootDevice.
00
03
04
05
06
07
16-16
Remedy
1. Turn off the power, and check the HDD cable for disconnection; then, turn the
power back on.
2. Turn on the power, and put your ear or finger against the HDD to see if the disk inside it is rotating.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the main controller PCB.
1. Turn off the power, and turn it back on while holding down the 1 and 9 keys.
See that the auto write interrupt sector repair routine starts and the control panel goes
black.
2. See the progress of operation on the display (at the start, the upper left cursor
will flash). When the display goes white, turn off and then back on the power.
3. Start in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST. Then, re-install
the system software, and turn off and then back on the power.
No incidence.
No incidence.
Error in sub CPU system
undetected.
1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST; then, re-install
the system software, and turn off and then on the power.
2. Replace the HDD.
1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST; then, re-install
the system software, and turn off and then on the power.
2. Replace the HDD.
Chapter 16
T-16-4
XX
YY
At start-up
XX
CHKTYPE
Partition
Description
03
05
During operation
00,01,02,04
11,2
1
13,2
5
Remedy
01
FSTDEV
03
FSTCDEV
04
APL_GEN
general data
05
TMP_GEN
TMP_FAX
TMP_PSS
06
07
Remedy
IMG_MNG
02
10,12,14,22,23,24
*1
*5
*3
*8
*5
08
PDLDEV
09
BOOTDEV
10
APL_MEAP
MEAP application
*1
11
APL_SEND
*2
*5
12
APL_KEEP
*3
*8
13
APL_LOG
*1
*5
FF
Not
identified
*4
*7
*9
*10
*11
*12
T-16-5
YY
Description
Remedy
1. Set '0' to CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power.
2. Type in CHK-TYPE that corresponds to the partition in question, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and
then back on the power.
*1
1. Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI.
2. Set '0' to CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; thereafter, turn off and then on the power.
3. Start download mode, and execute full formatting using the SST; thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.
*2
03
*3
*4
1. Set '0' to CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power.
2. Execute HD-CLEAR by setting '1', '2', '3', and '5' to CHK-type; then, turn off and then back on the power.
*5
1. Type in CHK-TYPE corresponding to the partition in question, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then
back on the power.
2. Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.
*6
The machine does not permit execution of HD-CLEAR in service mode (to prevent loss of partition information
such as address book and filter data).
1. Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI.
2. Start download mode from service mode; then, execute full formatting using
the SST, and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.
05
*7
1. Execute HD-CLEAR by setting "1', '2', '3', and '5' to CHK-TYPE; then, turn off and then back on the power.
2. Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.
Recovery operation for the Boot partition necessarily requires the use of the SST in safe mode.
1. Start in safe mode, and execute full formatting in the SST, and re-install the system software. Thereafter, turn
off and then on the power.
2. Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.
*8
*9
00
01
02
04
*10
11
21
*11
13
25
16-17
Chapter 16
YY
*12
10
12
14
22
23
24
Description
Remedy
1. Start up in safe mode; then, execute full formatting using the SST, and re-install the system software. Thereafter,
turn off and then back on the power.
2. Replace the HDD, and re-install the system software.
Remedy
In user mode, set the IP address; thereafter, turn off and then on the machine.
There is no response.
The server is not ready for file transmission.
The network is cut for file transmission. (An attempt to connect to the target Check the network.
of transmission may have failed, or there is an open circuit in the middle.)
Check TCP/IP.
The machine's TCP/IP is not in operation.
In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (IP address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP).
If the login information for the LDAP server is set to 'use (security
authentication)', the host name in question cannot be identified.
16-18
Chapter 16
Cause
Remedy
1. In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (gateway address of the IP address settings).
2. In user mode, check the LDAP server settings.
3. Check to see that the LDAP server is operating normally.
4. If the login information of the LDAP server is set to 'use (security authentication)',
check to see if the UDP packet is blocked by a filter.
In user mode, check the LDAP server settings (user name, password).
A timeout condition has occurred, and a search cannot be completed. Check the settings.
The search cannot be completed within the specified period of time.
In user mode, increase the length of time before a timeout condition occurs (part of
LDAP server settings).
An upper limit for search results has been exceeded. If the desired address is not indicated in the results, change the search conditions.
The number of matches has exceeded the number of results brought up in
response to the search.
The search conditions include a character that cannot be used for the selected server.
The symbol \ is used in the search condition.
Remove the symbol \ from the search condition, and try once again.
The combination of characters used in the search condition fails to make up Check to be sure that the combination of characters is in keeping with the rule; then, try
a correct search condition.
once again.
There must be as many "s as there are "s
The symbol * is not included within parentheses.
If LDAP of the server and the character code is version 2 (JIS), there is a
character that is not part of the ASCII code (0x20-0x7E).
Remove any character that cannot be used; then, try once gain.
The version setting of the server is wrong, and the search cannot be initiated. Check the settings.
In user mode, the LDAP server settings (server LDAP version and character In user mode, set the LDAP server settings so that the LDAP server version and the
code) is set for version 3; however, the LDAP server is operating for version character code are both version 2.
2.
Remedy
# 001
There is a paper or original jam.
# 003
A communication lasting longer than a specific period of time (64 min) will 1. Decrease the resolution for transmission.
cause an error state.
2. In the case of reception, ask the source to decrease the resolution or divide the
original.
# 005
The target does not respond within 35 sec.
Check to be sure that the target is ready to communicate; then, try once again.
# 009
There is no paper.
Supply paper.
16-19
Chapter 16
Cause
Remedy
# 011
The original to be transmitted is not placed properly.
# 012
The target is out of recording paper, and transmission has failed.
# 018
There is no response to a redial attempt.
Check to make sure that the target is ready for communication; then, try once again.
Check to make sure that the target is ready for communication; then, try once again.
The settings do not match the settings of the target, and the transmission has Check to make sure that the target is ready for communication; then, try once again.
failed.
# 022
The particulars of the group address selected as the forwarding target may
have been deleted, or there is no more than a user box, thus causing the
transmission to fail.
# 037
There is a shortage of memory, not permitting reception.
# 080
F code is not set on the target.
# 081
The appropriate password is not set on the target.
# 099
The transmission has been suspended in the middle.
Start over.
# 102
There is a mismatch of F code or password.
Check the F code and the password of the target, and start over.
# 107
There is a shortage of memory, not permitting transmission.
# 701
The group ID set when the job was introduced no longer exits. Or, the
password has been changed.
Type in the correct group ID or the ID No. (using the keypad); then, start over.
# 702
The memory is full, not permitting transmission.
1. Wait a while. Try again until the ongoing transmission of a job ends.
2. Try not to transmit to too many addresses at once; rather, try dividing the address into
smaller groups.
# 703
The memory image area is full, not permitting further writing.
1. Wait a while. Try transmitting after the ongoing transmission of a job ends.
2. Remove files from the Box; if the operation still fails to return to normal, turn off and
then back on the main power.
# 704
An error has occurred while an attempt is made to obtain address
information from the address book.
# 705
16-20
Check the settings of the address, and try once again; if the operation is still not normal,
try turning off and then back on the main power.
Chapter 16
Cause
Remedy
The image data size is in excess of the upper limit imposed on transmission Try changing the upper limit imposed on transmission data size as part of the
data size set in user mode, thus causing suspension of transmission.
communication control settings of system control settings (user mode). When selecting
low resolution mode or using i-fax, try decreasing the number of images to send at one
time so that the transmission will not be in excess of the upper limit imposed on transfer
data size.
# 706
An address table is being imported from or to the remote UI; or, a different Start over once again.
transmission component is being used.
# 711
All memory of the Box is used.
# 712
The Box is full of files.
# 713
The file has been removed from the Box before transmitting the URL.
Put the file in question back into the Box, and start over.
# 751
The server is yet to start up. The network is disconnected. (The connection Check the target. Check the network.
to the target may have failed, or the connection may have been cut in the
middle.)
# 752
The SMTP server name of the e-main/i-fax in question may be wrong, or the Using the network settings of the system control setup (user mode), check the SMTP
server in question is yet to start up. Or, the appropriate domain name or e- server name, domain name, and e-mail address. Check to see that the SMTP server is
mail address has not been set. Or, the network has been disconnected.
operating normally. Check the connection of the network.
# 753
A TCP/IP error has occurred in the course of e-mail transmission. (e.g.,
socket, select error)
Check the condition of the network cable and the connector. If the operation does not
return to normal, try turning off and then back on the main power of the machine.
# 754
The server has not been started up for transmission, or the network is
disconnected. Or, the target settings are wrong.
Check the server and the network. Check the settings of the target.
# 755
The TCP/IP settings are not operating normally, thus not permitting
transmission.
When the machine is started up, its IP address is not assigned by means of
DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP.
# 756
In system control setup (user mode), 'use NetWare' is set to 'off' in NetWare In network settings of system control setup (user mode), set 'use NetWare' to 'on'.
settings.
# 801
While e-mail is being transmitted or i-fax is transmitted/received, the
1. Check to see that SMTP is operating normally.
communication with the SMTP server encountered a timeout error because 2. Check the condition of the network.
of a factor associated with the main server.
While an SMTP connection is being used, the SMTP server has returned an
error.
The address setting is not correct.
When data is transmitted to the file server, an error has occurred owing to a
factor associated with the server.
16-21
Chapter 16
Cause
Remedy
An attempt has been made to transmit data to an address not authorized for Check the address setting.
a write operation.
In the course of transmitting data (file server), it was found that there is a file Change the setting of the file server so that overwriting may be permitted.
having the same name, and an overwrite operation to the file is prohibited.
In relation to transmission (file server), the folder name or the password that Check the address setting.
has been specified is wrong.
# 802
In the system control setup (user mode), the settings of the SMTP server for In the network settings under system control settings (user mode), check the SMTP
e-mail/i-fax are wrong.
server name and the DNS server name. Check to see if the DNS server is operating
The setting of the DNS server is wrong.
normally.
The attempt to connect to the DNS server has failed.
# 803
Before all pages have been transmitted, the target has cut off the network.
# 804
When an attempt is made to transmit to the file server, it has been found that Check the address.
no match exits in the specified directory.
Set the server so that you will be authorized to access the folder.
# 806
When an attempt to transmit to the file server is made, it has been found that Change the user name or the password of the address.
the specified user name or password is wrong.
# 810
When an attempt is made to receive i-fax, a POP server connection error has 1. In user mode, check the POP server name setting.
occurred.
2. Check the operation of the POP server.
3. Check the condition of the network.
While a connection is made to the POP server, an error has been returned by 1. In user mode, check the POP server name setting.
the POP server.
2. Check the operation of the POP server.
3. Check the condition of the network.
While a connection is made to the POP server, a timeout error has occurred 1. In user mode, check the POP server name setting.
owing to a factor associated with the server.
2. Check the operation of the POP server.
3. Check the condition of the network.
# 815
If a file that has been transmitted to the file server is being printed, you will Wait a while, and then try once again. Or, change the NetWare server settings of the
not be able to log in to the server in question.
target, or stop PServer.
# 818
The data that has been received is in a format that does not permit printing. Ask the source to change the file format and transmit it once again.
# 819
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot be handled (i.e., its Ask the target to check the settings and transmit it once again.
MIME information is illegal).
# 820
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot be handled (i.e.,
BASE64 or Unicode is illegal).
16-22
Ask the source to check the settings and transmit it once again.
Chapter 16
Cause
Remedy
# 821
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot be handled (i.e., TIFF Ask the target to check the settings and transmit once again.
interpretation error has occurred).
# 822
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot be handled (i.e., the Ask the source to check the settings and transmit once again.
image cannot be decoded).
# 827
The data that has been received is of a type that cannot be handed (i.e., part Ask the source to check the settings and transmit once again.
of its MIME information is not supported).
# 828
HTML data has been received.
# 829
The data that is being received consists of 100 pages or more.
The machine is designed so that it removes data for the 100th and subsequent pages and
prints or saves in memory up to the 999th page. Ask the source to transmit the remaining
pages one again.
# 830
A DSN error notice has been received because of the following: the i-fax 1. Check the i-fax address and the target settings.
address or the target settings are wrong, or the data of the file that has been 2. In user mode, decrease the upper limit imposed on the size of transmission data so
transmitted is greater than the size permitted by the mail server.
that it is lower than the size permitted by the mail server.
3. Check the condition of the mail server, DNS server, and network.
# 831
An attempt to receive i-fax in SMTP has failed because of the reception/
printing range settings made as part of the IP address range setting in user
mode.
Change the reception/printing range settings made as part of the IP address range setting
in user mode.
# 832
In user mode, the e-mail setting or the network setting is yet to be made,
causing a mail server fault and, thus, preventing reception of MDN
(transmission confirmation) mail.
1. In user mode, check the DNS setting, e-mail/i-fax setting, and IP address made as part
of the network settings.
2. Check the condition of the mail server and the DNS server.
# 833
The network settings have not been made in user mode or there is a mailserver related fault, thus preventing the transmission of the mail (MDN;
transmission acknowledgement).
1. In user mode, check the DNS setting, e-mail/i-fax setting, and IP address made as part
of the network settings.
2. Check the condition of the mail server and the DNS server.
# 834
The i-fax address or the condition settings of the target may be wrong, there Check the specified i-fax address and the target conditions.
may be a fault in the network or the mail server, or the target may have
encountered a memory full condition, thus causing an MDS error notice.
# 835
The number of text lines is more than the maximum number of lines
permitted for i-fax.
Ask the target to decrease the number of text lines and try once again.
# 837
A request has been made by a host that comes under the restrictions imposed Check the setting of the IP address range in user mode. The attempt to access in question
by 'IP address range setting' in user mode.
may be illegal.
# 839
The SMTP authentication (SMTPAUTH) user name or password for e-mail/ Check the user name and password used for SMTP authentication (SMTPAUTH) as
i-fax (network settings) may be wrong.
part of the network settings under system control settings (user mode).
16-23
Chapter 16
Cause
Remedy
# 841
In relation to an attempt for transmission for e-mail/i-fax, there is no coding 1. Set 'SSL' to 'OFF' as part of the network settings under system control settings (user
algorithm that may be used in common with the mail server.
mode).
2. Add a coding algorithm that may be used in common (mail server settings).
# 842
In relation to an attempt for transmission of e-mail/i-fax, a request has been 1. Set 'SSL' to 'OFF' as part of the network settings under the system control settings
made for the use of a client certificate by the mail server.
(user mode).
2. Change the mail server settings so that it will not request a client certificate.
# 843
The time used by the KDC (key distribution center) server and the time used 1. Correct the time as part of the date/time settings under the system control settings
by the machine are different significantly.
(user mode).
2. Correct the time used by the KDC (key distribution center) server.
# 847
The memory of the Box has been used up, not permitting the storage of the Remove unnecessary files from the fax box or the system box.
received file in the fax box.
# 851
The remaining memory of the machine is running short.
Check the remaining memory of the machine; then, remove unnecessary files for the
Box.
There are more than 100 files in the specified box, not permitting additional Remove unnecessary files from the specified box.
storage.
# 852
The main power switch has been turned off while a job is being executed,
causing an error.
Check to see that the main power switch is on; as necessary, try once again.
# 899
The transmission of e-mail or i-fax has ended. However, the transmission
has gone through multiple servers, and there is no way of finding out
whether the transmission has reached the target.
# 995
The reservation for the transmission has been cancelled.
Jam
01xx
delay jam
02xx
stationary jam
0Axx
residual jam
0Bxx
T-16-9
16-24
Code
Sensor
Notation
xx01
PS29
xx02
PS28
xx03
PS24
xx04
PS25
xx05
PS26
xx06
PS27
xx07
PS32
xx08
PS33
xx0B
PS19
Chapter 16
Code
Sensor
Notation
xx0C
PS20
xx0D
PS21
xx0E
PS22
xx0F
PS4
xx10
PS35
xx11
PS36
xx12
PS46
xx13
reversal sensor 2
PS38
xx14
delivery sensor 1
PS37
xx15
PS34
xx16
PS30
xx17
PS52
xx18
PS51
jam
1001
1002
1003
1004
1101
1102
1103
1104
1200
1300
power-on jam
1400
1500
1644
punch jam
1645
1791
1792
1793
17A1
17A2
17A3
1786
1787
1788
17B1
17B2
17B3
17B4
17B5
17B6
17B7
17B8
17B9
17BA
17BB
17C1
17C2
17C3
17C4
17C5
17C6
17C7
17C8
17C9
17CA
16-25
Chapter 16
Code
jam
17CB
17D1
17D7
17D8
16-26
Sensor
Notation
Description
0001
PCB2
The post-separation sensor does not detect paper when paper has been moved 452 mm after the
start of separation.
0002
PCB2
- The separation sensor detects paper when paper has been moved 500 mm (if extra-length, +200
mm) -45.5 mm after registration pickup.
- the sensor goes on (paper with hole) before paper has been fed 12 mm after the detection of the
trailing edge; the separation sensor detects paper after paper has been fed 50 mm from when the
separation senor has gone on.
0003
registration sensor
PI1
The registration sensor does not detect paper a feed length of 134.8 mm after the post-separation
sensor has gone on.
0004
registration sensor
PI1
The read sensor goes off before the registration sensor goes off.
0005
PCB3
- The read sensor does not detect paper a feed length of 364.2 mm (182.1 x 2) from the point of
registration.
- The read sensor does not detect paper a feed length of 157.4 mm (78.7 x 2) from the point of
No. 2 registration.
0006
PCB3
- The read sensor detects paper a feed length of 500 mm (if extra-length, +200 mm) after the start
of feed, resumed after a temporary stop for reading.
- At time of LTRR/LGL identification in mix mode, the read sensor detects paper a feed length
of 514 mm after the start of feed from the edging wait point.
0007
PCB4
If not in high-speed duplexing mode, the delivery sensor does not detect paper when paper is
moved 132.1 mm after it has reached the leading edge lower stream roller with reference to the
activation of the read sensor.
0008
PCB4
The delivery sensor detects paper a feed length of 161.9 mm after the trailing edge read end point.
0009
PI12
-When feeding 4 times the distance between the No.1 registration roller and the No.2 registration
sensor after re-pickup from the No.1 registration roller in the simplex pickup from the tray, the
No.2 registration sensor does not turn on. (82.2 X 4)mm
-When feeding 4 times the distance between the reversal roller + 20 mm and the No.2 registration
sensor in the reversal duplexing pickup from the reversal duplexing path, the No.2 registration
sensor does not turn on. (22.6 X 4)mm
0010
PI12
The No.2 registration sensor detects papers when feeding the length of 500 X 2 mm after the No.2
registration sensor turned on.
0011
PI11
The No.2 read sensor does not turn on when feeding twice the distance between the read position
and the No.2 read sensor after the start of reading a document. (47.4 X 2)mm
0012
PI11
The read sensor detects papers after feeding the length of 500 mm (+200 mm for the long one)
in the detection of the No.2 read sensor
0042
PCB2
0043
registration sensor
PI1, PI12
0044
registration sensor
PI1, PI12
0045
read sensor
PCB3, PI11
0046
read sensor
PCB3, PI11
0047
PCB4
0048
PCB4
0049
PI12
0050
PI12
0051
PI11
0052
PI11
0071
TIMING NG
0073
TIMING NG
0090
PS502
0091
PS502
0092
PI6
The cover has been opened while in operation (drive system in operation).
Chapter 16
Code
0093
Sensor
Notation
PI6
Description
The cover has been opened while in operation (paper wait).
pickup/feed system
Description
0001
0002
0003
0004
0008
06
fixing system
0003
11
0001
30
high-voltage system
32
33
fan system
0001
0002
0003
0001
0002
0001
0009
0016
60
0001
61
0001
staple absent
62
0001
stitch absent
65
0001
16-27
Contents
Contents
17.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 Service mode screen configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ........................................................................................................................................ 17-1
17.1.3 Exiting service modes .............................................................................................................................................................. 17-2
17.1.4 Backing Up Service Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.1.5 Initial screen............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-2
17.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen................................................................................................................................................. 17-3
17.1.7 Sub-item screen........................................................................................................................................................................ 17-3
Chapter 17
17.1 Outline
17.1.1 Service mode screen configuration
0015-5495
)(2,8)(
Reset key
Initial screen
(Level 1)
Initial screen
(Level 2)
)(2)
(Select an item.)
Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 1)
(Select an item.)
Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 2)
Sub-item screen
(Level 1)
Sub-item screen
(Level 1)
Sub-item screen
(Level 2)
Previous/next page
Sub-item screen
(Level 2)
Previous/next page
F-17-1
COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY
SORTER
BOARD
I/O
ADJUST
Adjustment mode
FUNCTION
Operation/inspection mode
OPTION
TEST
COUNTER
Counter mode
F-17-2
To execute a copier operation using a service mode, remove the cable from the external controller or the cable from the network before entering the desired mode.
Take care when using the FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode) mode, as the copier may malfunction and be damaged if a print job is received from outside
while an operation is executing with this mode in effect.
17-1
Chapter 17
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
F-17-3
When using the ADJUST, FUNCTION or OPTION service mode, be sure to turn the main power switch ON/OFF after exiting the mode.
[1]
[2]
F-17-4
17-2
Chapter 17
COPIER
Initial items
FEEDER
Touch an item to
select it.
SORTER
BOARD
F-17-5
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
Main items
Touch an item to
select it.
VERSION
USER
ACC-STS
ANALOG
Intermediate items
CST-STS
Touch an item to
select it.
JAM
ERR
F-17-6
Display
I/O
<VERSION>
Selected
intermediate
item
Test
Counter
DC-CON
IP
PANEL
ANAPRO
POWER
Sub-items
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
F-17-7
17-3
Chapter 17
Display
I/O
xxxxx
Counter
<ADJ-XY>
ADJ-X
Test
ADJ-X
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
Sets entered value.
Clear
Start
Description
Level
Use it to indicate the ROM version of a particular PCB (copier and accessory).
-if <R-CON XX.YY>, XX indicates the version number and the YY, R&D control number.
-if no PCB is connected, the indication will be <-,->.
17-4
DC-CON
R-CON
1
1
PANEL
FEEDER
SORTER
FAX
indicates the ROM version of the fax control PCB (for 2-line configuration).
NIB
SDL-STCH
MN-CONT
DIAG-DVC
RUI
PUNCH
LANG-EN
LANG-FR
LANG-DE
LANG-IT
LANG-JP
JAVA-VM
MEAP
OCR-CN
OCR-JP
OCR-KR
OCR-TW
BOOTROM
TTS-JA
TTS-EN
WEB-BRWS
HELP
FIN-INS
Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
Sub-item
Description
WEBDAV
TIMESTMP
LANG-CS
LANG-DA
LANG-EL
LANG-ES
LANG-ET
LANG-FI
LANG-HU
LANG-KO
LANG-NL
LANG-NO
LANG-PL
LANG-PT
LANG-RU
LANG-SL
LANG-SV
LANG-TW
LANG-ZH
LANG-BU
LANG-CR
LANG-RM
LANG-SK
LANG-TK
LANG-CA
MEDIA-JA
MEDIA-EN
MEDIA-EL
MEDIA-CS
MEDIA-TK
MEDIA-SK
MEDIA-ZH
MEDIA-FR
MEDIA-IT
MEDIA-DE
Level
17-5
Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
Sub-item
Description
MEDIA-ES
MEDIA-ET
17-6
MEDIA-RM
MEDIA-CR
MEDIA-BU
MEDIA-TW
MEDIA-SV
MEDIA-SL
MEDIA-RU
MEDIA-PT
MEDIA-PL
MEDIA-NO
MEDIA-NL
MEDIA-KO
MEDIA-HU
MEDIA-FI
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
Sub-item
Description
MEDIA-CA
Level
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
<ACC-STS>
T-17-2
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
Sub-item
Description
FEEDER
Level
SORTER
DECK
CARD
DATA-CON
RAM
indicates the size of the memory mounted on the main controller PCB.
1024MB
COINROBO
NIB
PS/PCL
RIP1
0: no; 1: yes
NETWARE
PDL-FNC1
b31 : BDL
b30 : PS
b29 : PCL
b28 : PDF
b27 : LIPS
b26 : N201
b25 : I5577
b24 : ESC/P
b23 : HPGL
b22 : HPGL2
b21 : IMAGING
b20 : KS
b19 : BMLinkS
b18 to b16 : reserved (for possible addition of PDL)
PDL-FNC2
HDD
PCI1/2/3
<ANALOG>
T-17-3
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
Sub-item
Description
TEMP
Level
HUM
ABS-HUM
FIX-U
17-7
Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
Sub-item
Description
FIX-UE
indicates the voltage level of the charger unit [target product: only iR5075]
settings range: 0 to 30 (unit: V)
The setting for the product not targeted is "---".
FIX-SHTR
CAP-VOL
Level
<CST-STS>
T-17-4
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
Sub-item
Description
WIDTH-C3
Level
2
WIDTH-C4
WIDTH-MF
<JAM>
F-17-9
17-8
Chapter 17
5: side paper deck
6: manual feed tray
7: duplexing assembly
<CNTR> indicates the reading of the soft counter used for the source of paper.
<SIZE> indicates the size of paper.
<ERR>
F-17-10
Description
PRIMARY
Level
1
PRE-TR
TR
SP
BIAS
SP-N2
TR-N2
<CCD>
T-17-6
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
Sub-item
Description
TARGET-G
Level
2
GAIN-OG
indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for CCD odd-numbered bits.
GAIN-EG
indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for CCD even-numbered bits.
GAIN-OR
indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for CCD odd-numbered bits.
GAIN-ER
indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for CCD even-numbered bits.
2
2
<DPOT>
T-17-7
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
Sub-item
Description
DPOT-K
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>OFST
potential reflecting the value after execution; in V
Level
1
VL1T
VL1M
VL2M
VDT
17-9
Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
Sub-item
Description
VDM
Level
1
VL2M-P
light-area potential measurement value for developing bias for printer image; in V
VL1M-P
VL1T-P
VDM-P
VDT-P
LLMT-P
PLMT-P
primary charging current limit value setting for printer: 0: normal; 1: error
2
2
LLMT
PLMT
primary charging current limit value setting for copier: 0: normal; 1: error
BIAS-P
BIAS-C
LPOWER-P
LPOWER-C
PRIM-P
PRIM-C
<SENSOR>
T-17-8
COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR
Sub-item
Description
DOC-SZ
indicates the size of the original identified by the original size sensor.
Level
2
<MISC>
T-17-9
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
Sub-item
Description
LPOWER
Level
2
<ALARM-2>
F-17-11
<No.> indicates the order of alarm occurrence; between 1 and 50 (the higher the number, the older the alarm)
<DATE> date of occurrence of the alarm in question
<TIME1> time of occurrence of the alarm in question
<TIME2> time of alarm recovery
<CODE> code of alarm location and alarm code
<DTL> alarm detail code
<CNTR> reading of the total counter at time of alarm occurrence
<ENVRNT>
- Environment Indication
The readings of the environment sensor and the fixing thermistor (main) are indicated as a history of changes in the following: machine inside temperature (deg C),
humidity (%), fixing roller surface (middle; deg C).
17-10
Chapter 17
F-17-12
T-17-10
Item
Description
No.
order of data acquisition (the higher the number, the older the data)
DATE
TIME
D + deg C
E+%
F + deg C
Memo:
The interval at which data is acquired may be changed using the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ENVP-IN.
17.2.2 FEEDER
17.2.2.1 FEEDER List
0015-5507
Description
FEEDSIZE
TRY-WIDE
indicates the distance between original width detecting slides (detecting the width of paper; 0.1 mm).
indicates the distance between the slides used to detect the width of originals in the ADF original tray (between 2 points).
SPSN-LMN
SPSN-RCV
RDSN-LMN
RDSN-RCV
DRSN-LMN
DRSN-RCV
Level
1
17-11
Chapter 17
F-17-13
F-17-14
[A] bit 0
[B] bit 15
[C] address
17.3.2 R-CON
0015-5826
17-12
Address
bit
P001
Description
Remarks
DDIS IF (OPT00-)
0: prohibit operation
DDIS IF (SPRDY)
0: permit operation
DDIS IF (OPTI0)
0: active
size sensor ON
1: ON
1: ON
Chapter 17
Address
bit
P002
0
1
2-3
4
P003
P005
P006
P007
0: normal
0: normal
0: Canon Electronics
0: permit operation
DDIS IF (SCPRDY)
LED control
1: ON
not used
0: original present
0: original present
0: original present
0: original present
DF connection detection
DDIS IF (SRTS)
not used
PC connection IF (TxD)
0: permit reception
PC connection IF (RxD)
0: enable
DDIS IF (SCTS)
0: permit reception
4-7
not used
not used
DDIS IF (OPTI1)
0: active
DDIS IF (OPTO1)
0: active
0: active
1: cover open
1: HP
not used
address bus 16
address bus 17
3-4
5
P009
P008
Remarks
6-7
P004
Description
shift motor CLK
1: normal
address bus 18
not used
ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input
lamp ON signal
1: ON
1: ON
wait signal
0: wait
L light signal
0: active
H light signal
0: active
read signal
0: active
0: enable
not used
0: select
0: select
0: select
0: select
5-7
not used
17.3.3 FEEDER
0015-5829
17-13
Chapter 17
T-17-13
Address
bit
Description
Remarks
P001
read sensor
0: paper present
registration sensor
1: paper present
0: paper present
0: ADF open
3
4-7
P002
P003
P004
clutch drive
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1-6
P005
not used
not used
stamp present/absent
not used
0: stamp present
release HP sensor
1: released
0: paper present
post-separation sensor
0: paper present
LGL sensor
1: paper present
1: AB
not used
P006
0-7
for R&D
P007
0-7
for R&D
P008
0-7
for R&D
P009
0-7
for R&D
P010
0-7
for R&D
0: paper present
17.3.4 SORTER
0015-5831
P001
P002
17-14
bit
Description
Remarks
0: ON
Chapter 17
Address
P003
bit
P005
0: connected
0: ON
P007
P008
P009
P010
P011
not used
not used
not used
0: connected
1: HP
0: open
0: ON
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
0-7
not used
0: locked
0: ON
0: ON
0: detected
0: detected
0: detected
not used
inlet sensor
1: paper present
0: paper present
0: paper present
1: error
0: detected
0: detected
0: detected
not used
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: CCW/0: CW
0: ON
0: locked
solenoid ON signal
0: ON
4-5
P012
not used
3-7
P006
Remarks
6-7
P004
Description
not used
1: paper present
1: ON
1: ON
3
4-7
1: CCW/0: CW
17-15
Chapter 17
Address
P013
P014
bit
1
0: ON
1: ON
EEPROMCLK
1: HP
1: paper present
1: HP
P021
17-16
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
not used
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
not used
6-7
P020
P019
0: ON
5-7
P018
0
2
1: HP
not used
3-7
P017
0: ON
3-7
P016
Remarks
6-7
P015
Description
1: paper present
1: full
stapler HP detection
1: HP
stapler READY
1: ready
stapler LS
1: staple present
1: close
1: HP
1: interference
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: paper present
stapler interlock
1: open
shutter HP sensor
1: HP
1: open
Chapter 17
Address
P022
P023
P024
bit
P026
P027
0: ON
DIPSW_7
0: ON
DIPSW_6
0: ON
DIPSW_5
0: ON
DIPSW_4
0: ON
DIPSW_3
0: ON
DIPSW_2
0: ON
DIPSW_1
0: ON
PUSHSW1
0: ON
PUSHSW2
0: ON
PUSHSW
0: ON
0: paper present
0: paper present
24V detection
0: detected
1: open
0: detected
fan ON signal
1: ON
LED1
0: ON
LED2
0: ON
LED3
0: ON
X4-POWER-ON signal
0: ON
P029
P030
not used
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
solenoid PWM
trimmer PICKUP-TxD
trimmer CPU-RxD
trimmer OUT
0: ON
0: detected
6-7
P028
Remarks
DIPSW_8
5-7
P025
Description
not used
1: detected
1: detected
3-5
1: detected
not used
not used
0: detected
0: detected
0: ON
0: ON
4-7
not used
0-1
not used
1: detected
1: ON
1: ON
1: HP
1: HP
17-17
Chapter 17
Address
P031
P032
P033
P034
bit
1
1: HP
1: close
0: detected
1: HP
1: butting position
trimmer IN (IRQ6*)
0: ON
0: paper present
0: HP
0: paper present
1: detected
1: detected
1: detected
1: detected
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
0: HP
not used
0: paper present
0: HP
not used
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
P037
P038
P039
17-18
0: HP
0: paper present
not used
1: detected
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
4-7
P036
Remarks
4-6
P035
Description
not used
DIPSW_1
0: ON
DIPSW_2
0: ON
DIPSW_3
0: ON
DIPSW_4
0: ON
DIPSW_5
0: ON
DIPSW_6
0: ON
DIPSW_7
0: ON
DIPSW_8
0: ON
not used
PUSHSW1
0: ON
5V detection signal
0: detected
0: detected
download ON signal
not used
LED3
0: ON
LED2
0: ON
LED1
0: ON
power-on signal
0: ON
DIPSW1
0: ON
DIPSW2
0: ON
DIPSW3
0: ON
not used
PCH-OUT
punch HP sensor
1: ON
1: ON
0: detected
Chapter 17
Address
P040
bit
PCH-IN
RxD
2
0
P043
EEPROM-IN
EEPROM-OUT
EEPROM-CLK
EEPROM-CS
0: ON
0: ON
punch motor CW
0: ON
1: ON
0-3
not used
DIPSW4
0: ON
0: ON
PWM
not used
LED1
LED2
0: ON
0: close
BOOTMODE
PUSHSW2
0: ON
PUSHSW1
0: ON
0-4
P044
not used
P042
Remarks
TxD
3-7
P041
Description
0: ON
not used
upper cover sensor
6-7
1: open
not used
P045
P046
P047
AD0
P048
AD1
B5R sensor
P049
AD2
A4R sensor
P050
AD3
B4 sensor
P051
AD6
dust sensor
P052
AD7
A3 sensor
17.3.5 MN-CON
0015-5834
17.3.6 P-CON
0015-5836
bit
Description
Remarks
P001
0: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
10
1: paper present
11
1: paper present
12
0: paper present
13
not used
14
0: paper present
15
1: paper present
17-19
Chapter 17
Address
bit
P002
P003
P004
P005
17-20
Description
Remarks
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
0: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
0: toner low
10
0: toner low
11
1: paper present
12
1: web absent
13
0: paper present
14
shutter HP signal
0: HP/set position
15
0: lock
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
AKM_EX_CLK_ENABLE signal
0:ON
0:ON
0:ON
high-voltage AC ON signal
0:ON
not used
10
11
not used
12
0:ON
13
1:ON
14
1:ON
15
1:ON
1: overheating
1: overheating
1: stop
not used
1: overheating
1: stop
10
1: stop
11
0: connected
12
0: connected
13
0:HP
14
1:OFF
15
1: not connected
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: stop
1: paper present
1: paper present
10
0: present
11
0: present
12
1: paper present
13
1: paper present
14
15
1: not connected
Chapter 17
Address
bit
P006
0
1-6
P007
P008
P009
P010
Description
Remarks
1: locked
not used
hopper MERR
1: error
bottle MERR
1: error
not used
10
0: connected
11
0: full
12
0: paper present
13
1:HP
14
1:HP
15
0: connected
0-7
not used
1: paper present
1: jam
10
IH-PID0
0:ON
11
IH-PID1
0:ON
12
0: error
13
0: error
14
0: error
15
0:12V ON
0: line
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
not used
0: open
10
0:ON
0: open
11
0: open
12
0: open
13
0: open
14
0: open
15
1: open
1: not connected
0:ON
0:ON
0:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ENABLE
1:ON
10
0:ON
11
1: ON (guide at low)
12
1: ON (guide at up)
13
1:ON
14
1:ON
15
1:ON
0:ON
0:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
17-21
Chapter 17
Address
bit
P011
0:ON
0:ON
0:ON
not used
0:ON
0: forward/1:
reverse
1: forward/0:
reverse
1:ON
1:ON
0:ON
0:ON
P012
4-5
P013
P014
P015
P016
P017
P018
Remarks
not used
0:ON
1:ON
0:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
not used
0:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:OFF
1:ON
1:ON
counter (total)
1:ON
not used
1:ON
1:ON
DDI-PPRDY
DDI-CTS
DDI-PO0
DDI-PO1
DDI-PO2
DDI-PO3
DDI-PO4
DDI-PO5
DDI-CPRDY
DDI-PRSST
DDI-RST
DDI-PI0
not used
DDI-PI2
DDI-PI3
DDI-PI4
IMGON_FLG
2-7
17-22
Description
not used
1:ON
1: jam
Chapter 17
Address
bit
P019
0
1
2-4
P020
not used
not used
not used
DDI-TxD
not used
DDI-RxD
DDI-POWER
DDI-SCNST
6-7
not used
P022
0-7
not used
P023
FIN-RESET
FIN-MODE
2-7
P024
P025
P026
P027
0-4
not used
not used
DMA-END-INT
DMA-REQ-INT
1: paper present
1: upper limit
1: paper present
1: paper present
1:ON
not used
0: closed
1:ON
1: paper present
1: lower limit
1: connected
1: closed
deck ID1
1: connected
deck ID2
0: connected
not used
1:ON
1:ON
not used
3
4-5
P028
Remarks
not used
1-4
P021
Description
1:ON
not used
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
3-7
not used
17-23
Chapter 17
T-17-16
COPIER > ADJUST > AE
Sub-item
Description
AE-TBL
Level
<ADJ-XY>
T-17-17
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
Sub-item
Description
Level
ADJ-Y
ADJ-Y-DF
STRD_POS
Use it to adjust the CCD read position for DF stream reading mode.
adjustment range: 1 to 200 (default: 100)
ADJ-X-MG
ADJ-Y-DF2
Adjustment of the position on the backside in main scanning direction at simultaneous double-sided reading
adjustment range: 21 to 106 (default: 76)
<CCD>
T-17-18
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
Sub-item
Description
SH-TRGT
Use it to enter the white level target value for shading correction.
adjustment range: 1 to 2047 (default: 1136)
DFTAR-G
Use it to adjust the shading target value for green for DF mode.
adjustment range: 1 to 2047 (default: 1189)
MTF-M1
MTF-M2
MTF-M3
MTF-S1
DFCH2G2
Setting of linearity characteristic data value of No. 2 data (Green) of DF composite chart for CCD.
adjustment range: 1 to 2550 (default: 2000)
Setting of linearity characteristic data value of No. 10 data (Green) of DF composite chart for CCD.
adjustment range: 0 to 2550 (default: 0)
Setting of linearity characteristic data value of No. 10 data (Green) of DF composite chart for CIS.
adjustment range: 0 to 2550 (default: 0)
Setting of linearity characteristic data value of No. 2 data (Green) of DF composite chart for CIS.
adjustment range: 1 to 2550 (default: 2000)
DFCH2G10
DFCH-G10
DFCH-G2
Level
<LASER>
T-17-19
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
Sub-item
Description
PVE-OFST
POWER
<DEVELOP>
17-24
Level
Chapter 17
T-17-20
COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP
Sub-item
Description
BIAS
Level
1
HVT-DE
D-HV-DE
Use it to enter the offset value for the high-voltage D/A output for the DC controller PCB.
adjustment range: -50 to 50 (default: 0)
TSPLY-ADJ
Use it to adjust the toner supply distribution (axial direction) for the developing assembly.
adjustment range: 1 to 5 (default: 3)
<DENS>
T-17-21
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
Sub-item
Description
DENS-ADJ
Level
<BLANK>
T-17-22
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
Sub-item
Description
BLANK-T
Level
<V-CONT>
T-17-23
COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT
Sub-item
Description
EPOTOFST
VL-OFST
Use it to enter the offset value of the back contrast for printer images.
adjustment range: -50 to 50 (default: 0)
DE-OFST
VL-OFS-P
VD-OFST
DE-OFS-P
VD-OFS-P
Level
<HV-PRI>
T-17-24
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
Sub-item
Description
PRIMARY
Level
1
<HV-TR>
17-25
Chapter 17
T-17-25
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
Sub-item
Description
TR-N1
Use it to adjust the output level of the 1st side of plain paper for an N/N environment.
adjustment range: 100 to 400 (default: 380)
Use it to adjust the output level of the 2nd side for an N/N environment.
adjustment range: 100 to 400 (default: 310)
Use it to enter the transfer charging assembly high-voltage offset value for the high-voltage unit.
adjustment range: -100 to 100 (default: 0)
Use it to enter the pre-transfer charging assembly high-voltage offset value for the high-voltage unit.
adjustment range: -100 to 100 (default: 0)
Use it to enter the pre-transfer charging assembly high-voltage offset value for the DC controller PCB.
adjustment range: -50 to 50 (default: 0)
Use it to enter the transfer charging assembly high-voltage offset value for the DC controller PCB.
adjustment range: -50 to 50 (default: 0)
TR-N2
PRE-TR
HVT-TR
H-PRE-TR
D-PRE-TR
D-HV-TR
Level
<HV-SP>
T-17-26
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP
Sub-item
Description
SP-N1
Use it to adjust the output level for the 1st side of plain paper for an N/N environment.
adjustment range: -500 to 100
(iR5075 default: -240)
(iR5055/5065 default: -175)
SP-N2
HVT-SP
D-HV-SP
Level
Use it to adjust the output level for the 2nd side of plain paper for an N/N environment.
adjustment range: -500 to 100
(iR5075 default: -120)
(iR5055/5065 default: -100)
Use it to enter the separation charging assembly high-voltage offset level for the high-voltage unit.
adjustment range: -100 to 100
Use it to enter the separation charging assembly high-voltage offset value for the DC controller PCB.
adjustment range: -50 to 50
<FEED-ADJ>
T-17-27
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
Sub-item
Description
REGIST
Level
1
ADJ-REFE
RG-MF
<CST-ADJ>
T-17-28
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
Sub-item
Description
C3-STMTR
Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 3 (STMTR).
adjustment range: 0 to 255
Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 3 (A4R).
adjustment range: 0 to 255
Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 4 (STMTR).
adjustment range: 0 to 255
Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 4 (A4R).
adjustment range: 0 to 255
C3-A4R
C4-STMTR
C4-A4R
17-26
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
Sub-item
Description
MF-A4R
Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4R).
adjustment range: 0 to 255
Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A6R).
adjustment range: 0 to 255
Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4).
adjustment range: 0 to 255
C3-LVOL
C3-HVOL
C4-LVOL
C4-HVOL
MF-A6R
MF-A4
Level
<MISC>
T-17-29
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
Sub-item
Description
ATM
Use it to make settings related to the atmospheric pressure of the site of installation.
settings range: 0 to 2 (default: 0)
0: 1 to 0.75 atm (up to elevation of 2500 m)
1: 0.75 to 0.70 atm (elevation between 2500 and 300 m)
2: 0.70 to 0.65 atm (elevation between 300 and 3500 m)
Level
17.4.2 FEEDER
17.4.2.1 FEEDER List
0015-5843
Description
DOCST
LA-SPEED
Level
Use it to adjust the original feed speed in feeder stream reading mode.
- a higher setting will increase the speed (i.e., contracts the image).
adjustment range: -30 to 30 (unit: 0.1%)
DOCST2
Adjustment of VYSNC timing on the backside of the feeder at simultaneous double-sided reading.
adjustment range: -50 to 50 [default: 0] (unit: 0.1mm)
LA-SPEED2
Use it to adjust the sub scanning magnification in feeder back stream reading mode for duplex simultaneous reading.(for fine
adjustment of HSYNC length)
adjustment range: -120 to 120 [temporary] (unit: 0.1%)
17.4.3 SORTER
17.4.3.1 SORTER List
0015-5845
Description
PNCH-HLE
Use it to adjust the length from the edge of paper to the punch hole.
settings range: -4 to 2 (unit: mm)
Level
1
17-27
Chapter 17
T-17-32
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
Sub-item
Description
TONER-S
Use it to stir the toner inside the developing assembly at time of installation.
Procedure
1. Select the item to highlight.
2. See that the message "Check the developer" is indicated.
At this time, check to see that the developing assembly is correctly mounted.
3. Press the OK key to start the operation. The operation will automatically stop after a specific period of time.
during operation, time remaining (sec): at the end, if successful, '0'; if error, '0xFFFF'.
CARD
E-RDS
RGW-PORT
COM-TEST
COM-LOG
RGW-ADR
STRD-POS
CNT-DATE
CNT-INTV
Level
Use it to set the Sales Company server port number used for embedded-RDS.
settings range: 1 to 6535
Use it to indicate the details of the result of the communication test executed for the server used for E-RDS.
Procedure
1) Select the item to highlight, and press [show info].
log information particulars: year, date, time, error code, error detail (128 characters max.)
Use it to specify the URL of the server used for E-RDS.
Procedure
1) Select the item to highlight, and press [show information].
2) When the URL input screen appears, enter the appropriate URL and press the OK key.
(default: https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agnetif010)
Use it to adjust the face (CCD) read position for DADF stream reading mode.
settings range: 1 to 200 [default: 100] (unit: 0.1 mm)
Setting of the start date to send counter information to the server.
Set the start date to send counter information to the server by the third party advanced function for Embedded-RDS (eRDS).
[Remarks] This mode is displayed only when the third party advanced function for eRDS is available.
Setting range: YYYY: year, MM: month, HH: hour, MM: minute
Factory setting value: 000000000000 (12 digits: YYYYMMDDHHMM)
<CCD>
T-17-33
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
Sub-item
Description
CCD-ADJ
17-28
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
Sub-item
Description
DF-WLVL1/2
Use it to execute ADF white level adjustment (platen board scan/stream reading scan)
Procedure
1) Place a sheet of paper (of the type most frequently used by the user) on the platen board glass, and execute the following:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1.
The white level for book mode is read (checking the degree of transmission of the glass for book mode).
2) Place a sheet of paper often used by the user in the DF, and execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2.
The white level for DF mode (stream reading) is read (checking the degree of transmission of glass for stream reading; reading both
sides of the chart).
face: computes DFTAR-R/G/B
back: computes DFTAR2-R/G/B
Level
Caution:
Be sure to execute both of the foregoing 2 items at the same time.
LUT-ADJ
start-ups the reading sequence for CCD seam correction data (gray plate scanning) [not operating in this machine]
DF-LNR
Start of calculation of gain offset for front/back matching from DF composite chart reading data (No. 2 and No. 10)
By executing this mode after setting the reading data of No. 2 and No. 10 of DF composite chart to perform matching of difference
in front/back density to "ADJUST>CCD>DFCH_XX", linearity characteristics are calculated and a setting value is determined.
MTF-CLC
LUT-ADJ2
Calculate the MTF filter count which is actually set to ASIC based on the MTF value.
Calculate the MTF filter count which is actually set to ASIC based on the MTF value specified for each CCD/CIS in
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-M1 to 3, MTF-S1.
start-ups the reading sequence for CCD seam correction data 2 (DS chart)
<LASER>
T-17-34
COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER
Sub-item
Description
POWER
Level
<DPC>
T-17-35
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
Sub-item
Description
DPC
OFST
Level
<CST>
17-29
Chapter 17
T-17-36
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
Sub-item
Description
C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
C4-STMTR
C4-A4R
Use it to register the paper width basic value of the cassette 3/4.
STMTR width: 139.5 mm; A4R width: 210 mm
To make fine adjustments after registering a value, use the following: ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-STMTR, C3-A4R, C4-STMTR,
C4-A4R.
Procedure
1) Put STMTR paper in the cassette, and adjust the slide guide plate to the width.
2) Select C3-STMTR (C4-STMTR) to highlight, and press the OK key so that the machine executes auto adjustment and register
the value.
3) Likewise, repeat steps 1) and 2) to register the basic value for A4R.
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
Level
Use it to register the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray.
A4R width: 210 mm; A6R: 105 mm; A4 width: 297 mm
To make fine adjustments after registering a basic value, use the following: COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R, MF-A6R,
MF-A4.
Procedure
1) Put A4R paper in the manual feed tray, and adjust the size guide to the width.
2) Select MF-A4R to highlight, and press the OK key so that the machine executes auto adjustment and register the value.
3) Likewise, repeat steps 1) and 2) for A6R and A4.
<CLEANING>
T-17-37
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
Sub-item
Description
WIRE-CLN
Clean all charging wires 5 times (5 trips) all at the same time.
Procedure
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
2) See that the notation changes to 'ACTIVE', indicating that the charging wires are being cleaned.
3) See that the machine stops cleaning automatically. (To stop in the middle, press the OK key.)
Level
<FIXING>
T-17-38
COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
Sub-item
Description
NIP-CHK
Use it to generate printouts for automatic measurement of the fixing nip width.
Procedure
1) Make about 20 A4 prints.
2) Put A4 plain or recycled paper in the manual feed tray.
3) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
4) See that the paper is picked from the manual feed tray, held in the fixing nip area, and discharged in about 20 sec.
5) Check the nip width of the discharged paper: if b is from 4.5 to 6.5 mm, the nip may be considered normal. In the event of a
fixing fault or wrinkling and if the difference between the front b and the rear c is appreciable, go to step 6) to make adjustments.
6) Tighten the screw found on the side with the narrower nip; then, loosen the other screw to the same degree (so that the nip width
is identical between front and rear).
Level
<PANEL>
T-17-39
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
Sub-item
Description
LCD-CHK
LED-CHK
LED-OFF
17-30
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
Sub-item
Description
KEY-CHK
TOUCHCHK
Level
Indication on screen
0 to 9,#,*
0 to 9,#,*
Reset
RESET
Stop
STOP
User mode
USER
Start
START
Clear
CLEAR
ID
ID
Help
Counter Check
BILL
<PART-CHK>
T-17-41
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
Sub-item
Description
CL
CL-ON
MTR
MTR-ON
Level
Be sure to remove the toner bottle before checking the operation of the bottle motor (MTR=22); otherwise, the toner is likely to
spill out inside the machine.
SL
SL-ON
T-17-42
17-31
Chapter 17
- Clutch
Code
Name
- Motor
Code
Name
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
- Solenoid
Code
<CLEAR>
17-32
Name
10
11
Chapter 17
T-17-45
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Sub-item
Description
ERR
DC-CON
R-CON
JAM-HIST
Level
ADRS-BK
CNT-MCON
Use it to reset the service counter whose reading is kept by the main controller PCB.
The counter reading is reset when the OK key is pressed.
Procedure
1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
Use it to reset the service counter whose reading is kept by the DC controller PCB.
The counter reading will be reset when the OK key is pressed.
Procedure
1) Select the item, and press the OK key.
ERR-HIST
PWD-CLR
CNT-DCON
OPTION
MMI
MN-CON
CARD
Use it to reset the service mode setting OPTION to its default setting (as upon RAM initialization).
The setting will be initialized when the OK key is pressed.
The execution of this item will reset the data kept by the main controller, DC controller, and reader controller.
Procedure
1) Print out the service mode particulars using the following: COPIER>FUTON>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
17-33
Chapter 17
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Sub-item
Description
ALARM
DF-RCON
SND-STUP
LANG-ERR
CA-KEY
KEY-CLR
Level
<MISC-R>
T-17-46
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
Sub-item
Description
SCANLAMP
Level
<MISC-P>
T-17-47
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
Sub-item
Description
P-PRINT
USER-PRT
PRE-EXP
D-PRINT
17-34
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
Sub-item
Description
ENV-PRT
Use it to print out a log of changes in the machine inside temperature/humidity and in fixing temperature.
The log will show changes in the machine inside temperature/humidity and in fixing temperature (center) collected from the
monitor outputs of the non-contact thermistor and the environment sensor.
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key to generate a printout.
KEY-HIST
TRS-DATA
LBL-PRNT
HIST-PRT
Level
Use it to print out the jam history and the error history.
Procedure
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key to generate a printout.
<SENS-ADJ>
T-17-48
COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ
Sub-item
Description
STCK-LMT
Level
2
<SYSTEM>
T-17-49
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
Sub-item
Description
DOWNLOAD
CHK-TYPE
Use it to select the appropriate partition number for execution of HD-CHECK or HD-CLEAR.
Procedure
1) Select the item.
2) Select the number of the partition you want using the keypad.
0: entire HDD (*1, *2)
1: image storage area
2: general-purpose file (user settings data, log data, PDL spool data) storage area
3: PDL-related file storage area
4: firmware storage area (*1, *2)
5: MEAP area
6: address book area (*1)
Level
1
HD-CHECK
HD-CLEAR
Use it to check and recover the partition you have selected using CHK-TYPE.
procedure
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key.
3) See the result. (1: OK; 2: NG (hardware); 3: NG (software) (recovery sector/substitute sector also indicated))
Use it to initialize the partition you have selected using CHK-TYPE.
Procedure
1) Select the item.
2) Press the OK key.
17-35
Chapter 17
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
Sub-item
Description
DEBUG-1
Specify the type of logs to be saved and the timing to save them in HDD.
Setting value: 0 to 3 (Default: 0)
MEMO:
-This mode is not used in regular service. (This mode is used to analyze causes of troubles.)
-Follow an instruction of Quality Support Div. when using this mode.
Level
2
Setting range:
0: Save PLOG at the timing when Reboot/Exception is detected.
1: Save PLOG at the timing when Reboot/Exception/Ecode is detected.
2: Save SUBLOG at the timing when Reboot/Exception/Ecode is detected.
3: Save SUBLOG in overwriting mode at the timing when Reboot/Exception/Ecode is detected.
Factory setting value: 0
DEBUG-2
17.5.2 FEEDER
17.5.2.1 FEEDER List
0015-5973
Description
SENS-INT
TRY-A4
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 of the ADF original pickup tray. (A4)
TRY-A5R
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 of the ADF original pickup tray. (A5R)
MTR-CHK
Level
1
TRY-LTR
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 of the ADF original pickup tray. (LTR)
TRY-LTRR
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 of the ADF original pickup tray. (LTRR)
FEED-CHK
CL-CHK
17-36
Chapter 17
COPIER > FEEDER > FUNCTION
Sub-item
Description
CL-ON
FAN-CHK
FAN-ON
SL-CHK
SL-ON
MTR-ON
ROLL-CLN
FEED-ON
Level
Description
PO-CNT
Level
17-37
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
MODEL-SZ
Use it to switchover the default magnification ratios and ADF original size detection.
0: AB (6R5E)
1: inch (5R4E)
2: A (3R3E)
3: AB/inch (6R5E)
Use it to turn on and off fuzzy control and to set the environment.
0: enable fuzzy control (default)
1: fix to low humidity environment mode (current level lower than standard)
2: fix to normal temperature/humidity mode
3: fix to high humidity mode (current level higher than standard)
FIX-TEMP
FUZZY
CONFIG
TR_SP_C1
TR_SP_C2
TR_SP_C3
TR_SP_C4
TR_SP_MF
TR_SP_DK
W/SCNR
DFDST-L1
DFDST-L2
ENVP-INT
17-38
Use it to select multiple firmware items stored on the hard disk and switchover country, language, machine type, and paper size
configuration.
Procedure
XXYYZZ
XX: country (JP); YY: language (ja); ZZ (00): machine type; AA (00): paper size configuration. The indications will be in keeping
with the following: COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE.
(The notations in parentheses indicate defaults. The country and language notations are for indication only.)
1) Select <CONFIG>.
2) Select the appropriate item to highlight, and press the +/- key.
3) See that each press on the +/- key changes the selections in sequence.
4) When you have made all selections, press the OK key.
5) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
Use it to change the transfer/separation output settings when the right deck is used as the source of paper by way of providing a
remedial measure.
Setting
0: normal (default); 1: separation fault; 2: double transfer; 3: transfer fault
Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting when the left deck is used as the source of paper by way of providing a
remedial measure.
Settings
0: normal (default); 1: separation fault; 2: double transfer; 3: transfer fault
Level
Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting when the cassette 3 is used as the source of paper by way of providing a
remedial measure.
Settings
0: normal (default); 1: separation fault; 2: double transfer; 3: transfer fault
Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting when the cassette 4 is used as the source of paper by way of providing a
remedial measure.
Settings
0: normal (default); 1: separation fault; 2: double transfer; 3: transfer fault
Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting when the manual feed tray is used as the source of paper by way of providing
a remedial measure.
Settings
0: normal (default); 1: separation fault; 2: double transfer; 3: transfer fault
Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting when the side paper deck is used as the source of paper by way of providing
a remedial measure.
Settings
0: normal (default); 1: separation fault; 2: double transfer; 3: transfer fault
Use it to adjust the dust detection level for the ADF (sheet-to-sheet correction).
A higher setting will cause the machine to be more sensitive to finer particles of dust.
setting: 0 to 225
(Setting the item to '0' will disable the dust detection mechanism.)
Use it to adjust the dust detection level for the ADF (post-job detection).
A higher setting will cause the machine to detect finer particles of dust.
setting: 0 to 255
(Setting the item to '0' will disable the dust detection mechanism.)
Use it to set the interval at which a log is collected for the machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature.
COPIER>FUNCTION>MIS-P>ENV-PRT and
COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT
setting
0 to 480 (default: 60; in min)
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
BASE-SW
SC-L-CNT
DHON-TM
DHON-IVL
DHOF-TM
DHOF-IVL
CBLTINVL
CCD-LUT
ABC-MODE
SJOB-CL
Use it to change the threshold level of the paper size (large/small) for the scan counter.
setting
0: count B4 as small size (default)
1: count B4 as large size
Use it to set the timing at which drum heater goes on in sleep mode (with reference to clock time).
setting: 0 to 24 (default: 0: in hr)
Use it to set the timing at which the drum heater goes on in sleep mode (with reference to time after a shift to sleep mode).
setting: 0, 15 to 1440 (default: 0; in min)
Use it to set the timing at which the drum heater goes off in sleep mode (with reference to clock time).
setting: 0 to 24 (default: 01; in hr)
Use it to set the timing at which the drum heater goes off in sleep mode (with reference to time after a shift to sleep mode).
setting: 0, 15 to 1440 (default: 0; in min)
Use it to change the number of times the fixing web solenoid goes on.
Make use of it when image faults occur as the result of soiling on the pressure roller.
Setting
0: normal (default)
1: twice normal
Usage setting for the CCD gain correction data
Use this item to correct the image deterioration (difference in density at center seam of image) due to aging.
Set enabling/disabling data usage corrected with one of the followings: COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > LUT-ADJ, or LUTADJ2.
Setting value:
0: not use [default]
1: use (LUT-ADJ correction data) [not available with this machine]
2: use (LUT-ADJ2 correction data)
Set the number of characters to ignore the email message received by IFAX.
When the number of characters in the email message received by IFAX is less than the specified number of characters, the message
is ignored and is not printed or transferred.
When a number other than "0" is specified for the number of characters and the email message disappeared, and also when no TIFF
file exists, a blank page with header and footer is printed and transferred.
* A kanji character is recognized as a two-byte character. A control code such as CR is also included in the number of characters.
Setting range:
0 to 999 (Unit: number of characters)
0: Do not ignore the email message.
Factory setting value: 0
BOX-BKUP
Set whether or not to permit cancellation of the scanning job when a user performs logout.
Cancel the operating scanning job when a user performs logout.
[Remarks]
- "Scanning job" means a job for which scanning operation is completed, and the operation cannot be canceled when the scanning
operation is being executed.
- Cancellation performed by this mode is saved in the log in the same manner as cancellation performed by a user.
Setting range:
0: Cancellation prohibited
1: Cancellation permitted
Factory setting value: 0
IFX-CHIG
Level
17-39
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
SCANTYPE
GR-ADJ-L
RAG-CONT
FAXADCHK
Specify the gain setting level for linearity of Red color on the backside.
Specify the gain setting level to adjust linearity of the image on the backside against the image on the front side.
Setting the number of times for checking FAX address entry (This is provided for Mizuho Bank.)
Specify "N times" for setting the number of times to check FAX address entry.
Setting range
0-9 (Default: 2)
Perform checking of address entry for multiple times to prevent a mistake in FAX address entry. Actual number of times for
checking FAX address entry can be specified.
[Factory setting value / Value after execution of RAM clear: 2]
Level
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
OR-ADJ-L
ABC-MD2
MXSPDSEL
WOLTRANS
Specify the offset setting level for linearity of Red color on the backside.
Specify the offset setting level to adjust linearity of the image on the backside against the image on the front side.
Setting value: -5 to 5 (default: 0)
Adjust the level of base density correction level for reading the backside.
Setting value: -1 to 3 (default: 0)
To set the skew correction (the idle rotation setting) for different paper width mixed in the original tray.
When the skew movement found, perform the idle rotation (additional 2 rotations) in the DF path to increase the paper loop counts
of the registration roller; this will correct the skew movement.
Setting:
0: w/ idle rotation [default]
1: w/o idle rotation
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
DWT-SYNC
Scanner printer synchronization control due to the power control at sleep recovery
The power has been increased (approximately 40W) due to changing to the 1-path duplexing reader. Therefore, it will be possible
that the specified current exceeds with the reservation copy operation when recovering from the sleep.
At present, once the scanner starts up, the machine cannot be activated within 30 sec because power of the machine is controlled.
In order to startup the machine within 30 sec, set a mode that disables the reservation copy operation (not activating the scanner).
Setting range
0: Normal setting
1: Not accept the reservation copy operation during sleep recovery
Factory default/default: 0
Use this mode when switching the modes: the mode that recovers the machine within 30 sec but not accepts the reservation copy
operation, and the mode that accepts the reservation copy operation during sleep recovery.
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
17-40
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
TCPDLACK
Level
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
PO-CNTMD
W-CLN-P
IDL-MODE
FSPD-S1
TSPLY-SW
SCANSLCT
OHP-TEMP
SENS-CNF
Use it to select the number of times the potential control mechanism goes on.
0: once at power-on
1: once at power-on and, in addition, 10 and 60 min thereafter (simplified potential control mode)
2: once at power-on and, in addition, 10 and 60 min thereafter (normal potential control mode; default)
Use it to set the interval at which the primary charging wire is automatically cleaned.
setting: every 100 to 2000 (sheets; default at 2000)
Use it to enable/disable the function used to compute the scan area from the selected paper size.
setting
0: off (determine scan area by original detection)
1: on (determine scan area by paper size)
SHARP
LAPC-SW
RAW-DATA
FDW-DLV
Use it to select face-up delivery or face-down delivery when the count is set to multiple.
setting
0: normal (for a single original, face-up for all; default)
1: for a single original, face-up delivery if the count is set to '1'; otherwise, face-down
COTDPC-D
EVL-VDT
Use it to switch over drum target potential to suit the environment of the site.
setting: 0 to 6 (default: 1)
Use it to change the language for the remote UI to be used through the Web browser.
Select the particular language using the + and - keys.
RMT-LANG
17-41
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
HI-HUME
Use it to limit the number of output lines if an excess volume of data is received through i-fax.
setting: 0 to 999 (default: 500)
0: no limit
Use it execute a remedial measure in response to black lines caused by dust on the platen roller when the ADF is use (stream reading
mode).
setting
0: disable (default)
1: enable
SMTPTXPN
SMTPRXPN
IFAX-LIM
DF-BLINE
DRM-H-SW
Level
POP3PN
RUI-DSP
Use it set a special paper size that the ADF cannot recognize (applicable to LGL communicated by the ADF).
setting
0: LGL (default)
1: FOOLSCAP
2: A-FOOLSCAP
3: FOLIO
4: G-LEGAL
5: OFFICIO
6: E-OFFICIO
7: A-OFFICIO
8: B-OFFICIO
9: A-LEGAL
10: M-OFFICIO
Use it to set a special paper size that the ADF cannot recognize (applicable to LTR communicated by the ADF).
setting
0: LTR (default)
1: G-LTR
2: A-LTR
3: EXECUTIVE
ORG-LGL
ORG-LTR
ORG-LTRR
Use it to set a special paper size that the ADF cannot recognize (applicable to LTR-R communicated by the ADF).
setting
0: LTR-R (default)
1: G-LTR-R
2: A-LTR-R
3: EXECUTIVE-R
UI-BOX
UI-SEND
UI-FAX
17-42
Select a special paper size that the ADF cannot recognize (applicable to B5 communicated by the ADF).
setting
0: B5 (default)
1: K-LEGAL
Use it to enable/disable the display of the box screen on the control panel.
setting
0: do not display
1: display (default)
2: do not display (however, permit storage of PDF job in box)
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
NW-SPEED
Use it to select the appropriate data transmission speed when a connection is made to a service network.
setting
0: auto (default)
1: 100Base-Tx
2: 10Base-T
Use it to enable/disable platen board original size detection (for global support; AB/inch mix).
setting
0: disable global detection (default)
1: enable global detection
STS-PORT
CMD-PORT
MODELSZ2
SZDT-SW
NS-CMD5
NS-GSAPI
NS-NTLM
NS-PLNWS
NS-PLN
NS-LGN
Use it to enable/disable switchover of CCD size detection and photo size detection for platen board original size detection.
setting
0: disable photo size detection
1: enable photo size detection
Use it to limit the use of CRAM-MD5 authentication for SMTP authentication.
setting
0: as determined by SMTP server (default)
1: do not use
Use it to limit the use of GSSAPI authentication for restrictive SMTP authentication as part of GSSAPI authentication of SMTP
authentication.
setting
0: as determined by SMTP server (default)
1: do not use
Use it to limit the use of NTLM authentication for SMTP authentication.
setting
0: as determined by SMTP server (default)
1: do not use
Use it to limit the use of PLAIN, LOGIN authentication, which is plain-text authentication of SMTP authentication (however, only
where PLAIN, LOGIN authentication restrictive communication packets are encrypted).
setting
0: as determined by SMTP server (default)
1: do not use
Use it to limit the use of PLAIN, LOGIN authentication, which is plain-text authentication of SMTP authentication (however, only
where PLAIN, LOGIN authentication restrictive communication packets are not encrypted).
setting
0: as determined by SMTP server (default)
1: do not use
Level
Use it to limit the use of LOGIN authentication for restrictive SMTP authentication of LOGIN authentication.
setting
0: as determined by SMTP server (default)
1: do not use
MEAP-PN
SVMD-ENT
SSH-SW
RMT-LGIN
RE-PKEY
U-NAME
17-43
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
U-PASWD
Use it to enable/disable display of the Error/Jam screen with a MEAP application in operation.
setting
0: off (display warning screen; default)
1: on (do not display warning screen)
DA-PORT
DA-CNCT
CHNG-STS
CHNG-CMD
MEAP-DSP
ANIM-SW
MEAP-SSL
STNBY-TM
KSIZE-SW
POST-DWN
A countermeasure mode to prevent smudges from appearing on the lead edge of an image (caused by pre-transfer upper guide) in
the HH environment
Decrease the post high pressure output value from 280uA to 70uA only in the HH environment, as an individual countermeasure,
in order to prevent smudges from appearing on the lead edge of an image caused by the pre-transfer upper guide.
0: Normal (default)
1: Countermeasure mode (A post high pressure value is automatically changed when an HH environment is detected by the
environment sensor.)
IMP-MISS
UI-PRINT
WUEV-SW
WUEV-INT
WUEV-POT
17-44
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
WUEV-RTR
SJB-UNW
UI-RSCAN
UI-EPRNT
UI-WEB
WEBV-SW
Switch the number of secure print jobs to be accumulated (scheduled number of jobs).
Set "50" or "90" for the upper limit in the number of secure print jobs to be accumulated (scheduled number of jobs).
Setting range:
0: 50
1: 90
Factory setting value: 0
Control the display of a remote scanning screen on the control panel.
Set whether or not to display a remote scanning screen on the control panel.
This mode is available for a user who does not want to display the screen on the control panel.
Setting range:
0: Do not display the screen.
1: Display the screen.
Factory setting value: 1
Control the display of an extended printing screen (EFI printing screen) on the control panel.
Set whether or not to display an extended printing screen (EFI printing screen) on the control panel.
This mode is available for a user who does not want to display the screen on the control panel.
[Additional Information]
In this screen, the conventional UI-EXT was divided into UI-RSCAN and UI-EPRNT so that each control can be performed
separately.
Setting range:
0: Do not display the screen.
1: Display the screen.
Factory setting value: 1
Control the display of a Web browser screen on the control panel.
Set whether or not to display a Web browser screen on the control panel.
This mode is available for a user who does not want to display the screen on the control panel.
Setting range:
0: Do not display the screen.
1: Display the screen.
Factory setting value: 1
Level
When changing into 1, it takes 1 to 2 minutes before the display of WEBDAV is off. After that, return to user mode, check to see
that the display of WEBDAV in the above user mode is off and then turn off the power.
If turning off the power before the display of WEBDAV is off, the display of WEBDAV is not off by turning on the power again.
CARD-RNG
WUEN-LIV
MAILYEAR
SEND-AUT
Set the activation period after a sleep notification is made from the network.
Set the period until when the copying machine main unit is placed in the sleep mode next time after activated in the sleep mode
from the network without jobs entered.
Setting range: 10 to 600 (Unit: second)
Factory setting value: 15
Enter the year/month/date in the subject and file name of an email. (Specifications for Santander Bank in Mexico)
Automatically add the year/month/date, time, and allocation number at the end of characters specified for the subject and file name
of an email.
Setting range:
0: Do not add the year/month/date.
1: Add the year/month/date.
Switch the setting of user authentication to use SEND function.
When setting the switch of this mode to ON (1), a guest button is displayed in the login screen for MEAP, with which user
authentication for SEND function is executed. (Only authentication for SEND function can be executed.)
If you do not want to use SEND function, press this button so that you can perform login without using an ID and password.
[Remarks] When you perform login using the guest button, the setting in this mode does not function.
Setting range:
0 (Do not display the guest button.) / 1 (Display the guest button.)
Factory setting value: 0
17-45
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
Description
DHCP-12
DHCP-81
PT3-INEX
Level
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
USB-RCNT
UI-COPY
MEAP-PRI
Set whether or not to perform automatic connection when disconnecting the USB device. (USB RECONNECT)
Setting range:
0: Do not perform automatic connection.
1: Perform automatic connection.
Factory setting value: 0
Make a setting to switch the display in the copy screen in the control panel.
This mode is available for a user who does not want to display a print job screen on the control panel.
Setting range:
0: Hide the copy screen.
1: Do not hide the copy screen.[default]
PDLEVCT1
Improve the fixability for the customers who mainly use A4R / B5R / LTR-R / LGL (paper width: 170 to 240[mm]) thick papers.
* It requires extra attention when using thin papers because they may get wrinkled.
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
PP-LWRT
17-46
Not used
Chapter 17
<USER>
T-17-52
COPIER > OPTION >USER
Sub-item
Description
COPY-LIM
SLEEP
WEB-DISP
W-TONER
Level
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
CONTROL
Not used
1
B4-L-CNT
COPY-JOB
PR-PSESW
IDPRN-SW
CNT-SW
TAB-ACC
REMPNL
BCNT-AST
DOC-REM
Use it to specify where B4 should be counted as large or small size for soft counters 1 thorough 6.
0: count as small size (default)
1: count as large size
Use it to enable/disable copy job reservation with a card reader/coin vendor in use.
setting
0: enable copy job reservation (default)
1: disable copy job reservation
Use it to switch over count increment jobs for the group control counter.
0: for PRINT, increment the following: box print, report print, SEND local print, PDL print (default)
1: for PRINT, increment the following: report print, SEND local print, PDL print
Use it to switch over job types for the count of the box prints with ASSIST in use.
setting
0: count as PDL job (default)
1: count as copy job
17-47
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION >USER
Sub-item
Description
FROM-OF
FILE-OF
MAIL-OF
IFAX-OF
LDAP-DEF
HDCR-DSW
RVSW-DSP
Set whether or not to display the menu of "ON/OFF of complete HDD deletion" in the user mode.
User mode > System administration settings > Complete HDD deletion
Setting value:
0: Do not display the menu.
1: Display the menu.
Factory setting value: 0
DATE-DSP
MB-CCV
TRY-STP
MF-LG-ST
CNT-DISP
17-48
Display/nondisplay of the switch for 'Reversal Reading' at duplexing print from DADF
0: 'Reversal Reading' switch displayed (default)
1: 'Reversal Reading' switch not displayed
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
SIZE-DET
Level
Use it to limit the users of the control cards for mail boxes.
setting
0: do not limit (default)
1: limit
Use it to switch over operation when the finisher tray becomes full.
setting
0: normal (suspend operation when finisher tray becomes full; default)
1: suspend in relation to height detection
2: do not suspend
Use it to enable/disable indication of a serial number in response to a press on the Counter Check key.
setting
0: display serial number (default)
1: do not display serial number
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION >USER
Sub-item
Description
PH-D-SEL
OP-SZ-DT
NW-SCAN
Level
Caution:
For the Japanese model, the value cannot be changed.
For a non-Japanese model, PSPCL is fixed to '1'; the value may be changed on other models.
HDCR-DSP
JOB-INVL
PCL-COPY
PRJOB-CP
DPT-ID-7
RUI-RJT
CTM-S06
FREG-SW
IFAX-SZL
IFAX-PGD
MEAPSAFE
AFN-PSWD
PTJAM-RC
Use it to set the CCV count pulse generation for reception and report output.
setting
0: do not generate count pulse (default)
1: generate count pulse
Use it to select the 7-character input method for group ID registration and authentication.
setting
0: normal (default)
1: use 7-character input
Use it to enable/disable connection of the HTTP port at 3 failed attempts at authentication by the RUI.
setting
0: make invalid (default)
1: keep valid
Use it to specify whether a password should be removed from the export file (file transmission address).
setting
0: do not remove password from export file (default)
1: remove password from export file
Use it to enable/disable display of the free area of the MEAP counter (SEND).
setting
0: do not display (default)
1: display
17-49
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION >USER
Sub-item
Description
SLP-SLCT
Level
CNCT-RLZ
INS-C/S
PDL-NCSW
DOM-ADD
CLR-TIM
FREE-DSP
Set whether or not to supplement the destination domain for email transmission.
Perform transmission with an address in which the address entered for email transmission and the domain specified in the user mode
(ex. @xxxx.co.jp) are combined.
Setting value:
0: Do not supplement the domain. (default)
1: Supplement the domain.
<To send email to "aaaa@xxxx.co.jp">
1) Specify "xxxx.co.jp" for the domain in the user mode, and specify "1" for this mode.
2) If "aaaa" is entered for email transmission, the address is supplemented as "aaaa@xxx.co.jp".
17-50
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION >USER
Sub-item
Description
SNMP-COA
SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (administrative privilege)
Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (administrative privilege).
Setting range
0: OFF
1: ON (Read only)
2: ON (Read/Write available) [default]
Level
Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network
Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (administrative privilege) in addition to the community name
that is set in the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot.
In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to '0' or
'1'.
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
SNMP-COU
SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (user privilege)
Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (user privilege).
Setting range
0: OFF
1: ON (Read only)
2: ON (Read/Write available) [default]
Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network
Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (user privilege) in addition to the community name that is set in
the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot.
In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to '0' or
'1'.
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
Description
101
total 1
Level
Yes
102
total 2
Yes
103
total (large)
Yes
104
total (small)
Yes
105
106
108
total (black-and-white 1)
Yes
109
total (black-and-white 2)
Yes
110
111
112
113
Yes
114
total 1 (duplex)
Yes
115
total 2 (duplex)
Yes
116
large (duplex)
Yes
117
small (duplex)
Yes
118
119
120
121
Yes
17-51
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER
17-52
No.
Description
122
Level
123
124
125
126
total A1
Yes
127
total A2
Yes
128
total A (large)
Yes
129
total A (small)
Yes
130
131
132
total A (black-and-white 1)
Yes
133
total A (black-and-white 2)
Yes
134
135
136
Yes
137
Yes
138
total A1 (duplex)
139
total A2 (duplex)
140
large A (duplex)
141
small A (duplex)
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
total B1
Yes
151
total B2
Yes
152
total B (large)
Yes
153
total B (small)
Yes
154
155
156
total B (black-and-white 1)
Yes
157
total B (black-and-white 2)
Yes
158
159
160
Yes
161
Yes
162
total B1 (duplex)
163
total B2 (duplex)
164
large B (duplex)
165
small B (duplex)
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
201
copy (total 1)
Yes
202
copy (total 2)
Yes
203
copy (large)
Yes
204
copy (small)
Yes
205
copy A (total 1)
Yes
206
copy A (total 2)
Yes
207
copy A (large)
Yes
208
copy A (small)
Yes
209
Yes
210
Yes
211
Yes
212
Yes
213
Yes
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER
No.
Description
214
Yes
215
Yes
216
Yes
217
218
219
Level
220
221
copy (black-and-white 1)
Yes
222
copy (black-and-white 2)
Yes
223
224
225
226
227
Yes
228
Yes
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
245
246
247
248
249
copy A (black-and-white 1)
Yes
250
copy A (black-and-white 2)
Yes
251
252
253
254
255
Yes
256
Yes
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
273
274
275
276
277
Yes
278
Yes
279
280
281
282
283
Yes
284
Yes
285
286
287
288
289
290
17-53
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER
17-54
No.
Description
291
292
Level
293
294
002
003
004
005
006
Yes
007
Yes
008
009
010
011
012
Yes
013
Yes
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
301
print (total 1)
302
print (total 2)
Yes
303
print (large)
Yes
304
print (small)
Yes
305
print A (total 1)
Yes
306
print A (total 2)
Yes
307
print A (large)
Yes
308
print A (small)
Yes
309
310
311
312
313
print (black-and-white 1)
Yes
314
print (black-and-white 2)
Yes
315
316
Yes
317
318
319
Yes
320
Yes
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
Yes
332
Yes
333
Yes
334
Yes
335
336
339
Yes
340
Yes
341
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER
No.
Description
342
345
Yes
346
Yes
351
352
355
356
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
Level
421
422
501
scan (total 1)
Yes
502
scan (total 2)
Yes
503
scan (large)
Yes
504
scan (small)
Yes
505
Yes
506
Yes
507
Yes
508
Yes
509
510
511
512
601
Yes
602
Yes
603
Yes
604
Yes
605
606
607
608
609
Yes
610
Yes
611
612
613
614
615
Yes
616
Yes
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
17-55
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER
No.
Description
625
Level
626
701
Yes
702
Yes
703
Yes
704
Yes
705
706
707
708
709
Yes
710
Yes
711
712
713
714
715
Yes
716
Yes
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
reception print (black-and-white; large; duplex)
726
reception print (black-and-white; small; duplex)
17-56
801
Yes
802
Yes
803
Yes
804
Yes
805
806
807
808
809
Yes
810
Yes
811
812
813
814
815
Yes
816
Yes
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER
No.
Description
911
Level
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
<CST>
T-17-54
COPIER > OPTION > CST
Sub-item
Description
P-SZ-C1
P-SZ-C2
U1-NAMEto U4- Use it to enable/disable display of a paper name when a size from a specific paper size group (U1 to U4) is detected.
NAME
setting
0: on the touch panel, indicate U1, U2, U3, U4 (default)
1: indicate paper name selected in service mode: CST-U1, U2, U3, U4
Level
17-57
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > CST
Sub-item
Description
CST-U1/U2/U3/
U4
Level
<ACC>
T-17-55
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
Sub-item
Description
COIN
Level
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
DK-P
CCV2CT
CCV-LSZ
PD-SIZE
17-58
Use it to set the size of paper used in the Side Paper Deck.(for the Side Paper Deck AD1)
setting
0: A4 (default)
1: B5
2: LTR
Use it to enable/disable large 2 count control.
0: off (disable 2-count control; default)
1: on (enable 2-count control; count pulse width/pulse width, 100 msec)
2: on (enable 2-count control; count pulse width/pulse width, 30 msec)
Use it to set a threshold for small/large size identification used in large 2 count mode.
setting: 0 to 458 (default: 364; in mm)
Setting size of the Side Paper Deck AE1 (displayed only the Side Paper Deck AE1 is mounted)
Normal size can be set with the user mode, and special size can be set with the service mode.
Setting Range: 0 to 37 [default: 0]
The value 0 or 22 to 37 can be set with the service mode.
If the setting value is 0 to 21, the value 1 to 21 can be input with the user mode.
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
Sub-item
Description
MIN-PRC
Level
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
MAX-PRC
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
CC-SPSW
UNIT-PRC
Only supports iR5075/5065/5055 Series V2. (BODY No. CHL XXXX, CHM XXXX, CHN XXXX, CHP XXXX, CHQ XXXX,
CHU XXXX, CHV XXXX, CHW XXXX, CHZ XXXX, CJA XXXX, CJD XXXX, CJJ XXXX, CJK XXXX, CJP XXXX, CJQ
XXXX, CJR XXXX, CJU XXXX, CJZ XXXX, CKA XXXX, CKC XXXX, CKD XXXX, CKE XXXX)
<INT-FACE>
T-17-56
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
Sub-item
Description
IMG-CONT
Use it to permit/not permit printing from application PrintMe built into the PS print server unit.
setting
0: permit printing using unspecific ID (default)
1: permit printing using specific account
2: reject printing
Use it to set (CPCA) group ID for printing (job) from application PrintMe built into the PS print server unit.
setting
0 to 9999999 (default: 0)
Use it to set the (CPCA) path for printing (job) from application PrintMe built into the PS print server unit.
setting
0 to 99999999 (default: 0)
AP-OPT
AP-ACCNT
AP-CODE
Level
<TEMPO>
17-59
Chapter 17
T-17-57
COPIER > OPTION > TEMPO
Sub-item
Description
F-POT-SW
Use it to enable/disable settings in the event of a transfer fault caused by a fault in the potential sensor.
- Use it as a tentative remedy until the potential sensor is replaced.
settling
0: off (default); 1: on
F-POT-D
F-HUM-SW
F-HUM-D
Level
Use it to make settings in relation to transfer faults caused by a fault in the potential sensor.
- The setting will be valid only when F-POT-SW is set to '1'.
- The degree of separation current may be 0>1>2.
setting
0: if user tends to use originals with low image ratio (text original )
1: if user tends to use originals with high image ratio (photo original)
2: do not use normally; however, use if double transfer occurs (dropout at about 50 mm of leading edge)
Use it to enable/disable F-HUM-D settings in the event of a fault in the environment sensor.
- Use it as a tentative remedy until the environment sensor is replaced.
setting
0: off (default); 1: on (enable F-HUM-D setting)
Use it to manually set the humidity for the site of installation.
- The machine assumes it as the output of the humidity sensor.
- The setting will be valid only when F-HUM-SW is '1'.
setting: 30 to 99 (default: 35(%))
<LCNS-TR>
T-17-58
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
Sub-item
Description
Level
EX: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1]: for state indication, 0: not installed (default); 1: installed
[2]: for invalidation execution, 0: execute (input accepted only if '0')
Procedure (invalidation of transfer)
1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then, press the OK key.
2) See that a transfer license number (24 characters) is indicated for TR-XXXX.
ST-SEND
Use it to display the installation state/invalidate transfer of the SEND function as part of transfer invalidation.
2
TR-SEND
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the SEND function as part of transfer invalidation.
ST-ENPDF
Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the SEND encryption PDF transmission function as part of
transfer invalidation.
TR-ENPDF
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the SEND encryption PDF transmission function as part of transfer invalidation.
2
ST-SPDF
Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the SEND searchable PDF transmission function as part of
transfer invalidation.
TR-SPDF
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the SEND searchable PDF transmission function as part of transfer invalidation.
2
2
ST-EXPDF
Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the PDF expansion (composite function of encryption PDF
+ searchable PDF) as part of transfer invalidation.
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the PDF expansion kit (composite function of encryption PDF + searchable PDF) as part
of transfer invalidation.
Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation of the PDF direct transmission mechanism as part of transfer
invalidation.
TR-PDFDR
ST-SCR
Use it to display the installation sate/execute transfer invalidation of the encryption secured printing function as part of transfer
invalidation.
TR-SCR
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for the encryption secured printing as part of transfer invalidation.
ST-CHSNG
Not used
TR-CHSNG
Not used
ST-BRDIM
TR-BRDIM
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for bar DIMM as part of transfer invalidation.
ST-VNC
Use it to display the installation state/to execute transfer invalidation for VNC as part of transfer invalidation.
TR-EXPDF
ST-PDFDR
2
TR-VNC
17-60
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for VNC as part of transfer invalidation.
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
Sub-item
Description
ST-WEB
Use it to display the installation sate/execute transfer invalidation for a WEB browser as part of transfer invalidation.
Level
2
TR-WEB
Use it to obtain a transfer license key for a WEB browser as part of transfer invalidation.
ST-WTMRK
Display the installation status of the tint block printing function in transfer invalidation. / Execute transfer invalidation.
TR-WTMRK
Obtain a transfer license key for the tint block printing function in transfer invalidation.
ST-TSPDF
Display the installation status of the PDF send function with a time stamp in transfer invalidation.
TR-TSPDF
Obtain a transfer license key for the PDF send function with a time stamp in transfer invalidation.
ST-USPDF
Display the installation status of the PDF send function with a user signature in transfer invalidation.
TR-USPDF
Obtain a transfer license key for the PDF send function with a user signature in transfer invalidation.
ST-DVPDF
Display the installation status of the PDF send function with a device signature in transfer invalidation.
TR-DVPDF
Obtain a transfer license key for the PDF send function with a device signature in transfer invalidation.
ST-SCPDF
Display the installation status of the scalable PDF send function in transfer invalidation.
TR-SCPDF
Obtain a transfer license key for the scalable PDF send function in transfer invalidation.
ST-AMS
TR-AMS
ST-ERDS
Display the installation status of the ERDS 3rd party advanced function in transfer invalidation.
TR-ERDS
Obtain a transfer license key for the ERDS 3rd party advanced function in transfer invalidation.
ST-PS
TR-PS
ST-PCL
TR-PCL
ST-PSLI5
Display the installation status of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX in transfer invalidation.
TR-PSLI5
Obtain a transfer license key for PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX in transfer invalidation.
ST-LIPS5
TR-LIPS5
Obtain a transfer license key for LIPS LX and LIPS4 in transfer invalidation.
ST-LIPS4
TR-LIPS4
ST-PSPCL
TR-PSPCL
ST-PCLUF
TR-PCLUF
Obtain a transfer license key for PCL and UFR in transfer invalidation.
ST-PSLIP
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
17-61
Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
Sub-item
Description
TR-PSLIP
Level
ST-PSPCU
Display the installation status of PS, PCL, and UFR in transfer invalidation.
TR-PSPCU
Obtain a transfer license key for PS, PCL, and UFR in transfer invalidation.
ST-LXUFR
Display the installation status of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) in transfer invalidation.
TR-LXUFR
Obtain a transfer license key for LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) in transfer invalidation.
ST-HDCR2
TR-HDCR2
Obtain a transfer license key for complete HDD deletion in transfer invalidation.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
17.6.2 FEEDER
17.6.2.1 FEEDER List
0015-6262
Description
SIZE-SW
LS-DBL
STAMP-SW
Level
17.6.3 SORTER
17.6.3.1 SORTER List
0015-6269
Description
BLNK-SW
Use it to set the margin width on both sides of a crease when the saddle stitcher is in use.
setting
0: normal width (5 mm)
1: extra width (10 mm; default)
MD-SPRTN
Level
17.6.4 BOARD
17.6.4.1 BOARD List
0015-6272
17-62
Sub-item
Description
FONTDL
Use it to enable/disable display of the setting screen for font service when the PS kanji font downloaded is in use.
setting
0: disable (do not display; default)
1: enable (display)
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > BOARD > OPTION
Sub-item
Description
MENU-1 to 4
Use it to enable/disable display of levels 1 thorough 4 for the printer settings menu.
setting
0: disable (do not display; default)
1: enable (display)
Level
Description
TYPE
Enter the type No. of the desired test print, and press the Start key to print out a test print. (Be sure to return it to '0' after printing.)
0: image from CCD (normal print)
1: grid
2: 17 gradations (error diffusion; T-BIC)
3: 17 gradations (dither screen)
4: blank 00H
5: halftone 80 H (error diffusion; T-BIC)
6: halftone 80 H (dither screen)
7: solid black FFH
8: horizontal line (space: 27 dots; line width: 4 dots)
9: horizontal line (space: 50 dots; line width: 6 dots)
10: horizontal line (space: 3 dots; line width: 2 dots)
11: halftone 60H (error diffusion; T-BIC)
12: halftone 60H (dither screen)
13: halftone 30H (error diffusion: T-BIC)
14: halftone 30H (dither screen)
15: 17 gradations (text mode)
16: 17 gradations (text/photo mode)
17: 17 gradations (print photo mode)
18: 17 gradations (film photo mode)
19: for R&D
20: 17 gradations (PDL screen: medium resolution)
21: 17 gradations (PDL screen: low resolution)
22: 17 gradations (PDL screen: high resolution)
23 to 30: for R&D
TXPH
Level
Use it to switch between text mode or photo mode for test printing.
1
setting: 0 to 4
PG-PICK
2-SIDE
PG-QTY
<NETWORK>
T-17-63
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
Sub-item
Description
PING
Use it to check the connection between the machine and a network (only if TCP/IP).
Use it when checking the connection at time of installation or in the event of a network connection fault.
Level
1) Hold down the control panel switch to start shut-down sequence. When ready, turn off the main power switch.
2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch.
3) Inform the user's system administrator that the installation of the machine is over, and ask him/her to make network settings.
17-63
Chapter 17
4) Inform the system administrator that you are going to check the network connection, and find out the remote host address (i.e., the IP address of a PC terminal
on the user's network).
5) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING; then, type in the IP address you obtained in step 4) When ready, press the
OK key and then the Start key.
- The indication will be 'OK' if the connection to the network is correct. (End the work.)
- If the indication is 'NG', on the other hand, check the connection of the network cable; if the cable is normal, go to step 6). If a fault is found in the cable, correct
it, and go back to step 5).
6) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIES>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the local host address (i.e., IP address of the machine), and
press the OK key.
- If the indication is 'NG', suspect a fault in the IP address of the machine or of the network controller. Ask the system administrator for a check on the IP address,
or replace the main controller PCB.
- If the indication is 'OK', on the other hand, the network settings and the network controller may be assumed to be normal. If so, suspect a fault in the user's network
environment; report to the system administrator for remedial work.
7) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING; then, enter the local host address (i.e., IP address of the machine), and
press the OK key.
- If the notation is 'NG', suspect a fault in the IP address of the machine or in the network controller. Contact the system administrator to obtain the correct IP address
or replace the main controller PCB.
- If the notation is 'OK', the network settings and the network controller may be assumed to be free of faults. The fault is likely to be in the user's network environment. Contact the system administrator for remedial action.
IP address input
Result (OK/NG)
F-17-15
Description
SERVICE1
SERVICE2
COPY
PDL-PRT
FAX-PRT
RMT-PRT
17-64
Level
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
Sub-item
Description
BOX-PRT
RPT-PRT
2-SIDE
SCAN
Level
<PICKUP>
T-17-65
COPIER > COUNTER > PICKUP
Sub-item
Description
C1/2/3/4
MF
DK
2-SIDE
Level
<FEEDER>
T-17-66
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
Sub-item
Description
FEED
Level
1
DFOP-CNT
<JAM>
T-17-67
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
Sub-item
Description
TOTAL
Level
1
FEEDER
SORTER
2-SIDE
MF
C1/2/3/4
DK
<MISC>
17-65
Chapter 17
T-17-68
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
Sub-item
Description
FIX-WEB
fixing web counter (Be sure to reset the counter when the fixing web has been replaced.)
Level
WST-TNR
collecting toner counter (Be sure to reset the counter when collecting toner has been disposed of.)
ALLPW-ON
HDD-ON
1
1
<PRDC-1>
T-17-69
COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1
Sub-item
Description
PRM-WIRE
Level
1
PRM-GRID
PO-WIRE
TR-WIRE
SP-WIRE
PRM-CLN
1
1
TR-CLN
PO-CLN
SP-CLN
1
1
TR-CLN2
FIX-TH1
FIX-TH2
OZ-FIL1
ozone filter
AR-FIL1
air filter 1
AR-FIL2
air filter 2
<DRBL-1>
T-17-70
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
17-66
Sub-item
Description
PRM-UNIT
Level
1
PO-UNIT
PO-SCRPR
T/S-UNIT
CLN-BLD
SP-CLAW
DVG-CYL
DVG-ROLL
C3-PU-RL
C3-SP-RL
C3-FD-RL
C4-PU-RL
C4-SP-RL
C4-FD-RL
LD-PU-RL
LD-SP-RL
LD-FD-RL
RD-SP-RL
RD-FD-RL
RD-PU-RL
M-SP-RL
M-FD-RL
FX-UP-RL
FX-LW-RL
FX-IN-BS
Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
Sub-item
Description
FX-WEB
Indicates the number of times the fixing web has been taken up.
If you have replaced the web, be sure to reset the reading in service mode: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB,
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB.
Level
DLV-UCLW
DLV-LCLW
<DRBL-2>
T-17-71
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
Sub-item
Description
DF-PU-RL
DF-SP-PL
DF-SP-PD
DF-FD-RL
LNT-TAP1
LNT-TAP2
LNT-TAP3
LNT-TAP4
LNT-TAP5
Level
Indicates the number of sheets moving past the ADF dust-collecting tape.
for both simplex and duplex modes, the count is increased by 1 for each original read (not its sides)
Indicates the number of sheets moving past the ADF dust-collecting tape.
for both simplex and duplex modes, the count is increased by 1 for each original read (not its sides)
Indicates the number of sheets moving past the ADF dust-collecting tape.
for both simplex and duplex modes, the count is increased by 1 for each original read (not its sides)
Indicates the number of sheets moving past the ADF dust-collecting tape.
for both simplex and duplex modes, the count is increased by 1 for each original read (not its sides)
Indicates the number of sheets moving past the ADF dust-collecting tape.
for both simplex and duplex modes, the count is increased by 1 for each original read (not its sides)
STAMP
PD-PU-RL
Indicates the number of sheets moving past the paper deck pickup roller.
(counter reading retained by the controller PCB)
Indicates the number of sheets moving past the paper deck separation roller.
(counter reading retained by the controller PCB)
Sort counter
The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.
PD-SP-RL
PD-FD-RL
SORT
FIN-STPR
SADDLE
SDL-STPL
Indicates the number of times the stapler (saddle assembly) has operated.
(counter reading retained by the DC controller PCB)
PUNCH
Punching counter
FIN-BFFRL
1
1
17-67
Chapter 18 Upgrading
Contents
Contents
18.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine .......................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Chapter 18
18.1 Outline
18.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine
0015-5401
Method of upgrading
SST
ROM-DIMM
replacement
Yes
No
Yes
No
Remarks
Machine
The machine controller is also used to control the Super G3 Fax Board.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Multi-FAX Board
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
DADF-S1
Yes
Ver.3.3 or later
No
Accessory
SST
Initialize HDD
HDD setting information
HDD
System software
Flash ROM
Upload backup data
Backup data
18-1
Chapter 18
The download control program comes in 2 types:
-Normal Mode (download mode B)
turn on the main power while holding down 1+7; then, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
-Safe Mode(download mode A)
turn on the main power while holding down 2+8
Main power
switch ON
on keypad, 2+8
Safe mode
program
on keypad, 1+7
Boot ROM
Boot program
HDD
SYSTEM program
In service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
normal mode
program
Download mode A
Download mode B
F-18-2
The following table shows the functions that may be used in download mode with the SST in use:
T-18-2
Function
Download mode
Normal mode
(download mode B)
Formatting the HDD
18-2
Safe mode
(download mode A)
Entire HDD
BOOTDEV
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
PDL_DEV
FSTCDEV
Chapter 18
Function
Download mode
Normal mode
(download mode B)
Safe mode
(download mode A)
-System
-Language
-RUI
-Boot
-Dcon
-Rcon
-SDICT
-MEAPCONT
-KEY
-TTS
Uploading/downloading backup
data
-SramImg
-Meapback
System
Software
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
System area
Boot
ROM
FLASH
ROM
If a previous version of the SST is used for downloading, the system software will be written directly to the HDD, boot ROM, and flash ROM.
The previous version of the SST is not enable to use for this model.
18-3
Chapter 18
HDD
Boot
ROM
System
Software
Flash
ROM
F-18-4
F-18-5
5) Select the drive in which you have set the System CD, and click [SEARCH].
18-4
Chapter 18
F-18-6
6) The list of system software found on the System CD appears. Remove the check from the folders and software you will not need; then, click [REGISTER].
F-18-7
18-5
Chapter 18
F-18-8
Command Prompt
M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s 2 0 0 0 [ Ve r s i o n 5 . 0 0 . 2 1 9 5 ]
( C ) C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 - 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p.
C:\
ipconfig
DNS Suffix
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
C:\
F-18-9
18-6
.
.
.
.
:
: 172.16.1.160
: 255.255.255.0
:
Chapter 18
3) Check to see that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power switch.
3-1) Hold down the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more.
3-2) Follow the instructions indicated on the control panel so that the main power switch may be turned off.
3-3) Turn off the main power switch.
4) Connect the PC to the machine using a cross cable.
IP sddress: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Cross cable
10Base-T: category 3 or 5
100Base-TX: category 5
F-18-10
5) Start up the machine to suit the download mode you will be using.
- Normal Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down 1+7.
When the machine has started up, make the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD.
- Safe Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down 2+8.
6) Start up the Service Support Tool.
7) Select the model of the machine to connect.
F-18-11
8) Click [START].
18-7
Chapter 18
F-18-12
HDD
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
[2]
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
BOOTDEV
[1]
[3]
F-18-13
18-8
Chapter 18
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
HDD
APL_SEND
[1]
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
BOOTDEV
[2]
F-18-14
1. Unless you have selected 'ALL', you may execute formatting without registering HDFormat.
2. An attempt to format after selecting TMP_FAX in the absence of a fax board will cause an error.
F-18-15
18-9
Chapter 18
F-18-16
3) Click [Start].
4) When the Confirmation screen has appeared, click [Execute Formatting].
F-18-17
18-10
Chapter 18
F-18-18
6) Start a download session. Or, turn off and then on the machine to end the work.
If you have formatted all partitions or formatted BOOTDEV, be sure to download System newly. (Otherwise, 'E602' will occur when you turn on the main power.)
F-18-19
2) Click [Start].
18-11
Chapter 18
F-18-20
F-18-21
4) If you want to start another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done with downloading, turn off and then on the main power.
6) See the upgrade status indicated on the control panel. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main
power.
Be sure never to turn off the power while the machine is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. The ongoing session will be suspended
and the machine may fail to start up.
18-12
Chapter 18
F-18-22
F-18-23
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
18-13
Chapter 18
iR -----
Network
LCD
RUI(en)
Version check
System
RUI(it)
System Language
Language-XXen
RUI-XXen
Language-XXit
RUI-XXit
Language-XXja
RUI-XXja
Language
RUI(ja)
RUI
Network PC
F-18-24
T-18-3
2. If not correct, 'E744' will be indicated, and System Language will be used when the main power is turned off and then on.
T-18-4
RUI Display Language
Select using the RUI.
You can select a different language for a different PC.
18-14
<Language Code>
<Language>
de
German
en
English
fr
French
it
Italian
ja
Japanese
Chapter 18
Service PC
iR -----
SST
Main Controller Unit
iR ----Language
XXen
XXja
HDD
Download
BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
Language-XXja
RUI
XXen
XXja
RUI-XXen
RUI-XXja
F-18-25
F-18-26
2) Click [Start].
18-15
Chapter 18
F-18-27
3) When the result of the downloading session has appeared, click [OK].
F-18-28
Be sure never to turn off the power while the machine is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. Otherwise, the ongoing session will be
suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
18-16
Chapter 18
1) Select the version of SDICT to download.
F-18-29
2) Click [Start].
F-18-30
18-17
Chapter 18
F-18-31
4) If you want to run another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the
main power.
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. Otherwise, the ongoing session will be suspended
and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
F-18-32
2) Click [Start].
18-18
Chapter 18
F-18-33
F-18-34
4) If you want to run another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the
main power.
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software. Otherwise, the ongoing session will be suspended
and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
KEY has 2 types (XXxc and XXxp). Be sure to download both types.
18-19
Chapter 18
F-18-35
2) Click [Start].
F-18-36
18-20
Chapter 18
F-18-37
4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and
then on the main power.
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the ongoing write operation
will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
F-18-38
2) Click [Start].
18-21
Chapter 18
F-18-39
F-18-40
4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and
then on the main power.
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the ongoing write operation
will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
18-22
Chapter 18
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
PC for service
iR ----
may be upgraded by
DIMM replacement
C Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
SST
P Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
iR ----
Download
Boot
N Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
H Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
If a downloading session fails, you will have to replace the boot ROM.
F-18-42
2) Click [Start].
18-23
Chapter 18
F-18-43
F-18-44
4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and
then on the main power.
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a download session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the ongoing write operation will
be suspended and the machine may not start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
If the machine fails to start up, be sure to replace the boot ROM.
18-24
Chapter 18
iR ---Service PC
SST
iR ----
Printer unit
Reader unit
Signal cable
Download
Main controller
unit
Dcon
CPU
Flash ROM
Rcon
Reader controller PCB
Power cable
CPU
Flash ROM
Power supply
control signal
Power supply
unit
DC controller PCB
F-18-45
You will not be able to download Rcon unless the DC controller has started up normally (as, otherwise, the power supply control signal will not be valid and, as a
result, the reader unit remains without power).
F-18-46
2) Click [Start].
18-25
Chapter 18
F-18-47
F-18-48
4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When the downloading session has ended, turn off and then on the machine.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the machine, turn off
and then on the main power.
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the machine may not be able
to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
18-26
Chapter 18
Service PC
iR ---G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)
SST
Download
G3Fax
iR ---CPU
G3Fax
Main controller
unit
If a downloading session fails, you will have to replace the flash ROM DIMM.
F-18-50
2) Click [Start].
18-27
Chapter 18
F-18-51
F-18-52
4) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power of the machine.
5) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the machine, turn off
and then on the main power.
You will not be able to download G3Fax twice in succession. (Once downloading is executed, the board will be reset, causing download mode to end.)
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. Otherwise, the write operation (to the
flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board) may fail, preventing board functions. In the event the board fails to function, be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM found
on the G3 fax board.
18-28
Backup data
SramImg.bin
Chapter 18
Backup data
MEAP application
MeapBack.bin
for R&D
Sublog.txt
- If you are replacing the main controller PCB, you can transfer such data as parts counter readings by uploading the data before replacement and downloading
it after replacement.
- If you are replacing the HDD or executing 'ALL' or 'APL_MEP', you can temporarily set aside MEAP applications by uploading MeapBack before execution
and downloading it after execution.
- Only the machine uploaded can download SramImg and MeapBack.
Service PC
SST
iR XXXX
System
SramImg
Meapback
Printer unit
Uploading/Downloading
Downloading is possible only
in safe mode.
SRAM
SramImg.bin
HDD
Meapback.bin
F-18-54
18-29
Chapter 18
2) Select the data you want to back up.
F-18-55
3) Click [Start].
F-18-56
4) Enter a name of the file to be saved, and fill out a memo as needed. Then, click the save button.
18-30
Chapter 18
F-18-57
5) Click [OK].
F-18-58
18-31
Chapter 18
F-18-59
F-18-60
3) Click [Start].
18-32
Chapter 18
F-18-61
4) Click [OK].
F-18-62
5) When you are done with downloading, turn off and then on the main power.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine. When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and
then on the main power.
Be sure not to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software. The write operation will be suspended, and
the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and then download system software to be stored in the HDD such as System, Language, and
RUI.
18-33
Contents
Contents
19.1 Service Tools..............................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.1.1 List of Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................................ 19-1
19.1.2 List of Solvents/Oils ................................................................................................................................................................ 19-2
Chapter 19
Name
Toll No.
Digital
multimeter
Shape
Rank
Remarks
FY9-2002
Door switch
TKN-0093
Mirror
positioning tool
(front, rear)
FY9-3009
FY9-9196
Potential sensor
electrode
FY9-3012
Environment
sensor checking
sensor
FY9-3014
Tester extension
pin
FY9-3038
19-1
Chapter 19
No.
Name
Toll No.
Tester extension
pin (L-shaped)
FY9-3039
Shape
Rank
Remarks
T-19-2
Rank:
A: each service person is expected to carry one.
B: each group of five persons is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
19-2
No.
Name
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
Cleaning:
e.g., glass, plastic, rubber parts;
external covers.
Fluoride family
hydrocarbon,
alcohol, surface
activating agent, water
Solvent
Cleaning:
metal part; oil, toner.
fluoride family
hydrocarbon, chlorine family
hydrocarbon, alcohol.
Heat resisting
grease
Mineral family
lithium soap,
molybdenum
disulfide,
Lubricant
Mineral oil
(paraffin family)
Lubricant
Silicone oil
Cleaning:
photosensitive drum
Cerium oxide
Lubricant
Silicone oil
Conducting
grease
Ether, polytetra
fluoethylene
Feb 29 2008